Seat Exeo 2013 Owner’s Manual PDF

1 of 319
1 of 319

Summary of Content for Seat Exeo 2013 Owner’s Manual PDF

3R 50

12 00

3C T

In gl

s 3

R5 01

20 03

CT (

05 .1

3) (

G T9

)

EXEO Owners manual

EX EO

In

gl s

( 05

.1 3)

SEAT S.A. se preocupa constantemente por mantener todos sus tipos y modelos en un desarrollo continuo. Por ello le rogamos que com- prenda que, en cualquier momento, puedan producirse modificaciones del vehculo entregado en cuanto a la forma, el equipamiento y la tcnica. Por esta razn, no se puede derivar derecho alguno basndose en los datos, las ilustraciones y descripciones del presente Manual.

Los textos, las ilustraciones y las normas de este manual se basan en el estado de la informacin en el momento de la realizacin de la impresin. Salvo error u omisin, la informacin recogida en el presente manual es vlida en la fecha de cierre de su edicin.

No est permitida la reimpresin, la reproduccin o la traduccin, total o parcial, sin la autorizacin escrita de SEAT.

SEAT se reserva expresamente todos los derechos segn la ley sobre el Copyright. Reservados todos los derechos sobre modificacin.

Este papel est fabricado con celulosa blanqueada sin cloro.

SEAT S.A. - Reimpresin: 15.04.13

Foreword

This Instruction Manual and its corresponding supplements should be read carefully to familiarise yourself with your vehicle.

Besides the regular care and maintenance of the vehicle, its correct handling will help preserve its value.

For safety reasons, always note the information concerning accessories, modifications and part replace- ments.

If selling the vehicle, give all of the on-board documentation to the new owner, as it should be kept with the vehicle.

Table of Contents

Manual structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Safety First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Proper sitting position for occupants . . . . . . . . . 10 Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Knee airbag* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Side airbags* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Securing child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Warning and indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Speed warning* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Tyre pressure monitoring* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Remote control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Childproof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Sliding/tilting sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Rear vision mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Seats and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Manual adjustment of the front seats . . . . . . . . . 133 Electric adjustment of front seats* . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Lumbar support* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Driver seat memory* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Ashtray*, cigarette lighter* and electric sockets* . .147 Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Start-Stop function* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Parking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Cruise speed* (Cruise control system) . . . . . . . . 176 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Automatic gearbox* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Practical Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Intelligent technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Servotronic* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Driving and the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Economical and environmentally friendly driving 196 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

3Table of Contents

Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Removable towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . 210 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Care of the vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Vehicle interior maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Accessories and spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Mobile phones and two-way radios . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Athermic windscreen* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades . . . . 235 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

If and when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel . . . . . . . . . 252 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Tyre repair* (Tyre-Mobility-System) . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Changing bulbs. Halogen headlights . . . . . . . . . 266 Changing bulbs. Bi-Xenon AFS headlights . . . . . 272 Changing tail light bulbs (on side panel) . . . . . . 276 Changing tail light bulbs (on rear lid) . . . . . . . . . 281 Side turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Sun visor light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Towing and tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Description of specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Dimensions and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

4 Table of Contents

5Manual structure

Manual structure

What you should know before reading this manual

This manual contains a description of the equipment supplied with the ve- hicle at the time of press. Some of the equipment hereunder described will not be available until a later date, or is only available in certain markets.

As this is a general manual for the EXEO, some of the equipment and func- tions that are described in this manual are not included in all types or ver- sions of the model. These may vary or be modified depending on technical and market requirements, which is in no way deceptive advertising.

The illustrations are intended as a general guide and may vary from the equipment fitted in your vehicle in some details.

The direction indications (left, right, front, rear) appearing in this manual re- fer to the normal forward working direction of the vehicle except when oth- erwise indicated.

The equipment marked with an asterisk** is fitted as standard only in cer- tain versions, and is only supplied as optional extras for some versions, or are only offered in certain countries.

All registered marks are indicated with . Although the copyright sym- bol does not appear, it is a copyrighted mark.

The section is continued on the following page.

Marks the end of a section.

WARNING

Texts preceded by this symbol contain information on safety. They warn you about possible dangers of accident or injury.

CAUTION Texts with this symbol draw your attention to potential sources of damage to your vehicle.

For the sake of the environment Texts preceded by this symbol contain relevant information concerning envi- ronmental protection.

Note Texts preceded by this symbol contain additional information.

6 Content

Content This manual is structured to provide the information you need in an organ- ised way. The content of this Manual is divided into sections which belong to chapters (e.g. Air conditioning). The entire manual is divided into five large parts which are:

1. Safety First

Information about the vehicle equipment relating to passive safety such as seat belts, airbags, seats, etc.

2. Operating instructions

Information about the distribution of controls in the driver position of your vehicle, about the seat adjustment possibilities, about how to create a suit- able climate in the vehicle interior, etc.

3. Practical Tips

Advice relating to the driving, caring and maintenance of your vehicle and certain problems you can solve yourself.

4. Technical specifications

Figures, values and the dimensions of your vehicle.

5. Alphabetic index

At the end of this manual there is a detailed alphabetical index, this will help you to quickly find the information you require.

7Safe driving

Safety First

Safe driving

Brief introduction

Dear SEAT Driver

Safety first!

This chapter contains important information, tips, suggestions and warnings that you should read and consider for both your own safety and for your passengers' safety.

WARNING

This manual contains important information about the operation of the vehicle, both for the driver and the passengers. The other sections of the on-board documentation also contain further information that you should be aware of for your own safety and for the safety of your passen- gers.

Ensure that the on-board documentation is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is especially important when lending or selling the vehicle to another person.

Safety equipment

The safety equipment listed here are part of the vehicle's passenger restraint system. They work together to help re- duce the risk of injury in a wide variety of accident situa- tions.

Your safety and the safety of your passengers should not be left to chance. In the event of an accident, the safety features incorporated in your vehicle are capable of reducing the risk of injury. These are just a few of the safety features in your SEAT:

Three-point seat belts optimised for all seats

Belt force limiters for the seats

Belt tension devices for the front seat belts

Front airbags

Side airbags in the front and rear seat backrests*

Head-protection airbags*

Knee airbag for left-hand drive only

ISOFIX anchor points* for ISOFIX child safety seats on the outer rear seats

Height-adjustable head restraints

Adjustable steering column

These individual safety features are harmonised to provide you and your passengers with the best possible protection in case of an accident. Howev- er, they can only be effective if you and your passengers sit in the correct position and adjust and use the safety equipment properly.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

8 Safe driving

Therefore, this chapter explains why these safety features are so important, how they can protect you, what you need to remember when using them and how you and your passengers can gain the most benefit from them. There are also a number of important safety warnings that you and your passengers should always observe in order to minimise the risk of injury.

Safety is everyone's responsibility!

Before setting off

The driver is responsible for the safety of the passengers and the safe operation of the vehicle at all times.

For your own safety and the safety of your passengers, always note the following points before setting off:

Make sure that all lights and indicators are working properly.

Check tyre pressure.

Make sure that all windows are clean and give good visibility to the outside.

Secure all luggage and other items carefully page 16.

Make sure that no objects can interfere with the pedals.

Adjust the front seat, head restraint and mirrors correctly.

Make sure that the head restraints for all passengers are adjus- ted to the correct position.

Make sure that children are protected with suitable safety seats and properly worn seat belts page 46.

Sit in a correct position. Inform your passengers as to how they should sit page 10.

Fasten your seat belt correctly. Make sure that your passengers do the same page 18.

What affects safe driving?

Safety on the road is directly related to how you drive, and can also be affected by the passengers in the vehicle.

The driver is responsible for the safety of the vehicle and all its oc- cupants. If your ability to drive is impaired in any way, you endan- ger yourself and other road users . Therefore:

Do not let yourself be distracted by passengers or by using a mobile phone, etc.

Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (by medica- tion, alcohol, drugs, etc.).

Obey all traffic regulations and speed limits and always main- tain a safe distance to the vehicle in front.

Always adjust your speed to suit the road, traffic and weather conditions.

Take frequent breaks on long trips. Do not drive for more than two hours without a stop.

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.

9Safe driving

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.

What affects driving safety?

Driving safety is largely determined by your driving style and the personal behaviour of all vehicle occupants.

As a driver, you are responsible for yourself and your passengers. When your concentration or driving safety is affected by any cir- cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as others on the road , for this reason:

Always pay attention to traffic and do not get distracted by pas- sengers or telephone calls.

Never drive when your driving ability is impaired (e.g. by medi- cation, alcohol, drugs).

Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

Always reduce your speed as appropriate for road, traffic and weather conditions.

When travelling long distances, take breaks regularly - at least every two hours.

If possible, avoid driving when you are tired or stressed.

WARNING

When driving safety is impaired during a trip, the risk of injury and acci- dents increases.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

10 Safe driving

Proper sitting position for occupants

Correct sitting position for driver

The correct sitting position for the driver is important for safe and relaxed driving.

Fig. 1 The correct dis- tance between driver and steering wheel

Fig. 2 Correct head re- straint position for driver

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the driv- er:

Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a distance of at least 25 cm between the steering wheel and the centre of your chest Fig. 1.

Move the driver seat forwards or backwards so that you are able to press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals to the floor with your knees still slightly angled .

Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering wheel.

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head Fig. 2.

Move the seat backrest to an upright position so that your back rests completely against it.

11Safe driving

Fasten your seat belt securely page 18.

Keep both feet in the footwell so that you have the vehicle un- der control at all times.

Adjustment of the driver seat page 133.

WARNING

An incorrect sitting position of the driver can lead to severe injuries.

Adjust the driver seat so that there is at least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering wheel Fig. 1. If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the mini- mum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.

When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. This reduces the risk of injury when the driver airbag is triggered.

Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position, or in any other manner (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and head.

To reduce the risk of injury to the driver during sudden braking ma- noeuvres or an accident, never drive with the backrest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt correctly. The further the seat backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Adjust the head restraint properly to achieve optimal protection.

Correct sitting position for front passenger

The front passenger must sit at least 25 cm away from the dash panel so that the airbag can provide the greatest pos- sible protection in the event that it is triggered.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, we recommend the following adjustments for the front passenger:

Move the front passenger seat back as far as possible .

Move the seat backrest to an upright position so that your back rests completely against it.

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head, or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head page 13.

Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of the front pas- senger seat.

Fasten your seat belt securely page 18.

It is possible to deactivate the front passenger airbag in exceptional circum- stances page 24.

Adjusting the front passenger seat page 133.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

12 Safe driving

WARNING

An incorrect sitting position of the front passenger can lead to severe injuries.

Adjust the front passenger seat so that there is at least 25 cm be- tween your chest and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot protect you properly.

If your physical constitution prevents you from maintaining the mini- mum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. The workshop will help you decide if special specific modifications are necessary.

Always keep your feet in the footwell when the vehicle is moving; never rest them on the dash panel, out the window or on the seat. An in- correct sitting position exposes you to an increased risk of injury in case of a sudden braking or an accident. If the airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.

To reduce the risk of injury to the front passenger in events such as sudden braking manoeuvres or an accident, never travel with the back- rest tilted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide op- timal protection when the backrest is in an upright position and the front passenger is wearing his or her seat belt properly. The further the seat backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury due to incor- rect positioning of the belt web or to the incorrect sitting position!

Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum pro- tection.

Correct sitting position for passengers in the rear seats

Passengers in the rear seats must sit up straight, keep their feet in the footwells, have the head restraints positioned for use and wear their seat belts properly.

To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking ma- noeuvre or an accident, passengers on the rear seat bench must consider the following:

Adjust the head restraint to the correct position page 14.

Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of the rear seat.

Fasten your seat belt securely page 18.

Use an appropriate child restraint system when you take chil- dren in the vehicle page 46.

WARNING

If the passengers in the rear seats are not sitting properly, they could sustain severe injuries.

Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum pro- tection.

Seat belts can only provide optimal protection when seat backrests are in an upright position and the vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly. If passengers In the rear seats are not sitting in an upright position, the risk of injury due to incorrect positioning of the seat belt increases.

13Safe driving

Correct adjustment of front seat head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in most accident situations.

Fig. 3 Correctly adjusted head restraint viewed from the front

Fig. 4 Correctly adjusted head restraint viewed from the side

Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum protection.

Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your head or as close as possible to the same level as the top of your head and, at the very least, at eye level Fig. 3 and Fig. 4.

Adjusting the head restraints page 133

WARNING

Travelling with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries.

Incorrectly adjusted head restraints could result in death in the event of a collision or accident.

Incorrectly adjusted head restraints also increase the risk of injury during sudden or unexpected driving or braking manoeuvres.

The head restraints must always be adjusted according to the height of the passenger.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

14 Safe driving

Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints

Properly adjusted head restraints are an important part of the passenger protection and can reduce the risk of injuries in most accident situations

Fig. 5 Outer rear seats: Head restraints

Fig. 6 Head restraint po- sition warning label

Raising the head restraint

Take hold of the sides of the head restraint with both hands.

Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Lowering the head restraint

Press button A Fig. 5 and lower the head restraint.

Removing the head restraint

Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Press button A Fig. 5 and pull out the head restraint.

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restraint in its guides until it clicks into place. Press button A and lower the head restraint.

WARNING

Under no circumstances should the rear passengers travel while the head restraints are in the non-use position. See the warning label loca- ted on the rear side fixed window Fig. 6.

Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat rear head restraints.

Risk of injury in case of an accident!

CAUTION Note the instructions on the adjustment of the head restraints page 13.

15Safe driving

Examples of incorrect sitting positions

An incorrect sitting position can lead to severe injuries to ve- hicle occupants.

Seat belts can provide optimal protection only when the belt webs are properly positioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially re- duce the protective function of seat belts and increase the risk of injury due to incorrect seat belt position. As the driver, you are re- sponsible for all passengers, especially children.

Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect sitting position in the vehicle while travelling .

The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be dan- gerous for all vehicle occupants. The list is not complete, but we would like to make you aware of this issue.

Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in motion:

Never stand in the vehicle.

Never stand on the seats.

Never kneel on the seats.

Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.

Never lean against the dash panel.

Never lie on the rear bench.

Never sit on the front edge of a seat.

Never sit sideways.

Never lean out of a window.

Never put your feet out of a window.

Never put your feet on the dash panel.

Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.

Do not allow anyone to travel in the footwell.

Never travel without wearing the seat belt.

Do not allow anyone to travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNING

Any incorrect sitting position increases the risk of severe injuries.

Sitting in an incorrect position exposes the vehicle occupants to se- vere injuries if airbags are triggered, by striking a vehicle occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position.

Before the vehicle moves, assume the proper sitting position and maintain it throughout the trip. Before every trip, instruct your passen- gers to sit properly and to stay in this position during the trip page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

16 Safe driving

Pedal area

Pedals

The operation of all pedals must never be impaired by ob- jects or floor mats.

Ensure that you can always press the accelerator, brake and clutch pedals unimpaired to the floor.

Ensure that the pedals can return unimpaired to their initial po- sitions.

Use only floor mats which leave the pedal area free and can be securely fas- tened on the footwell.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the vehicle.

Wearing suitable shoes

Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feeling for the pedals.

WARNING

Restricting pedal operation can lead to critical situations while driv- ing.

Never place objects on the driver footwell. An object could move into the pedal area and impair pedal operation. In the event of a sudden driv- ing or braking manoeuvre, you will not be able to operate the brake, clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of accident!

Floor mats on the driver side

Only floor mats may be used which can be securely fastened in the footwell and do not impair operation of the pedals.

Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened during the trip and do not obstruct the pedals .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedals clear and which are secured to prevent them from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor mats from a speci- alised dealership.

WARNING

If the pedals are obstructed, an accident may occur. Risk of serious injuries.

Ensure that the floor mats are always securely attached.

Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This would reduce the pedal area and could obstruct the ped- als. Risk of accident.

Storing objects

Loading the luggage compartment

All luggage and other loose objects must be safely secured in the luggage compartment.

Unsecured objects which shift back and forth could impair the driv- ing safety or driving characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravity.

17Safe driving

Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment.

Place heavy objects as far forward as possible in the luggage compartment.

Place the heavy objects first.

WARNING

Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment could cause serious injuries.

Use suitable straps to secure heavy objects.

During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown forward, injuring vehicle occupants or passers-by. This increased risk of injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an inflating airbag. If this happens, objects can be transformed into missiles. Risk of fatal injury.

Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an accident. Therefore, it is essential to adjust your speed and driving style accord- ingly, to avoid accidents.

Never exceed the allowed axle weights or allowed maximum weight. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driv- ing characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, inju- ries and damage to the vehicle.

Never leave your vehicle unattended, especially when the rear lid is open. Children could climb into the luggage compartment, closing the door behind them; they will be trapped and run the risk of death.

Never allow children to play in or around the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors and rear lid when you leave the vehicle. Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that there are no adults or children in the vehicle.

Never transport passengers in the luggage compartment. All vehicle occupants must have their seat belt fastened page 18.

Note Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce fogging of the windows. Used air escapes through ventilation slits in the side trim of the luggage compart- ment. Ensure that the ventilation slits are never covered.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

18 Seat belts

Seat belts

Brief introduction

Before driving: remember your seat belt!

Wearing a seat belt properly can save your life!

In this section you will learn the importance of wearing seat belts, how they work and how to properly fasten, adjust and wear them.

Read and consider all the information as well as the warnings in this chapter.

WARNING

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe inju- ries increases.

Properly worn seat belts can reduce severe injuries in case of sudden braking manoeuvres or accidents. For safety reasons, you and all other vehicle occupants must always wear the seat belts properly while the ve- hicle is moving.

Pregnant women or people with physical disabilities must also use seat belts. Like all other vehicle occupants, these people can also sustain severe injuries if they are not wearing their seat belts properly.

Number of seats

Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.

In some versions, your vehicle is approved only for four seats. Two front seats and two rear seats.

WARNING

Never transport more than the permitted amount of people in your ve- hicle.

Every vehicle occupant must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to his or her seat. Children must be protected with an appro- priate child restraint system.

Seat belt warning lamp*

The control lamp acts as a reminder to the driver to fasten the seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

Fasten your seat belt securely.

Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly be- fore driving off.

Protect children by using a child seat according to the child's height and weight.

After switching on the ignition, the warning lamp will remain lit until the driver and front passenger (if applicable) have fastened their seat belts. When the vehicle has reached a certain speed, you will also hear a warning signal and the warning light will flash.

19Seat belts

Why wear seat belts?

Physical principles of frontal collisions

In the event of a frontal collision, a large amount of kinetic energy must be absorbed.

Fig. 7 Vehicle about to hit a wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts

Fig. 8 The vehicle hits the wall: the occupants are not wearing seat belts

It is easy to explain how the laws of physics work in the case of a head-on collision: When a vehicle starts moving Fig. 7, a certain amount of energy known as kinetic energy is produced in the vehicle and its occupants.

The amount of kinetic energy depends on the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the vehicle and its passengers. The higher the speed and the greater the weight, the more energy there is to be released in an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), for example, the kinetic energy is multiplied by four.

Because the vehicle occupants in our example are not restrained by seat belts, all of the occupants' kinetic energy has to be absorbed at the point of impact Fig. 8.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (20 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bodies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

20 Seat belts

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are not attached to the vehicle. In a head-on collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehi- cle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.

The danger of not using the seat belt

The general belief that the passengers can protect them- selves with their hands in a minor collision is false.

Fig. 9 A driver not wear- ing a seat belt is thrown forward violently

Fig. 10 The unbelted passenger in the rear seat is thrown forward vi- olently, hitting the driver wearing a seat belt

Even at low speeds the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that it is not possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In a frontal colli- sion, unbelted vehicle occupants are thrown forward and will make violent contact with the steering wheel, dash panel, windscreen or whatever else is in the way Fig. 9.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts. When triggered, airbags provide only additional protection. All occupants (including the driver) must wear seat belts properly at all times during the trip. This will reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of an accident regardless of whether an air- bag is fitted for the seat or not.

Note that airbags can be triggered only once. To achieve the best possible protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly so that you will be protected in accidents in which no airbag is deployed.

It is also important for the rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could otherwise be thrown forward violently through the vehicle interi- or in an accident. Passengers in the rear seats who do not use seat belts endanger not only themselves but also the front occupants Fig. 10.

21Seat belts

Seat belt protection

Passengers not wearing seat belts risk severe injuries in the event of an accident.

Fig. 11 A driver wearing the seat belt properly is secured by the belt in sharp braking

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting po- sitions and substantially reduce the kinetic energy in the event of an acci- dent. Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to severe injuries. In addition, properly worn seat belts reduce the dan- ger of being thrown from the vehicle.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to absorb kinetic energy. The front part of your vehicle and other passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also de- signed to absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all these features reduce the releasing kinetic energy and consequently, the risk of injury.

Our examples describe frontal collisions. Of course, properly worn seat belts substantially reduce the risk of injury in all other types of accidents. This is why it is so important to fasten seat belts before every trip, even when "just driving around the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seat belts as well. Accident statistics have shown that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury and improving the chances of survival in a seri- ous accident. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts improve the protection provided by airbags in the event of an accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt is required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the seat belts must be fas- tened and worn. The front airbags, for example, are only triggered in some frontal accidents. The front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal collisions, minor side collisions, rear collisions, overturns or accidents in which the airbag trigger threshold value in the control unit is not exceeded.

Therefore, you should always wear your seat belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants have fastened their seat belts properly before you drive off!

Safety instructions on using seat belts

If seat belts are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the risk of injury in an accident.

Always wear the seat belt as described in this section.

Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened at all times and are not damaged.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

22 Seat belts

WARNING

If the seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The optimal protection from seat belts can be ach- ieved only if you use them properly.

Fasten your seat belt before every trip - even when driving in town. The other vehicle occupants must also wear the seat belts at all times, otherwise they run the risk of being injured.

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.

Never allow two passengers (even children) to share the same seat belt.

Always keep both feet in the footwell in front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in motion.

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.

The seat belt must never be twisted while it is being worn.

The seat belt should never lie on hard or fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, etc.) because this can cause injuries.

Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

Never wear the seat belt under the arm or in any other incorrect posi- tion.

Loose, bulky clothing (such as an overcoat over a jacket) impairs the proper fit and function of the seat belts, reducing their capacity to pro- tect.

The slot in the seat belt buckle must not be blocked with paper or other objects, as this can prevent the latch plate from engaging securely.

Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings or similar instruments to al- ter the position of the belt webbing.

WARNING (Continued)

Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to the connections, belt retrac- tors or parts of the buckle could cause severe injuries in the event of an accident. Therefore, you must check the condition of all seat belts at reg- ular intervals.

Seat belts which have been worn in an accident and stretched must be replaced by a specialised workshop. Renewal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked.

Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be removed or modified in any way.

The belts must be kept clean, otherwise the retractors may not work properly page 220.

23Seat belts

Seat belts

Seat belt adjustment

The seat belts for the front and rear occupants are locked in- to position by a latch.

Fig. 12 Belt buckle and latch plate of seat belt

The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if the seat belt is not positioned correctly.

Adjust the seat and head restraint correctly.

To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch plate and pull it slowly across your chest and lap.

Insert the latch into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is securely locked with a click Fig. 12.

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.

The seat belts are equipped with an automatic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full freedom of movement is permitted when the shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, during sudden braking, during travel in steep areas or bends and during acceleration, the automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is locked.

The automatic belt retractors on the front seats are fitted with seat belt ten- sioners page 27.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The seat belts offer best protection only when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened properly.

Never put the latch plate in the buckle of another seat. If you do this, the seat belt will not protect you properly and the risk of injury is in- creased.

If a vehicle occupant is incorrectly belted in, the seat belt cannot pro- tect him or her properly. An incorrectly positioned seat belt can cause ex- tremely severe injuries.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

24 Seat belts

Seat belt position

Seat belts offer their maximum protection only when they are properly positioned.

Fig. 13 Correct seat belt and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from front

Fig. 14 Correct seat belt and head restraint posi- tions, viewed from side

The following features are available to adjust the seat belt in the shoulder region:

belt height adjustment for the front seats.

front seat height adjustment*.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoul- der, never across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the torso Fig. 13.

The lap part of the seat belt must lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and snugly on the pelvis Fig. 14. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack.

Read and observe the warnings page 21.

25Seat belts

Pregnant women must also fasten their seat belts properly

The best protection for the unborn child is for the mother to wear the seat belt properly at all times during the pregnan- cy.

Fig. 15 Positioning seat belts during pregnancy

The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the seat belt is properly positioned page 24.

Adjust the front seat and head restraint correctly page 10.

Holding the latch plate, pull the belt evenly across your chest and as low as possible over the pelvis Fig. 15.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the appropriate seat and push it down until it is securely locked with a click .

Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely engaged in the buckle.

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause severe injuries in the event of an accident.

For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and always lie flat so that no pressure is exerted on the abdomen.

Read and observe the warnings page 21.

Seat belt release

The seat belt must not be unfastened until the vehicle has come to a standstill.

Fig. 16 Remove latch plate from buckle

Press the red button on the belt buckle Fig. 16. The latch plate is released and springs out .

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

26 Seat belts

Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily and the trim is not damaged.

WARNING

Never unbuckle a seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. If you do, you increase the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.

Seat belt height adjustment

Seat belt height adjusters can be used to adjust the height of the shoulder area of the seat belt.

Fig. 17 Belt height ad- juster

The belt height adjuster can be lowered by keeping the button pressed down at the same time.

Press button Fig. 17 1 to adjust the belt height.

Take hold of the top guide fitting and slide it up or down so that the shoulder part of the seat belt is positioned roughly midway over the shoulder, although it must never rest against the neck Fig. 17 2 in Seat belt position on page 24.

After adjusting, pull the belt sharply to check that the catch on the guide fitting is engaged securely.

Note It is also possible to adjust the height of the front seats to obtain the best position for the front seat belts.

Incorrectly fastened seat belts

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severe or even mortal injuries.

Seat belts can provide optimal protection only if the belt web is properly worn. The seat belts must be fastened exactly in the order described in this chapter. An incorrect sitting position impairs sub- stantially the protection a seat belt offers and can lead to severe or fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially in- creased when a deploying airbag strikes a vehicle occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position. As the driver, you are re- sponsible for yourself and all passengers, especially children. Therefore:

Never allow anyone to wear the seat belt incorrectly while the vehicle is moving .

27Seat belts

WARNING

An incorrectly worn seat belt increases the risk of severe injuries.

Before every trip, instruct your passengers to adjust their seat belts properly and to wear them for the whole journey.

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of seat belts page 21.

Seat belt tensioners

Function of the seat belt tensioner

During a frontal collision, the seat belts on the front seats are retracted automatically.

The seat belts for the occupants in the front seats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sensors will trigger the belt tensioners during severe head-on, lateral and rear collisions only if the seat belt is being worn. This retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing the forward motion of the occupants.

The seat belt tensioner can be triggered only once.

The seat belt tensioners will not be triggered in the event of a light frontal, side or rear collision, if the vehicle overturns or in situations where no large forces act on the front, side or rear of the vehicle.

Note If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a fine dust is produced. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the system are scrapped. Specialised workshops are famili- ar with these regulations, which are also available to you.

Service and disposal of belt tensioners

The belt tensioners are components of the seat belts that are installed in the seats of your vehicle. If you work on the belt tensioners or remove and install parts of the system when performing other repair work, the seat belt may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an acci- dent, the belt tensioners function incorrectly or not at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt tensioner is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution, regula- tions, which are known to the specialised workshops, must be observed.

WARNING

Improper use or repairs not carried out by qualified mechanics in- crease the risk of severe or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners may fail to trigger or may trigger in the wrong circumstances.

Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the belt ten- sioners or seat belts.

The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and automatic retractor cannot be repaired.

Any work on the belt tensioners and seat belts, including the removal and refitting of system parts in conjunction with other repair work, must be performed by a specialised workshop only.

The belt tensioners will only provide protection for one accident and must be changed if they have been activated.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

28 Airbag system

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why wear a seat belt and assume the correct sitting position?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the seat belt must always be worn properly and the correct sit- ting position must be assumed.

For your own safety and the safety of the passengers, please en- sure the following before driving:

Always wear the seat belt properly page 18.

Adjust the driver seat and the steering wheel correctly page 10.

Adjust the front passenger seat correctly page 11.

Adjust the head restraint correctly page 13.

Use the correct child restraint system to protect children in your vehicle page 46.

The airbag is deployed at high speed in fractions of a second. If you have an incorrect seating position at the time the airbag is deployed, it could cause you critical injuries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle occupants as- sume a correct sitting position while travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may cause a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be thrown forward into the area of the deploying airbag. In this case,

the inflating airbag may inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible distance between yourself and the front airbag. This way, the front airbags can completely deploy when trig- gered, providing their maximum protection.

The most important factors that will trigger an airbag are: the type of acci- dent, the angle of collision and the speed of the vehicle.

Whether the airbags are triggered depends primarily on the vehicle deceler- ation rate resulting from the collision and detected by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured by the control unit remains below the specified reference values, the front, side and/or curtain airbag will not be triggered. Take into account that the visible damage in a vehicle involved in an accident, no matter how serious, is not a determining factor for the airbags to have been triggered.

WARNING

Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or assuming an incorrect sitting po- sition can lead to critical or fatal injuries.

All vehicle occupants, including children, who are not properly belted can sustain critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is triggered. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat. Never transport children in the vehicle if they are not restrained or the restraint system is not appropriate for their age, size or weight.

If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a sub- stantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be fur- ther increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.

29Airbag system

WARNING (Continued)

To reduce the risk of injury from an inflating airbag, always wear the seat belt properly page 18.

Always adjust the front seats properly.

The danger of fitting a child seat on the front passenger seat

Rear-facing child seats must never be used on the front pas- senger seat when the front passenger airbag is enabled.

The front passenger front airbag is a serious risk for a child if it is activated. The front passenger seat is life threatening to a child if he/she is transpor- ted in a rear-facing child seat. Children up to 12 years old should always travel on the rear seat.

If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating airbag can strike it with such force that it can cause critical or fatal injuries.

Therefore we strongly recommend you to transport children on the rear seats. That is the safest place for children in the vehicle. Alternatively, the front passenger airbag can be disabled with a key-operated switch page 44. When transporting children, use a child seat suitable for the age and size of each child page 46.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate the air- bag, the vehicle must be taken to a Technical Service.

WARNING

If a child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, the risk to the child of sustaining critical or fatal injuries in the event of an accident in- creases.

Never secure a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat if the front passenger airbag is enabled. The child can suffer critical or fatal in- juries if the front passenger airbag is triggered.

An inflating front passenger airbag can strike the rear-facing child seat and project it with great force against the door, the roof or the back- rest.

If, under special circumstances, it is necessary to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat, it is absolutely es- sential that you observe the following safety measures:

Deactivate the front passenger airbag page 44, Deactivating airbags.

Child seats must be approved by the child seat manufacturer for use on a front passenger seat with front or side airbag.

Follow the installation instructions given by the child seat manu- facturer and observe the safety instructions page 46, Child safe- ty.

Before properly installing the child seat, push the front passenger seat completely backwards so that the greatest possible distance to the front passenger airbag is ensured.

Ensure that no objects prevent the front passenger seat from being pushed completely back.

The backrest of the front passenger seat must be in an upright po- sition.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

30 Airbag system

Control lamp for airbag and seat belt tensioner

This control lamp monitors the airbag and seat belt tension- er system.

The control lamp monitors all airbags and seat belt tensioners in the vehi- cle, including control units and wiring connections.

Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner system

Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems operation is constantly moni- tored electronically. The control lamp will light every time the ignition is switched on until you attach your seatbelt.

The system must be checked when the control lamp :

does not light up when the ignition is switched on

turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on

lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving

In the event of a malfunction, the warning lamp remains on continuously. Have the system inspected immediately by a specialised workshop.

If any of the airbags are disabled by a Technical Service, the warning lamp lights for several seconds more after the verification and will turn off if there is no fault.

WARNING

If there is a malfunction, the airbag and belt tensioner system cannot properly perform its protective function.

If a malfunction occurred, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an accident, the airbag system and belt tensioners may not be triggered, or may not be triggered correctly.

Repairs, maintenance and disposal of airbags

The parts of the airbag system are installed in various places in your vehi- cle. If work is carried out on the airbag system or parts have to be removed and fitted on the system when performing other repair work, parts of the air- bag system may be damaged. In the event of an accident this could cause the airbag to inflate incorrectly or not inflate at all.

The relevant safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the airbag are scrapped. Specialised workshops and vehicle disposal centres are familiar with these requirements.

WARNING

If repairs are not carried out by a professional, or if the airbags are used incorrectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries is increased. The air- bags may fail to inflate, or could inflate in the wrong circumstances.

Do not cover or stick anything on the steering wheel hub or the sur- face of the airbag unit on the passenger side of the dash panel, and do not obstruct or modify them in any way.

It is important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or tele- phone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.

To clean the steering wheel or dash panel, you may use only a dry or a water-moistened cloth. Never clean the dash panel and the airbag mod- ule surface with cleaners containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the airbag triggered, plastic parts could become de- tached and cause injuries.

Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or install parts of the airbag system.

31Airbag system

WARNING (Continued)

Any work on the airbag system or removal and installation of the air- bag components for other repairs (such as repairs to the steering wheel) should be performed only by a specialised workshop. Specialised work- shops have the necessary tools, repair information and qualified person- nel.

We strongly recommend you to go to a specialised workshop for all work on the airbag system.

Never attempt to alter the front bumper or the body.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

For the sake of the environment The airbags, which are a special type of waste, must be disposed of through an authorised service, because they contain pyrotechnic elements.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

32 Airbag system

Front airbags

Description of front airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

Fig. 18 Driver airbag in the steering wheel and knee airbag in the dash panel

Fig. 19 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel

The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel Fig. 18 and the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel Fig. 19. Air- bags are identified by the word AIRBAG. On the driver side, the knee air- bag* is found in the footwell lining, under the instrument panel.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the front occupants additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a se- vere frontal collision page 35, Safety notes on the front airbag system.

In addition to their normal function of restraining the occupants, the seat belts also hold the driver and front passenger in a position where the air- bags can provide maximum protection in a frontal collision.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety page 18, Brief introduction.

The main parts of the front airbag system are:

an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)

the two front airbags (airbag with gas generator) for the driver and front passenger

a knee airbag* for the driver,

a control lamp on the dash panel page 30

The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control lamp will light up for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the control lamp :

does not light up when the ignition is switched on page 30

turns off and then lights up again after the ignition is switched on

lights up or flashes while the vehicle is moving

33Airbag system

The front airbag system will not be triggered if:

the ignition is switched off

there is a minor frontal collision

there is a side collision

there is a rear-end collision

the vehicle turns over

WARNING

The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal colli- sion the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Operation of front airbags

Inflated airbags reduce the risk of injuries to the head or chest.

Fig. 20 Inflated front air- bags

The airbag system is designed so that the airbags for the driver and front passenger are triggered in a severe frontal collision.

In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig- gered together.

When the system is triggered, the airbags fill with a propellant gas and de- ploy in front of the driver and front passenger Fig. 20. The fully deployed airbags cushion the forward movement of the front occupants and help to reduce the risk of injury to the head and the upper part of the body.

The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel- lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibility.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

34 Airbag system

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may

develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

Airbag covers when the frontal airbags are triggered

Fig. 21 Airbag covers reacting when the front airbags are triggered

The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel or dash panel when the driver and front passenger airbags are triggered Fig. 21. The airbag cov- ers remain connected to the steering wheel or the dash panel.

35Airbag system

Safety notes on the front airbag system

If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the risk of injury in many kinds of accident.

WARNING

It is important for the driver and front passenger to keep a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel and dash panel. If the minimum distance is not observed then the airbags do not correctly protect the ve- hicle occupants; risk of fatal injuries! In addition, the front seats and head restraints must always be positioned correctly for the height of the occupant.

If you are not wearing a seat belt, if you lean forward or to the side while travelling or assume an incorrect sitting position, there is a sub- stantially increased risk of injury. This increased risk of injury will be fur- ther increased if you are struck by an inflating airbag.

Never let a child travel on the front seat without an appropriate re- straint system. If the airbag is triggered in an accident, children can sus- tain serious or fatal injuries from the airbag as it inflates page 46, Child safety.

The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in any case be occupied by other passenger, pets and objects.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

Knee airbag*

Description of the knee airbag

The airbag system provides additional protection to front seat passengers if they are properly secured.

Fig. 22 Driver knee air- bag

The knee airbag for the driver is located in the dash panel underneath the steering wheel Fig. 22.

The knee airbag offers additional protection to the driver's knees and upper and lower thigh areas as a supplement to the seat belts.

If the front airbags deploy, the knee airbag also deploys in severe frontal collisions page 33.

Besides their normal safety function, seat belts help keep the driver in posi- tion in case of a frontal collision so that the airbags can provide protection.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts. It is, on the other hand, part of the overall occupant safety system of your vehicle. Always remember

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

36 Airbag system

that the airbag system can only help to protect you if you are wearing your seat belt and wearing it properly.

Remember too that airbags will deploy only once and only in certain kinds of accidents - your seat belts are always there to offer protection in those accidents in which airbags are not supposed to deploy or when they have already deployed, for example when your vehicle strikes or is struck by an- other after the first collision.

This is just one of the reasons why an airbag is not a substitute for the seat belt. The airbag system works most effectively when used with the seat belts. Therefore, always wear your seat belts correctly.

It is important to remember that while the airbag system is designed to re- duce the possibility of serious injuries, other injuries, for example, swelling, bruising, and minor abrasions can also be associated with airbags.

The knee airbag system basically consists of:

The electronic control module

One inflatable airbag (airbag and gas generator) for the driver

An airbag indicator light on the instrument panel

The knee airbag system will not be triggered:

if the ignition is switched off

in frontal collisions when the deceleration measured by the control unit is too low

in side collisions

in rear-end collisions

in rollovers

in the event of a system malfunction (hazard warning lights/turn signals illuminated) page 65.

WARNING

Seat belts and the airbag system can only provide protection when occupants are in the proper seating position.

If the airbag indicator light comes on when the vehicle is being used, have the system inspected immediately by your Technical Service. The airbag may not work properly when the vehicle acceleration in a side col- lision is high enough to deploy the airbag. See also page 65.

How knee airbags work

The risk of injury to the leg area is reduced by fully deployed knee airbags.

Fig. 23 Inflated airbags protect in a frontal colli- sion.

The knee airbag system has been designed so that the airbag for the driver is deployed in certain but not all frontal collisions.

If the front airbag deploys, the knee airbag also deploys in severe frontal collisions.

37Airbag system

When the system is deployed, the airbag starts to fill with a propellant gas, and inflates between the lower part of the dash panel and the driver Fig. 23.

Although they are not a soft pillow, they can cushion the impact and in this way help to reduce the risk of injury to lower limbs.

All this takes place instantaneously, so fast that many people do not even realise that the airbags have deployed. The airbags also inflate with a great deal of force and it is important for occupant safety that nothing should be in their way when they deploy.

Fully inflated airbags in combination with properly worn seat belts slow down and limit the occupant's forward movement and help to reduce the risk of injury.

Important safety notes on the knee airbag system

Airbags are only additional safety

Always wear seat belts correctly and drive in a proper seated position. There is a lot of information that you and your passengers should know and do so that the seat belts and airbags can provide additional protection.

WARNING

An inflating knee airbag can cause serious injuries. Wearing seat belts incorrectly and improper seating positions increase the risk of serious personal injury and death whenever a vehicle is being used.

The airbag system cannot protect you properly if you are seated too close to any of the airbag locations. When adjusting the seat positions, it is important for the driver to keep the upper body and knees at the fol- lowing minimum safety distances:

25 cm between the chest and the steering wheel/dash panel.

10 cm between the knees and the lower part of the dash panel.

The risk of personal injury increases if you lean forward or to the side, or if the seat is improperly positioned and you are not wearing your seat belt. The risk increases even more should the airbag deploy.

Always make sure that the knee airbag can inflate without interfer- ence. Objects between yourself and the airbag can increase the risk of in- jury in an accident by interfering with the way the airbag deploys or by being thrust into you as the airbag deploys.

No objects of any kind should be carried in the footwell area in front of the driver's seat. Bulky objects (shopping bags, for example) can hinder or prevent proper deployment of the airbag. Small objects can be thrown through the vehicle if the airbag deploys and injure you or your passengers.

Make sure there are no cracks, deep scratches or other damage in the area of the dash panel where the knee airbag is located.

If children are incorrectly seated, their risk of injury increases in the case of an accident page 46.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

38 Airbag system

Side airbags*

Description of side airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

Fig. 24 Side airbag in driver seat

The front side airbags are located in the driver seat and front passenger seat backrests Fig. 24. The rear side airbags* are located in the rear wheel housing lining. The locations are identified by the text AIRBAG in the upper region of the backrests and in the rear wheel housing lining.

Together with the seat belts, the side airbag system gives the front seat oc- cupants additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side collision page 40, Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system.

In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers on the front seats to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their normal function of protecting the occupants in a collision, the seat belts also hold the passengers in the front seats and the outer rear seats in a position where the side airbags can provide maximum protection.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their seat belts. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety page 18, Brief introduction.

The side airbag system will not be triggered if:

the ignition is switched off

there is a minor side collision

there is a frontal collision

there is a rear-end collision

the vehicle turns over

The main parts of the airbag system are:

an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)

The front side airbags in the backrests of the front seats and the rear side airbags in the lining of the rear wheel housing

a control lamp on the dash panel page 30

The airbag system operation is monitored electronically. The airbag control lamp will light up for approx. 4 seconds every time the ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

WARNING

In a side collision, the side airbags will not work, if the sensors do not correctly measure the pressure increase on the interior of the doors, due to air escaping through the areas with holes or openings in the door panel.

Never drive the vehicle if the interior panels have been removed.

Never drive if the interior door panels have been removed or if the panels have not been correctly fitted.

39Airbag system

WARNING (Continued)

Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeakers in the door panels have been removed, unless the holes left by the loudspeakers have been cor- rectly closed.

Always check that the openings are closed or covered if loudspeakers or other equipment are fitted in the interior door panels.

Any work carried out to the doors should be made in an authorised specialised workshop.

The seat belts and airbags can only provide maximum protection if the occupants are seated correctly page 10, Proper sitting position for occupants.

If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a side colli- sion, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Operation of side airbags

Inflated airbags can reduce the risk of head or chest injury in many side impact collisions.

Fig. 25 Inflated side air- bag on left side of vehicle

In some side collisions, the side airbag is triggered on the impact side of the vehicle Fig. 25.

In certain types of accident the front, curtain and side airbags may be trig- gered together.

When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas.

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the occupants of the front seats and the outer rear seats and help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

40 Airbag system

The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel- lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.

Safety notes on the operation of the side airbag system

If airbags are used correctly, they can considerably reduce the risk of injury in side impact collisions.

WARNING

If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean forward, or are not seated correctly while the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater risk of injury if the side airbag system is triggered in an accident.

In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.

Occupants of the outer seats must never carry any objects or pets in the deployment space between them and the airbags, or allow children or other passengers to travel in this position. It is also important not to attach any accessories (such as cup holders) to the doors. This would im- pair the protection offered by the side airbags.

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets.

Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, must not be exerted upon the backrest bolster because the system may be damaged. In this case, the side airbags would not be triggered.

Under no circumstances should protective covers be fitted over seats with side airbags unless the covers have been approved for use in your vehicle. Because the airbag is triggered from the side of the backrest, the

WARNING (Continued)

use of non-approved seat covers would obstruct the side airbag, serious- ly reducing the airbag's effectiveness page 222, Accessories, replace- ment of parts and modifications.

Any damage to the original seat upholstery or around the seams of the side airbag units must be repaired immediately by a specialised workshop.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

When children assume an incorrect sitting position, they expose themselves to an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. This is particularly the case if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; this could have critical consequences including serious injury or death page 46, Child safety.

Any work on the side airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the front seat) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct operation of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modi- fied in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be done in a specialised workshop.

41Airbag system

Curtain airbags

Description of curtain airbags

The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts.

Fig. 26 Location of head airbags on the left side of the vehicle

The curtain airbags are located on both sides in the interior above the doors Fig. 26 and are identified with the text AIRBAG.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the curtain airbag system gives the vehi- cle occupants additional protection for the head and upper body in the event of a severe side collision page 42, Safety notes on the operation of the curtain airbag system.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seat belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's overall passive safety system. Please bear in mind that the airbag system can only work effectively when the vehicle occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have adjusted the head restraints properly. Therefore, it is most important to wear the seat belts at all times, not only because this is required by law in most countries, but also for your safety page 18, Brief introduction.

The main parts of the curtain airbag system are:

an electronic control and monitoring system (control unit)

the curtain airbags (airbags with gas generator) for the driver, front pas- senger and passengers on the rear seats

a control lamp on the dash panel page 30

The airbag system operation is monitored electronically.

The curtain airbag system will not be triggered if:

the ignition is switched off

there is a frontal collision

there is a rear-end collision

the vehicle turns over

there is a minor side collision

WARNING

If a fault has occurred in the airbag system, have the system checked im- mediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a danger that during a collision, the system may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

42 Airbag system

Operation of curtain airbags

Fully inflated airbags reduce the risk of head or chest injury in a side collision.

Fig. 27 Deployed curtain airbags

During some side collisions the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side of the vehicle Fig. 27.

In certain types of accident the front, side and curtain airbags may be trig- gered together.

When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled with propellant gas. In the process, the curtain airbag covers the side windows and door pillars.

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within thousandths of a second, to provide additional protection in the event of an accident. A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys. This is normal and it is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.

The fully deployed airbags cushion the movement of the front occupants and help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper body.

The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propel- lant gas when an occupant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the head and chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag.

Safety notes on the operation of the curtain airbag system

If you use airbags correctly, they can considerably reduce the risk of injury in many kinds of accident.

WARNING

In order for the side airbags to provide their maximum protection, the prescribed sitting position must always be maintained with seat belts fastened while travelling.

For safety reasons, the curtain airbag must be disabled in those vehi- cles fitted with a screen dividing the interior of the vehicle. See a Techni- cal Service to make this adjustment.

There must be no other persons, animals or objects between the oc- cupants of the outer seats and the deployment space of the curtain air- bags so that the curtain airbag can deploy without restriction and pro- vide the greatest possible protection. Therefore, sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows page 222, Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications.

The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers.

The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed.

43Airbag system

WARNING (Continued)

Any work on the curtain airbag system or removal and installation of the airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lin- ing) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, faults may occur during the airbag system operation.

Do not attempt to modify components of the airbag system in any way.

The side and head airbags are managed through sensors located in the interior of the front doors. To ensure the correct operation of the side and head airbags neither the doors nor the door panels should be modi- fied in any way (e.g. fitting loudspeakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All work carried out on the front door must be done in a specialised workshop.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

44 Airbag system

Deactivating airbags

Front passenger front airbag deactivation

If you fit a rear-facing child seat to the front passenger seat, the front passenger front airbag must be de-activated.

Fig. 28 In the glove com- partment: switch for acti- vating and deactivating the front passenger air- bag

Fig. 29 Control lamp for deactivated front passen- ger airbag in centre con- sole

When the front passenger airbag is deactivated, only the front air- bag is deactivated. All the other airbags in the vehicle remain acti- vated.

Disabling the front passenger front airbag

Switch the ignition off.

Turn the ignition key in the key-operated switch in the glove compartment to position 0 OFF Fig. 28.

Check that the control lamp, OFF, on the instrument panel Fig. 29 remains lit when the ignition is switched on .

Activating the front passenger front airbag

Switch the ignition off.

Turn the ignition key in the key-operated switch in the glove compartment to position 1 ON Fig. 28.

45Airbag system

Check that the control lamp on the instrument panel Fig. 29 does not light up when the ignition is switched on .

WARNING

The driver is responsible for the proper position of the key-operated switch.

You should only deactivate the front passenger front airbag when, in exceptional cases, you have to use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat page 46, Child safety.

Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Other- wise, there is a risk of death. If under exceptional circumstances it is nec- essary to transport a child in a rear-facing child seat on the front passen- ger seat, you must always disable the front passenger front airbag.

As soon as the child seat is no longer needed on the front passenger seat, enable the front passenger front airbag again.

Only deactivate the front passenger front airbag when the ignition is off, otherwise a fault may occur in the airbag system, which could cause the airbag to not deploy properly or not deploy at all.

WARNING (Continued)

When the front passenger front airbag is deactivated, if the control lamp AIRBAG OFF is not continuously lit up, there may be a fault in the airbag system:

Have the airbag system inspected immediately by a specialised workshop.

Do not use a child seat on the front passenger seat! The front pas- senger front airbag could be triggered despite the fact that there is a fault in the system and, as a result, a child could sustain serious or fatal injuries.

It is unpredictable whether the front passenger airbag will deploy in the event of an accident. Warn all your passengers of this.

When using the ignition key to activate/deactivate the front passen- ger front airbag, only the front passenger airbag will be activated/deacti- vated. The side airbag and head airbag on the passenger side will remain active.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

46 Child safety

Child safety

Brief introduction

Introduction

Statistics show that children are generally safer on the rear seat than on the front passenger seat.

For safety reasons we recommend that children under 12 years of age travel on the rear seats. Depending on their age, height and weight, children trav- elling on the rear seat must use a child seat or a seat belt. It is advisable that children always travel in the rear seats, the rear central position being the safest seat, since the risk of injuries in a side collision is diminished.

The physical laws involved and the forces acting in a collision apply also to children page 19, Why wear seat belts?. But unlike adults, children do not have fully developed muscle and bone structures. This means that children are subject to a greater risk of injury.

To reduce this risk, children must always use special child restraint systems when travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety products from the SEAT Original Ac- cessories Programme, which includes systems for all ages made by Peke1).

These systems have been especially designed and approved, complying with the ECE-R44. regulation.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require- ments when installing and using child seats. Always read and note page 46, Safety notes on using child seats.

We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc- tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.

Safety notes on using child seats

Proper use of child seats substantially reduces the risk of in- jury in an accident!

As the driver, you are responsible for any children you transport in your vehicle.

Protect your children by properly using the appropriate child seats page 48.

Always ensure that the seat belt is properly positioned accord- ing to the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child seat.

When travelling, do not allow children to distract you from traf- fic.

Take breaks regularly during long trips. Take a break at least ev- ery two hours.

1) Not for all countries

47Child safety

WARNING

Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger front airbag has been disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in excep- tional cases, to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front passenger front airbag must always be disabled page 44, Deactivating airbags. If the passenger seat has a height adjustment option, move it to the highest position.

For those vehicles that do not include a key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, the vehicle must be taken to a Technical Service.

All vehicle occupants, especially children, must assume the proper sitting position and be properly belted in while travelling.

Never hold children or babies on your lap, this can result in potential- ly fatal injuries to the child!

Never allow a child to be transported in a vehicle without being prop- erly secured, or to stand up or kneel on a seat while travelling. In an acci- dent, the child could be flung through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal injuries to themselves and to the other vehicle occupants.

If children assume an improper sitting position when the vehicle is moving, they expose themselves to greater risk of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident. This is particularly impor- tant if the child is travelling on the front passenger seat and the airbag system is triggered in an accident; as this could cause serious injury or even death.

A suitable child seat can protect your child!

Never leave an unsupervised child alone on a child seat or in the vehi- cle.

Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the vehicle. This can be fatal.

WARNING (Continued)

Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall must not wear a normal seat belt without a child seat, as this could cause injuries to the abdomi- nal and neck areas during a sudden braking manoeuvre or in an accident.

Do not allow the seat belt to become twisted or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause injuries even in a minor colli- sion or in sudden braking manoeuvres.

The seat belt provides maximum protection only when the seat belt is properly positioned page 23, Seat belts.

Only one child may occupy a child seat page 48, Child seats.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

48 Child safety

Child seats

Categorisation of child seats into groups

Use only child seats that are officially approved and suitable for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44. ECE-R stands for: Eco- nomic Commission for Europe Regulation

The child seats are grouped into 5 categories:

Group 0: up to 10 kg

Group 0+: up to 13 kg

Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg

Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg

Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg

Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R44 stand- ard bear the test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle with the test num- ber below it).

Group 0 and 0+ child seats

A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can help you to protect your child.

Fig. 30 A group 0 rear- facing child seat fitted on the rear seat

Group 0: For babies up to about 9 months old and 10 kg in weight, the most suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration Fig. 30.

Group 0+: For babies up to about 18 months old and 13 kg in weight the most suitable seats are those appearing in the illustration.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require- ments when installing and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc- tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.

WARNING

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.

49Child safety

Group 1 child seats

A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can help you to protect your child.

Fig. 31 A category 1 for- ward-facing child seat fit- ted on the rear seat

Child seats using the ISOFIX system or seats in which the child faces the rear of the vehicle are most appropriate for babies and small children weighing between 9 and 18 kg.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require- ments when installing and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc- tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.

WARNING

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.

Group 2 and 3 child seats

A suitable child seat and a correctly adjusted seat belt can help you to protect your child.

Fig. 32 Forward-facing child seat installed on rear seat

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and observe any statutory require- ments when installing and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include the manufacturer's Child Seat Instruc- tion Manual together with the on-board documentation.

Group 2 child seats

Children under 7 years of age weighing between 15 and 25 kg are best pro- tected by group 2 child seats together with properly adjusted seat belts.

Group 3 child seats

Children over 7 years of age weighing between 22 and 36 kg but less than 1.5 metres tall are best protected by child seats with head restraints togeth- er with properly worn seat belts Fig. 32.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

50 Child safety

WARNING

The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie approximately on the cen- tre of the shoulder, never across the neck or the arm. The seat belt must lie close to the upper part of the body. The lap belt part must lie across the pelvis, not across the stomach, and always fit closely. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack page 23, Seat belts.

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.

51Child safety

Securing child seats

Ways to secure a child seat

A child seat can be secured differently on the rear seat and on the front passenger seat.

You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or front passenger seat in the following ways:

Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secured with a seat belt.

Seats for children aged 0, 0+ and 1 with the ISOFIX system can be se- cured without fastening seat belts, using the ISOFIX and/or Top Tether se- curing rings page 52.

Mass group Seating position

Front passenger seat

Rear side seat Rear central seat

Group 0 to 10 kg

U* U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg

U* U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg

U* U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg

U* U U

Group III 22 to 36 kg

U* U U

Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this mass group.

Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, as high as pos- sible and always disable the airbag.

WARNING

When travelling, children must be secured in the vehicle with a re- straint system suitable for age, weight and size.

Never install a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger seat unless the front passenger airbag has been disabled. This could cause fatal injuries to the child! However, if, in exceptional cases, it is necessary to transport a child in the front passenger seat, the front pas- senger airbag page 44, Deactivating airbags must always be disabled and the seat adjusted to its highest position, where possible.

Read and always observe information and warnings concerning the use of child seats in Safety notes on using child seats on page 47.

U:

*:

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

52 Child safety

Child seat mounting using the ISOFIX and/or Top Tether system

The child retention systems can be installed quickly and safely on the rear seat using the ISOFIX and/or Top Tether systems (fitted on the rear tray).

Fig. 33 Position of the ISOFIX anchors on the side rear seat

Fig. 34 The ISOFIX child seat anchors slide along the fitted plastic guides until secured in the vehi- cle's ISOFIX anchorages

Following the instructions given by the child seat manufacturer when installing and removing the seat.

Fit the plastic guides on the vehicle's ISOFIX anchorages be- tween the backrest and the seat Fig. 33.

Slide the child seat anchorages along the plastic guides until secured in the vehicle's ISOFIX rings (when correctly closed, you will hear a click). The seat should also have a visual indicator to confirm it is correctly secured Fig. 34.

Check that the ISOFIX system is correctly secured by pulling on the child seat.

Detailed fitting instructions are supplied with the child safety seat.

Child seats with ISOFIX mountings are available from Technical Services and specialist retailers.

53Child safety

Mass group Size class Electrical equipment Mounting direction Vehicle Isofix positions

Rear side seats

Baby carrier F ISO/L1 Backward-facing X

G ISO/L2 Backward-facing X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 Backward-facing IU

D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU

C ISO/R3 Backward-facing X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 Backward-facing IU

C ISO/R3 Backward-facing X

B ISO/F2 Forward-facing IU

B1 ISO/F2X Forward-facing IU

A ISO/F3 Forward-facing IU

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- Forward-facing ---

Suitable for ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this mass group

ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this mass group or size class

WARNING

The retainers employed for this child safety seat are specially designed for the ISOFIX system. Never secure other child seats, seat belts or other items into the retainers. If you do, you increase the risk of sustain- ing severe or fatal injuries.

IU:

X:

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

54 Child safety

Top Tether retainer straps

Some child restraint seats have a third Top Tether anchoring point, apart from both ISOFIX anchoring points, which al- low better child retention.

Fig. 35 Position of the Top Tether rings on the rear tray

The Top Tether system has an upper strap for attachment to the vehicle's upper anchoring point, which is found on the rear luggage compartment cover.

The retainer strap is used to reduce forwards movements of the safety seat in a crash, helping reduce the risk of injuries to the head from hitting the inside of the vehicle.

It is foreseen that an EU Directive will introduce requirements related to the retention of child restraint systems by means of ISOFIX and Top Tether an- chorages (probably compulsory for new types from 2010), which will entail improved retention of the child restraint seat and less head movement in case of frontal collisions.

Use of retainer straps on rear-facing seats

At present there are very few rear-facing child safety seats fitted with a re- tainer strap. Please carefully read and follow the safety seat manufacturer's instructions for information on how to install the retainer strap properly.

WARNING

An undue installation of the safety seat will increase the risk of injury in the event of a crash.

Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in the luggage compartment.

Never secure or tie luggage or other items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or the upper ones (Top Tether).

Fitting the Top Tether child restraint to the anchoring point

Fig. 36 Retainer strap: correct adjustment and fitting

55Child safety

Securing the Top Tether child restraint to the anchoring point situated on the rear shelf

Pull out the fastening belt of the child restraint seat according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Guide the Top Tether fastening belt under the rear seat head re- straint Fig. 36 (lift the head restraint where necessary).

Lift the anchorage cover on the rear shelf -see detail- Fig. 36.

Slide the belt so that the Top Tether belt of the child restraint seat is correctly secured to the rear shelf anchorage.

Firmly tighten the Top Tether belt following the child restraint seat manufacturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap

Release the retainer strap in line with the instructions given by the child safety seat manufacturer.

Push the lock and release it from the anchoring support.

WARNING

Read and bear in mind all the WARNINGS page 54.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

56 Cockpit

Fig. 37 Some of the equipment listed in this section is only fitted on certain models or are optional extras.

57Cockpit

Operating instructions

Cockpit

Overview

Dash panel overview

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Door handle

Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Electric control for exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Air outlets with thumbwheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Lever for turn signals and main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Levers and switches for:

Windscreen wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Depending on equipment fitted:

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Start-Stop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Warning lamp indicating that front passenger airbag has been disabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Switch for acoustic parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Storage compartment

Depending on equipment fitted: Sound system or navigation system

Lockable glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Switch for heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Thumbwheel for seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Manual gear lever

Cigarette lighter/Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Auxiliary socket

Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Storage compartment

Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Seat memory* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Bonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

coming home and leaving home: delayed lights off and anticipated lights on function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Lever for cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

58 Cockpit

Steering wheel with:

Horn

Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Controls for radio and telephone*

Adjustable steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

On-board documentation compartment / knee airbag* . . . . . . 32

32

33

34

Note Separate Instruction Manual is enclosed if the vehicle is equipped with a factory-fitted radio or navigation system.

The arrangement of switches and controls on right-hand drive models* may be slightly different from the layout shown in Fig. 37. However, the symbols used to identify the controls are the same.

59Cockpit

Instruments

Instrument panel overview

The instrument panel is the driver's information centre.

Fig. 38 Overview of instrument panel

Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Rev counter incorporating digital clock and date . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 61

Warning and indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Speedometer (incorporating odometer display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

1

2

3

4

5

Adjuster buttons for

Digital clock and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Digital display with

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

6

7

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

60 Cockpit

CHECK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Call-up button for service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Reset button for trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Coolant temperature gauge

Fig. 39 Engine coolant temperature gauge

The coolant temperature gauge Fig. 39 only works when the ignition is switched on. In order to avoid engine damage, please read the following notes for the different temperature ranges.

Cold area A

If the needle is still on the left of the dial, this indicates that the engine has not yet reached operating temperature. Avoid high revs and heavy accelera- tion and do not make the engine work hard.

Normal area B

In normal operations, the needle will settle somewhere in the centre of the dial once the engine has reached running temperature. The temperature may also rise when the engine is working hard, especially at high outside

8

9

10

temperatures. This is no cause for concern, provided the warning lamp does not light up in the instrument panel.

Warning area C

If the symbol flashes in the display, this means that either the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low page 79.

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet and checking the coolant level, observe the warning information page 227.

Never open the bonnet when steam or coolant is being released from it. This could lead to burns. Wait until you can no longer see or hear es- caping steam or coolant.

CAUTION Accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. At high outside temperatures and high engine loads, there is a risk of the engine overheating.

61Cockpit

Rev counter

The rev counter indicates the number of engine revolutions per minute.

Fig. 40 Detailed view of the instrument panel: Rev counter

You should select a lower gear if the engine speed drops below 1500 rpm. The start of the red zone on the dial indicates the maximum engine speed which may be used when the engine is warm and after it has been run in properly. Before reaching this zone, a higher gear must be selected or your foot must be removed from the accelerator.

CAUTION To prevent possible engine malfunctions, the rev counter needle should not reach the red zone. The start of the red zone on the dial is different for some engine versions.

For the sake of the environment Changing up into higher gears sooner following the recommended gear in- dications Fig. 51 will help you to reduce fuel consumption, emissions and also engine noise.

Digital clock and date

Your vehicle is equipped with a quartz clock.

Fig. 41 Detailed view of the instrument panel: Digital clock

The time and date are set using the + and - buttons.

Setting the hour

Press the MODE button. The hour display will start to flash.

Use the + and - buttons to set the hour.

Setting the minutes

Keep pressing the MODE button until the minutes display flash- es.

Use the + and - buttons to set the minutes.

Setting the date

Keep pressing the MODE button until the date display (day) flashes.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

62 Cockpit

Use the + and - buttons to set the day.

Keep pressing the MODE button until the month display flashes.

Use the + and - buttons to set the month.

Keep pressing the MODE button until the year display flashes.

Use the + and - buttons to set the year.

Deactivating the date display

Keep pressing the MODE button until the complete date display flashes.

Use the - button to disable the date display.

Activating the date display

Keep pressing the MODE button until the complete date display flashes.

Use the + button to enable the date display.

When the display stops flashing, this means the setting you are performing is completed and the time and date have been successfully stored.

When the ignition is switched off, the odometer and the digital clock with date display can be switched on for a few seconds by pressing the CHECK button Fig. 38 8 .

Instrument lighting

The brightness of the instrument lighting can be adjusted as required.

Fig. 42 Instrument panel lighting

Press the "+" button to increase the brightness of the instru- ment lighting.

Press the "-" button to reduce the brightness of the instrument lighting.

The instrument lighting (dials and needles), the centre console illumination and the illumination of the displays are regulated by a photodiode incorpo- rated in the instrument panel, depending on the outside light.

63Cockpit

Speedometer with odometer

The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and the distance travelled.

Fig. 43 Detailed view of the instrument panel: Odometer

The distance is normally stated in kilometres (km). On some models, how- ever, the odometer will show miles.

Lower odometer

The lower odometer records the vehicle's total mileage.

Upper odometer (trip recorder)

The upper odometer shows the distance that has been travelled since the trip recorder was last reset. It is used to measure short trips. The last digit of the trip recorder indicates distances of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile. The upper odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the reset button Fig. 43.

Fault display

If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the letters DEF will appear perma- nently in the trip recorder display. Please have the fault repaired as soon as possible.

Electronic immobiliser

The vehicle key data is consulted when the ignition is switched on.

If an uncoded key is used, the message SAFE* will appear in the trip record- er display. The vehicle can no longer be started if that happens.

Fuel reserve

The display only works when the ignition is switched on.

When the needle reaches the reserve zone, the symbol lights up in the in- strument panel display page 81. At this point there are still about 8 to 10 litres of fuel left in the tank. This is your reminder to fill up soon.

You can consult the tank capacity of your vehicle in the page 305, Di- mensions and capacities section.

CAUTION Never run the tank completely dry. If there is an irregular fuel supply, misfir- ing can occur. This means that fuel could reach the exhaust system without burning. This may lead to the catalytic converter reheating and being dam- aged.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

64 Cockpit

CHECK button

Fig. 44 Detailed view of the instrument panel: CHECK button

The CHECK button has the following functions:

Activating the digital clock and the odometer

When the ignition is switched off, the odometer and the digital clock with date display can be enabled for a few seconds by pressing the CHECK but- ton Fig. 44.

Starting check procedure (auto-check control)

The auto-check control page 76 checks important components and ve- hicle systems. These background checks are run constantly, as long as the ignition is switched on.

You can start the check procedure manually by pressing the CHECK button with the ignition switched on. This function check can be started with the engine either stationary or running, but not at road speeds above 5 km/h.

Calling up driver messages

If a Priority 1 symbol flashes in the display page 76, or if the bulb moni- tor detects a failure of one of the lights page 83, the relevant driver in-

formation can be called up again by briefly pressing the CHECK button. For example:

Switch off engine, check oil level

The message will disappear from the display after about 5 seconds.

Setting the speed warning

You can press the CHECK button to set speed limit warning 1 page 84, Setting speed limit warning 1 while the vehicle is moving. Speed limit warn- ing 2* page 85, Setting speed limit warning 2 can only be set when the ignition is switched off.

65Cockpit

Warning and indicator lamps

General description

The warning and indicator lamps indicate a number of dif- ferent functions and possible faults.

Fig. 45 Instrument panel with warning and indicator lamps

Exhaust emission control system page 66

Airbag system page 66

Tyre pressure too low page 67

Cruise speed (Cruise control) page 67

Trailer turn signals page 67

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) page 68

Seat belt warning page 68

If it stays lit: ASR switched off page 69 page 69 page 165

Left turn signals page 69

If flashing: the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is working or the ASR is working If the following remain lit: ESC or ASR faulty

page 69 page 69 page 165

Alternator page 70

Main beam headlights page 70

Handbrake on page 70 page 77

Engine management (alternative to ) page 70

Glow plug system (alternative to ) page 70

Fault in brake system page 71

Right turn signals page 69

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

66 Cockpit

Note A number of functions are monitored by the auto-check control page 76. If a malfunction should occur, this will be shown by the dis- play in the instrument panel either with a red symbol (priority 1 - danger) or a yellow symbol (priority 2 - warning).

Exhaust emission control system

If the warning lamp lights up continuously you should take your vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible in order to have the fault re- paired.

If the warning lamp flashes drive on at reduced speed and seek professio- nal help in order to avoid damage to the catalytic converter.

For further information on the catalytic converter, see page 195.

Airbag system

This warning lamp monitors the airbag and belt tension de- vice system.

The control lamp should light up for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on.

If the warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up, flashes or flickers when the vehicle is moving, this indicates a malfunction in the system.

WARNING

If a malfunction should occur, have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop. Otherwise there is a risk that the airbag system and/or belt tensioners may not be triggered in an accident.

67Cockpit

Tyre pressure warning lamp*

The tyre pressure should be corrected as soon as possible if it is too low.

Fig. 46 Display: system fault

Fig. 47 Display: warning message

The yellow warning lamp remains on if the system is faulty or if the pressure is too low in at least one tyre. In the event of a system fault, the letters TPMS are displayed in the centre of the instrument panel Fig. 46. If the tyre pressure drops rapidly, message A

Fig. 47 will be shown on the central display of the instrument panel. If the pressure loss is more gradual, message B Fig. 47 will be shown on the central display of the instrument panel. This message does not show the tyre affected. Should any of these warnings be displayed:

Stop the vehicle.

Check the tyres. Although the warning corresponds to just one tyre, you should also check the others.

Correct the tyre pressure page 243.

For more detailed information on the tyre pressure monitoring system, please refer to page 242.

Cruise speed (Cruise control)*

The control lamp on the instrument panel lights up when the cruise con- trol system is operating.

Trailer turn signals*

This turn signal lamp flashes when the turn signals are op- erating while towing a caravan or trailer.

The turn signal control lamp flashes when the turn signals are operated if a trailer is correctly coupled to the vehicle.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

68 Cockpit

Where a turn signal bulb does not work, either on the trailer or on the tow- ing vehicle, the turn signal bulb will not flash.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

The warning lamp monitors the ABS and the integrated elec- tronic differential lock (EDL).

The control lamp lights up for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ed on and while the engine is being started. The lamp goes out again after the system has run through an automatic test sequence.

There is a fault in the ABS if:

The warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on

The control lamp does not go out again after a few seconds.

The control lamp lights up when the vehicle is moving.

The vehicle can still brake in the normal way (except that the ABS control function is out of action). Please take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible. For further information on the ABS, see page 189.

If a malfunction should occur in the ABS, the ESC warning lamp will also light up.

Entire brake system fault

If the ABS warning lamp lights up together with the brake warning lamp page 71 (with the handbrake released), this indicates not only a fault in the ABS function, but probably also a malfunction in the main brake system .

The symbol will light up on the instrument panel if there if a fault in the brake system. Please refer to page 78.

Electronic differential lock (EDL) fault

The EDL works in conjunction with the ABS. The ABS control lamp will light up to indicate an EDL fault. Please take the vehicle to a specialised work- shop as soon as possible. For further information on the EDL, see page 190.

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level, ob- serve the warning information in page 227, Work in the engine com- partment.

If the brake warning lamp should light up together with the ABS warning lamp , stop the vehicle immediately and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid level has dropped below the "MIN" mark you must not drive on, as there is a risk of accident. Obtain technical as- sistance.

If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault in the brake system may have been caused by a fault in the ABS control function. As a result, the rear wheels can lock relatively easily when braking. Under certain cir- cumstances, the rear of the vehicle could suddenly sway from side to side, with the subsequent danger of skidding. Drive carefully to the near- est specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.

Seat belt warning lamp*

The warning lamp acts as a reminder to the driver to fasten the seat belt.

After switching on the ignition, the warning lamp will remain lit until the driver and front passenger (if applicable) have fastened their seat belts. When the vehicle has reached a certain speed, you will also hear a warning signal and the warning light will flash.

For further information on the seat belts, see page 23.

69Cockpit

Turn signals and hazard warning lights

Depending on which turn signal is operated, either the left or right turn signal lamp flashes. Both turn signal lamps will flash when the hazard warn- ing lights are switched on.

If a turn signal fails, the indicator lamp will start flashing twice as fast as normal.

This does not apply when towing a trailer. Where a turn signal bulb does not work, either on the trailer or on the towing vehicle, the turn signal bulb will not flash. For further information on the turn signals, see page 122.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* /

There are two control lamps for the electronic stability con- trol. The lamp provides information concerning the func- tion and the provides information on the disconnection status

Both lamps come on together when the ignition is switched on and should go out after approx. 2 seconds, which is how long the function check lasts.

This programme includes the ABS, EDL and ASR. This also includes the brake assistance system (BAS), automatic cleaning of the brake discs and the trailer stability programme (TSP).

The warning lamp has the following functions:

It flashes whilst driving when the ASR/ESC is activated.

It will light up continuously if there is a fault in the ESC.

As the ESC operates in conjunction with the ABS, it will also light up if a fault should occur in the ABS.

If the ESC control lamp lights up and stays on after the engine is started, this may mean that the control system has temporarily switched off the ESC. In this case the ESC can be reactivated by switching the ignition off and then on again. If the control lamp goes out, this means the system is fully functional.

The lamp provides information about the disconnection status of the system:

It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected when pressing the switch.

Traction control system (ASR)* /

The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from spinning when the vehicle is accelerating

There are two warning lamps for the traction control system: and . Both lamps come on together when the ignition is switched on and should go out after approx. 2 seconds, which is how long the function check lasts.

The lamp has the following function:

It flashes when the ASR is working if the vehicle is moving.

If the system is deactivated or if it has any fault, the warning lamp will re- main lit. The warning lamp will also light up if a fault should occur in the ABS because the ASR operates in conjunction with the ABS. For further in- formation, see page 188.

The lamp provides information about the disconnection status of the system:

It stays lit when the ASR is disconnected when pressing the ASR OFF switch.

By pressing it again, the ASR function is reactivated and the warning lamp switched off.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

70 Cockpit

Alternator

The warning lamp signals a fault in the alternator or in the vehicle's electrical system.

The control lamp lights up when the ignition is switched on. It should switch off after the engine has started.

The alternator is disconnected at very low temperatures and when the en- gine is cold in order to facilitate starting.

Depending on the external temperature, the warning lamp might remain on for up to 5 seconds after the engine has been started. This does not therefore indicate a fault.

If the warning lamp lights up when you are driving, you can normally continue as far as the nearest specialised workshop. However, given that the battery will be running down, any electrical consumption not absolutely vital should be switched off.

CAUTION If the coolant warning lamp in the instrument panel lights up as well as the alternator waning lamp while driving page 79, stop the vehicle im- mediately and switch off the engine. In this case the coolant pump is no longer working, and there is a risk of engine damage.

Main beam headlights

The indicator lamp lights up when the main beams are on or when the headlight flasher is operated.

For further information on the main beam headlights, see page 122.

Handbrake

This lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied.

If you drive faster than 5 km/h (4 mph) with the handbrake on, the following message will appear on the instrument panel display1): HANDBRAKE ON. You will also hear an acoustic warning signal page 77.

Engine management

This warning lamp monitors the engine management sys- tem for petrol engines.

The control lamp (Electronic Power Control) lights up while the function is being checked.

Note If the warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is moving, this indicates a fault in the engine management system. The vehicle must be taken immedi- ately to a specialised workshop to have the engine serviced.

Glow plug system

The control lamp lights up while the glow plugs are preheat- ing the diesel engine.

The control lamp lights up while the glow plugs are preheating. When the indicator lamp goes out the engine should be started straight away.

1) Depending on the version of the model.

71Cockpit

When the engine is warm, or at outside temperatures above +8 C, the warning lamp will only light up very briefly.

Note If the glow plug indicator lamp should start flashing while the vehicle is moving, this indicates a fault in the engine management system. The en- gine should be serviced without delay.

If the indicator lamp fails to light up when the ignition is switched on, this can mean that the glow plug system is defective. The engine should be serviced.

Brake system

The warning lamp flashes when the handbrake is applied, or if the brake fluid level is too low or if there is a fault in the ABS system.

If the control lamp flashes (and the handbrake is not applied), stop the vehicle and check the brake fluid level page 237.

If a failure should occur in the ABS, the ABS control lamp will light up together with the brake control lamp .

Handbrake on

The control lamp also lights up when the handbrake is applied. In addi- tion to this, the handbrake warning page 77 switches on after driving for 3 seconds at a speed above 5 km/h.

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level, ob- serve the warning information in page 227, Work in the engine com- partment.

If the brake warning lamp does not go out, or if it lights up when driv- ing, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low and this may cause an increased accident risk. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Obtain technical assistance.

If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp, this can mean that there is a fault in the ABS control function. As a result, the rear wheels can lock relatively easily when braking. Under cer- tain circumstances, the rear of the vehicle could suddenly sway from side to side, with the subsequent danger of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

72 Cockpit

Driver information system

General notes

The driver information system in the instrument panel shows the status of various on-board systems at a glance.

Fig. 48 Cockpit: Digital instrument panel display

The display for the driver information system is in the centre of the instru- ment panel.

The system runs a check on certain components and functions when the ig- nition is switched on and while the vehicle is moving. The DIS system gives an audible warning if a fault should occur or if servicing is required, and a red or yellow warning symbol (in some cases with a corresponding driver message) appears in the instrument panel display.

The driver is informed on the audio system.

The driver information system includes the following functions:

CD player, radio and telephone display* page 73

Outside temperature indicator page 73

Gear indicator* page 74

Selector lever positions for the 7-speed automatic gearbox*

page 185

Selector lever positions with multitronic* page 182

Operating range page 74

Door and rear lid warning page 75

Service indicator page 75

auto-check control page 76

Driving tips page 77

Handbrake warning page 77

Bulb monitor* page 83

Onboard computer* page 86

Tyre pressure monitoring* page 90

Navigation information* Separate Instruc- tion Manual

Note If a fault should occur, the display will show a red or yellow warning symbol. A red warning symbol indicates a serious malfunction page 78. A yellow warning symbol indicates a less serious malfunction page 80.

73Cockpit

CD, radio and telephone display*

Fig. 49 Display: addi- tional radio information

If the radio is switched on and no Priority 2 faults are indicated by the auto- check control, depending on the type of radio fitted, the display will show the name or frequency of the selected radio station and complementary in- formation, once the OK symbol has gone out.

When in CD mode*, the display will show the current track.

If you have a compatible telephone*, the phone book or telephone dialled can also be seen on this display.

These displays appear in addition to the display on the radio itself.

Outside temperature display

Fig. 50 Display: Outside temperature indicator

The outside temperature is shown in the display when the ignition is switch- ed on Fig. 50. In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the display does not appear until the driver has engaged a gear.

At temperatures below +5 C a snowflake symbol appears next to the tem- perature display. This is to warn the driver to take extra care when there is a risk of ice on the road. When the vehicle is stationary or travelling at very low speeds, the temperature displayed may be slightly higher than the ac- tual ambient temperature as a result of heat coming from the engine.

If the vehicle has an air conditioner and the digital display is changed over to F (degrees Fahrenheit), the outside temperature indicator automatically changes over to F page 161.

WARNING

Do not rely on the outside temperature display as an ice warning. Please bear in mind that there may be ice on the roads even at outside tempera- tures of +5 C beware of ice patches.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

74 Cockpit

Note When the display shows route guidance instructions from the navigation system, the outside temperature appears in the second line of the radio dis- play.

Gear display*

This display helps to save fuel.

Fig. 51 Gear display

Use the gear display to save fuel. The indication Fig. 51 on the instrument panel display recommends that you select the gear indicated by the arrow. It may also skip a gear, and recommend changing up from 4th gear to 6th gear, for example.

Note The display may not recommend any gear-change while you are acceler- ating.

The gear change indication should not be taken into account the accel- eration is required (for example when overtaking).

If desired, you can have the gear-change display deactivated by a Tech- nical Service.

Distance to empty

The distance to empty display can help you to plan your trip.

The estimated distance to empty is displayed in km. It shows how far the vehicle can be driven with the amount of fuel left in the tank, assuming the same style of driving. The distance to empty is displayed in increments of 10 km.

The distance to empty is calculated on the basis of the fuel consumption over the last 30 kilometres. The distance to empty will increase if you drive in a more economical manner.

75Cockpit

Door and rear lid warning

Fig. 52 Display: Door and rear lid warning

The door and rear lid warning symbol lights up if one or more of the doors, or the bonnet or rear lid are not properly closed when the ignition is on. The symbol also indicates which of these is not properly closed. The display in the illustration Fig. 52 shows that the driver door is open.

The corresponding part of the pictogram will flash if either the bonnet or rear lid are open. The warning symbol goes out when the bonnet, rear lid and all the doors are closed.

In vehicles with a driver information system and an onboard computer* the door catches/rear lid warning symbol can be switched off by briefly press- ing one of the control switches for the onboard computer page 87. How- ever, the warning symbol will appear again if any of the doors or the bonnet or rear lid is opened or closed.

Service indicator

This display reminds the driver when the next routine serv- ice is due.

Fig. 53 Detailed view of the instrument panel: Service indicator

Displaying distance to next service

When you press the service button 1 briefly with the ignition switched on, the display will show how far the vehicle can be driven before the next serv- ice is due. This check can be carried out with the engine stopped or running up to 5 km/h. Before the first 500 km and after the ignition cycle, the kilo- metres and days before the service inspection are not displayed.

If the service button 1 is pressed before the first 500 km the following indi- cation appears on screen:

Service in ----- km --- days

This is only valid for vehicles with LongLife Service Intervals*.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

76 Cockpit

Service reminder

The instrument panel controls the distance travelled every day. It calculates the average of these distances travelled and activates the service reminder sufficiently in advance.

The display reverts back to the standard display after about 5 seconds. The remaining distance to the next service is updated every time the ignition is switched on, until the service becomes due.

Service due

When a service is due, SERVICE! will appear in the display immediately after you switch on the ignition. The display reverts back to the standard display after about 5 seconds.

Resetting the display

The display is reset by the specialised workshop after the service has been carried out. The service interval will be set to a LongLife Service (flexible service interval) or Inspection Service (fixed service interval), depending on which engine oil is used. It is only possible to reset the display via the in- strument panel when an oil change is performed; in this case the display can only be reset to a fixed service interval of 15 000 km. Proceed as fol- lows:

Switch the ignition off.

Press the service button Fig. 53 1 and hold while switching on the ignition. The display will show one of these messages: Service in ----- km or Service!

Now press and hold the reset button 2 until the display shows Service in ----- km --- days or Service!

The display switches out of the reset mode if you do not press the reset but- ton within 5 seconds.

CAUTION The system cannot calculate the figures for the service interval display if the battery is disconnected from the vehicle, so no service reminder can be dis- played during this time. Please remember that it is essential to service the vehicle within the established time limits to prevent its deterioration and to extend its useful life (particularly that of the engine). The period between two services must never be longer than the time specified in the Mainte- nance Programme, even if you only cover a low mileage during this time.

Note Do not reset the service indicator between services, otherwise the dis- play will be incorrect.

The information in the service indicator remains intact if the battery is disconnected.

The distance to the next service cannot be called up if the system has detected a Priority 1 fault (red symbol).

Auto-check system

Introduction

The auto-check system checks important components and vehicle systems. These background checks are run constantly, as long as the ignition is switched on.

A message is displayed on the instrument panel if a fault should occur or if any maintenance or repairs are urgently required. This is accompanied by an audible warning signal. Depending on the priority of the fault, a red or yellow warning symbol lights up on the display.

77Cockpit

The red symbol indicates danger, whereas the yellow one represents a warning. Additional messages for the driver may be shown with the red or yellow symbols.

Driver messages

Additional messages for the driver are displayed together with the warning symbols on the instrument panel.

Fig. 54 Instrument pan- el: CHECK button

Driver messages and red symbols

If a red warning symbol appears on the display, you can press the CHECK

button Fig. 54 to call up an additional driver message.

For example: in the event of an oil pressure malfunction, the oil pressure symbol will appear in the display. If you now press the CHECK button, the following message will appear in the display:

Switch off engine, check oil level

The message will disappear from the display after about 5 seconds. If re- quired, the message can be called up again by briefly pressing the CHECK

button.

Driver messages and yellow symbols

If a yellow warning symbol appears in the display, it will automatically be accompanied by the corresponding driver message.

For example, the symbol is displayed to indicate that the windscreen washer fluid level is low. In addition, the following message will appear:

Top up washer fluid

The message will disappear after a few seconds. If required, the message can be called up again by briefly pressing the CHECK button.

Note The messages handbrake on and when stationary apply footbrake to se- lect gear cannot be called up a second time. They will remain in the display until the handbrake is released or until a gear is selected.

Handbrake warning

Release the handbrake.

If you drive by mistake with the handbrake still applied, you will hear a warning buzzer and the display will show the message:

Handbrake on

The handbrake warning switches on after driving for 3 seconds at speeds above 5 km/h.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

78 Cockpit

Red symbols

A red symbol warns of a danger.

Fig. 55 Display: Coolant level warning

Stop the vehicle.

Switch the ignition off.

Check the fault. Obtain professional assistance if necessary.

BRAKES

Brake fluid required or brake system fault

page 78

COOLANT

Coolant level too low / coolant tempera- ture too high

page 79

OIL PRES-

SURE

Engine oil pressure too low page 79

The red symbols are used to indicate a Priority 1 fault (serious malfunction).

A red symbol is accompanied by three warning chimes. The symbols will keep flashing until the faults are corrected. If several Priority 1 faults are de- tected at the same time, the symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds.

Fault in the brake system

A fault in the brake system should be repaired as soon as possible.

If the symbol flashes in the display, there is a fault in the brake system. One of the following messages will appear in the display together with the symbol:

Stop vehicle, check brake fluid and hydraulic fluid levels

Warning! Fault in brake system (ABS) Take vehicle to workshop

Stop the vehicle.

Check the brake fluid level page 237.

If the ABS fails, the ABS control lamp will light up together with the brake system fault symbol .

79Cockpit

WARNING

Before opening the bonnet and checking the brake fluid level, ob- serve the warning information in page 227, Work in the engine com- partment.

If the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low, this could result in an accident. Do not drive on! Obtain technical assistance.

If the brake warning lamp lights up together with the ABS warning lamp, this can mean that there is a fault in the ABS control function. As a result, the rear wheels can lock relatively easily when braking. Under cer- tain circumstances, the rear of the vehicle could suddenly sway from side to side, with the subsequent danger of skidding. Drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop and have the fault repaired.

Fault in the cooling system

Faults in the cooling system must be repaired immediately.

If the symbol flashes in the display, this means that either the coolant temperature is too high or the coolant level is too low. The following message will appear in the display together with the symbol:

Switch off engine and check coolant level

Stop the vehicle.

Switch the ignition off.

Check the coolant level page 233.

Add more coolant if necessary page 234.

Wait for the symbol to go out before driving on.

Obtain professional assistance if necessary.

If the coolant level is correct, the overheating may be caused by a malfunc- tion of the radiator fan.

If the alternator warning lamp lights up as well page 70, it is possible that the drive belt has broken.

CAUTION Do not drive on if the symbol has come on to indicate a fault in the cool- ing system, otherwise there is a risk of engine damage.

Engine oil pressure too low

If the engine oil pressure is too low the fault must be re- paired immediately.

If the symbol flashes in the display, the oil pressure is too low. The following message will appear in the display together with the symbol:

Switch off engine, check oil level

Stop the vehicle.

Switch the ignition off.

Check the engine oil level page 231.

Obtain professional assistance if necessary.

Engine oil level too low

If the engine oil level is too low, add more oil page 232.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

80 Cockpit

Engine oil level correct

If the symbol flashes and the engine oil level is correct, obtain profes- sional assistance. Do not drive on! Do not continue to run the engine, even at idle speed.

Note The oil pressure warning lamp is not an indicator for the oil level. The oil level should therefore be checked regularly, preferably every time you fill the tank.

Yellow symbols

A yellow symbol indicates a warning.

Fig. 56 Display: Fuel lev- el low

Brake light failure warning light page 81

Fuel level low page 81

Engine speed governing page 81

Check engine oil level page 81

Engine oil sensor faulty* page 81

Diesel particulate filter* obstructed page 81

Photosensor/rain sensor faulty page 82

Brake pad worn page 82

Speed warning 1 page 82

Dynamic headlight range control* faul- ty

page 82

Adaptive headlights* faulty page 82

Washer fluid level low* page 82

Speed warning 2* page 82

Battery voltage too high or too low* page 82

Bulb monitor* page 83

Tyre pressure monitoring system* Loss of pressure

page 90

Tyre pressure monitoring system* System not available

page 67

Start-Stop system fault* page 171

81Cockpit

Yellow symbols are used to indicate a Priority 2 fault (warning).

Yellow symbols are accompanied by one warning buzzer. The function indi- cated should be checked as soon as possible. If several Priority 2 faults are detected at the same time, the symbols are displayed one after the other for about 2 seconds at a time.

Brake light failure

This warning light will appear on the upper part of the display if any of the brake lights has failed. A text message in the central part of the display indi- cates which brake light has failed (left or right).

Fuel level low

When this symbol comes on for the first time, there are about 8 to 10 li- tres of fuel left in the tank. You should fill up as soon as possible page 224.

Engine speed governing

Max. engine speed XXXX rpm

There is a fault in the engine management. In addition, the warning lamp on the instrument panel will light up. The engine speed will be governed to the speed displayed in the driver information system. Please ensure that the engine speed does not exceed the speed shown (for example, when changing down a gear).

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop immediately to have the fault re- paired.

Checking the engine oil level

If the symbol lights up, please check the engine oil level as soon as pos- sible page 231. Top up the oil at the next opportunity page 232.

Engine oil sensor defective*

If the symbol lights up, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the oil level sensor checked. Until then it is advisable to check the oil level every time you fill up with fuel page 231.

Diesel particulate filter obstructed

If the symbol lights up, you can contribute towards automatic filter cleaning by driving in the right manner. To do this, drive about 15 minutes in 4th or 5th gear (automatic gearbox: S gear range) at a speed of 60 km/h, with the engine running at approximately 2,000 rpm. The increase in tem- perature will burn off any soot in the filter. When cleaning is successful, the symbol switches off.

If the symbol does not turn off, or the three lamps turn on (particulate filter , emission control system fault and heaters ), take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to repair the fault.

For further information on the diesel particulate filter, see page 196.

WARNING

It is essential that you adjust your speed to suit the weather, road, ter- rain and traffic conditions. The recommended driving speed must never lead to the driver disregarding the traffic regulations.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

82 Cockpit

Photosensor/rain sensor faulty

Automatic headlights / automatic wipers faulty

If the symbol lights up, this means that the photosensor/rain sensor is not working. For safety reasons, the dipped beam headlights will then be switched on permanently when the light switch is set to the AUTO position. However, you can still switch the lights on and off in the normal way with the light switch. If the rain sensor is faulty, the functions operated via the windscreen wiper lever will still be available. You should have the photosen- sor/rain sensor checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

Worn brake pads

If the symbol lights up, have the front brake pads (and, for safety rea- sons, the rear pads as well) inspected by a specialised workshop.

Speed warning 1

If the symbol lights up, this means you are exceeding the speed that has been pre-set with the speed warning function. You should reduce your speed accordingly page 83.

Headlight range control faulty

This symbol indicates a malfunction in the dynamic headlight range con- trol. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have the dynamic head- light range control function repaired.

Adaptive headlights* faulty

Adaptive headlights faulty

This symbol indicates that the adaptive headlight system is faulty. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have the headlights or the adap- tive headlight control unit repaired.

Washer fluid level low

If the symbol lights up, top up the fluid for the windscreen washer and headlight washer system* page 235.

Speed warning 2

If the symbol lights up, this means you are exceeding the speed that has been pre-set. You should reduce your speed accordingly page 83.

Battery voltage too high or too low

If the symbol lights up, take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the following items checked:

Poly V-belt

Battery condition

It is also advisable to check whether the alternator warning lamp has come on page 70.

83Cockpit

Bulb monitor

The bulb monitor checks whether the lights on the vehicle are working.

If a defective bulb is detected, or if one of the lights has failed for any rea- son, the bulb monitor symbol will appear in the display together with an additional message (which goes out after 5 seconds). For instance, if the rear left turn signal is not working, the display in the instrument panel will show the following message:

Left rear turn signal

The message disappears after 5 seconds. Press the CHECK button briefly if you wish to call up the message again.

If the display indicates that one of the lights is not working, this can have a number of causes:

Bulb failure page 265.

A blown fuse page 264.

Faulty electrical wiring.

It is not necessary to have lamps replaced in a specialised workshop, how- ever the use of Xenon lamps is recommended.

LED lamps

If any of the LED (Light Emitting Diode) functions fail, the complete lamp should be replaced.

The failure of the lamp is only shown when the LED function goes out com- pletely. Sometimes, a LED will stop working, without displaying the warning as the function continues to operate.

WARNING

Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury.

The high voltage element of gas discharge bulbs* (xenon light) must be handled correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.

Speed warning*

Introduction

The speed warning function can help prevent you exceeding a particular pre-set maximum speed.

Fig. 57 Display: Speed warning function

The speed warning function will warn the driver if a pre-set maximum speed is exceeded. The system gives a warning buzzer signal if the set speed is

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

84 Cockpit

exceeded by about 10 km/h (6 mph). A warning symbol will also appear in the display Fig. 57.

The speed warning function has two different warning speeds, which oper- ate independently and serve slightly different purposes:

Speed limit warning 1

With speed limit warning 1, the maximum speed can be changed while driv- ing. The speed limit that has been set remains stored until the ignition is switched off, or until it is changed or cleared.

The warning symbol for speed limit warning 1 Fig. 57 will appear in the display if you exceed the pre-set speed. It goes out again if the speed is re- duced below the set speed limit.

The symbol also goes out if the speed is increased to more than about 40 km/h above the set speed for at least 10 seconds. However, this does not cancel the speed limit that was originally set.

Setting speed limit warning 1 page 84.

Speed limit warning 2

With speed limit warning 2, the speed limit can only be changed or cleared when the ignition is switched off. You are recommended to store this speed limit warning if you always wish to be reminded of a particular speed limit. This could be when driving in countries with general speed limits, or if a particular speed should not be exceeded when winter tyres are fitted etc.

The speed limit warning symbol for speed warning 2 will appear in the display if you exceed the pre-set speed. Unlike speed limit warning 1, the warning symbol only goes out once the road speed has dropped below the set value again.

Setting speed limit warning 2 page 85.

Note Please bear in mind that, even with the speed warning function, it is still im- portant to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with the speedometer and to observe the legal speed limits.

Setting speed limit warning 1

Use the CHECK button to set speed limit warning 1.

Fig. 58 Detailed view of the instrument panel: CHECK button

Setting the speed limit

Drive at the desired maximum speed.

Press the CHECK button and hold it down until the symbol Fig. 57 appears.

Clearing the speed limit

Drive the vehicle at a minimum of 5 km/h.

85Cockpit

Press the CHECK button for at least two seconds.

The speed warning symbol lights up briefly in the display when the but- ton is released to confirm that the selected speed has been stored. The speed limit that has been selected remains stored until another speed is se- lected with a brief push of the button, or until the memory is cleared with a long push of the button.

Setting speed limit warning 2

Speed limit warning 2 is set using the switches on the wind- screen wiper lever.

Fig. 59 Windscreen wip- er lever: Function selec- tor switch

Setting the speed limit

Switch the ignition off.

Briefly press the CHECK button in the instrument panel Fig. 58. The odometer and the digital clock will light up.

Press the CHECK button for at least two seconds. The display will show the speed limit which is currently set or, if no speed limit has been set, the crossed out warning symbol for speed limit 2.

To change the speed limit, press the top or bottom of the func- tion selector switch on the windscreen wiper lever A Fig. 59. The speed limit displayed will then increase or decrease by 10 km/h at a time.

Clearing the speed limit

Switch the ignition off.

Briefly press the CHECK button in the instrument panel Fig. 58. The odometer and the digital clock will light up.

Press the CHECK button for at least two seconds. The display will show the speed limit which is currently set.

Now press and hold the Reset button on the windscreen wiper lever B Fig. 59 until the crossed out warning symbol for speed limit 2 appears on the display.

The display lighting for the odometer and digital clock goes off again a few seconds after the button is released.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

86 Cockpit

Onboard computer

Introduction

The onboard computer provides you with useful information during a journey, including average and current fuel con- sumption, average speed, distance to empty, driving time and distance covered.

Fig. 60 Onboard com- puter: memory 1

Press RESET button B Fig. 61 to switch back and forward between on- board computer functions 1 and 2.

The numbers in the display Fig. 60 indicate which of the two memories is currently in use. A 1 means that the display is showing the information in the single journey memory (onboard computer 1). A 2 means that the dis- play is showing the information in the total journey memory (onboard com- puter 2).

Single-journey memory (onboard computer 1)

The single-journey memory processes the information on a journey from the time the ignition is switched on until it is switched off. If the journey is re- sumed within two hours after the ignition is switched off, the new figures are automatically included in the calculation. If the journey is interrupted for more than two hours the stored information is automatically erased when you resume your journey.

Total-journey memory (onboard computer 2)

Unlike the single-journey memory, the total-journey memory is not erased automatically. Hence, you can determine the period for which you wish the onboard computer to supply figures.

Distance to empty

The estimated distance to empty is displayed in km. The distance to empty is displayed in increments of 10 km.

Average fuel consumption

This mode shows the average fuel consumption since the memory was last cancelled in litres/100 km.

Instantaneous fuel consumption

The display shows the instantaneous fuel consumption in litres/100 km. When the vehicle is stationary, the computer will display the last value in the memory.

Average speed

This mode shows the average speed driven since the memory was last can- celled (in km/h).

Driving time

This display shows the period of time which has elapsed since the memory was last cancelled. The longest possible period it can cover is 999 hours and 59 minutes.

87Cockpit

Driving time warning

After 2 hours of continuous driving, the display automatically switches over to the driving time display of 2:00. At the same time the driving time display starts flashing. This is to remind the driver to take a break.

The driving time warning can be switched off by briefly pressing the func- tion selector switch or the Reset button Fig. 61.

If you continue driving or take a break for less than 10 minutes, the driving time warning will switch on once again when the total driving time is 4:00 hours, 6:00 hours, etc. However, if you take a break for more than 10 mi- nutes, the driving time warning clock will be erased.

Distance covered

This display shows the distance you have covered since the memory was last cancelled. The longest possible distance which can be recorded is 9999.9 km.

Note The displays for fuel consumption (average and instantaneous), dis- tance to empty and speed are shown in metric units.

The information in the memory is lost if the battery is disconnected.

Operation

The onboard computer is controlled by means of two switches on the windscreen wiper lever.

Fig. 61 Windscreen wip- er lever: Onboard com- puter controls

Activating the onboard computer

Press the reset button B repeatedly until the onboard comput- er (memory 1 or 2) Fig. 60 is displayed.

Selecting the function

Press the top or bottom of the function selector switch A

Fig. 61. This displays the functions of the onboard computer in sequence.

Resetting to zero

Press and hold the Reset button B for at least two seconds.

The following values can be reset to zero using the Reset button:

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

88 Cockpit

Journey duration

Distance covered

Average fuel consumption

Average speed

The onboard computer can only be operated when the ignition is switched on. When the ignition is switched on, the display shows the function that was last selected.

As well as the figures from the onboard computer (1 or 2), the display can also show information from the navigation system*. Press the Reset button B briefly to switch back and forward between these displays.

Note If you keep the Reset button pressed for longer than two seconds, it will reset the currently displayed figure to zero (for instance average fuel con- sumption).

Faults detected by the auto-check control will be displayed even if the display is off.

The information in the memory is lost if the battery is disconnected.

89Cockpit

Menu display

Introduction

Fig. 62 Windscreen wip- er lever: Menu selection button

Fig. 63 Display: Main menu

Some of your vehicle's functions can be adjusted, activated and controlled by menus. With the aid of the menus you can then also select the informa- tion you wish to see displayed on the DIS display. This is only possible when the ignition is on. The menu is enabled using the Reset button on the windscreen wiper lever Fig. 62.

The main menu lists the different display types (or basic commands):

Programming

Check

Menu off

Help

The main menu options have the following submenus:

Programming Clock page 90

Computer page 90

Speed warning page 83

Radio info (on/off)

Units (measuring distance, fuel consumption, tempera- ture)

page 90

Language: you can select one of 6 languages.

page 90

Check Service page 75

Menu off When the menu is switched off, the display shows the same information as in vehicles without the menu func- tion.

Help The help function may be used to understand the mean- ing of symbols that can appear on different menus.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

90 Cockpit

Controlling the menu

The menu display is called up via the Reset button and the rocker switch on the windscreen wiper lever. Use these con- trols to make checks and adjust the settings.

Fig. 64 Windscreen wip- er lever: Reset button and rocker switch

Functions of the Reset B Fig. 64 and the rocker switch A :

Activating the menu

Press the Reset button until the menu display Fig. 63 ap- pears.

Selecting and setting

Press the rocker switch to select one of the menus. Press "up" or "down" on the switch to select the options accordingly.

Entering and confirming

Press the Reset button.

Use the rocker switch to select the menus and adjust various values. The se- lected values are highlighted on a red background.

By pressing the Reset button, you can confirm the option you have selected or the value you have set. Selected functions are marked with a tick.

The following symbols are used:

Cursor Function selected Red background (active function)

Tick Selected

Box Not selected

Triangle pointing upwards Previous page

Triangle pointing down- wards

Next page

Tyre pressure monitoring*

Introduction

The tyre pressure monitoring system constantly checks the pressure of the tyres.

The system warns the driver in the event of a loss of pressure by means of symbols and messages in the instrument panel display. The system works with the help of the ABS sensors in the wheels.

Please bear in mind that the tyre inflation pressure is also influenced by the temperature of the tyre. Tyre pressure increases about 0.1 bar for each 10 C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre heats up while the vehicle is being

91Cockpit

driven and the tyre pressure will rise accordingly. Therefore, you should only adjust the tyre pressures when they are cold (i.e. approximately at ambient temperature).

To ensure that the tyre pressure monitoring system works reliably, you should check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre pressures at regular intervals and store the correct pressures (reference values) in the system.

A tyre pressure information label is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.

WARNING

Never adjust tyre pressure when the tyres are hot. This may damage or even burst the tyres. Risk of accident!

An insufficiently inflated tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and causes significant heating of the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre bead may be released or the tyre may burst. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.

Note Responsibility for ensuring that the tyres are correctly inflated remains with the driver; the system can only provide assistance.

Pressure can only be adjusted when the tyres are at ambient tempera- ture.

Tyre pressure monitoring display

The tyre pressure should be corrected as soon as possible if it is too low.

If the symbol appears, the tyre pressure on at least one of the wheels is too low.

Stop the vehicle.

Check the tyre(s).

Correct the tyre pressure page 243.

For more detailed information on the tyre pressure monitoring system, please refer to page 242.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

92 Steering wheel controls

Steering wheel controls

Multifunction steering wheel*

Introduction

You can use the multifunction steering wheel to quickly and easily operate selected functions of the radio, CD, and tele- phone*.

Fig. 65 Controls on the multifunction steering wheel

Fig. 66 Driver informa- tion system

The functions are operated by pressing or scrolling the controls A to D on the multifunction steering wheel Fig. 65:

Press the MODE button B repeatedly to switch between modes, which are then displayed in the driver information system Fig. 66.

Scroll and press the left thumbwheel A to select a function from one of the menus.

The speech control system* for the on-board phone system is enabled by pressing the talk button C . Pressing the talk button again disables speed control*.

Scroll the right thumbwheel D up/down to increase/decrease the vol- ume.

93Steering wheel controls

Steering wheel audio version controls

A B

(Mode) C

(PTT) D

+ - Press + - Press

Radio mode

Station search. Increase frequen-

cy

Station search. Decrease fre-

quency

Press once: starts the search.

Press twice: can- cels the search

Long press: block the steering

wheel controls

Short press: activates the steering

wheel controls (if they are blocked /

without specific func- tion (if they are not

blocked)

No function specified

Volume up Volume down MUTE

CD/ iPod-USB

Mode

CD mode: next track.

iPod/USB Mode: next track

CD mode: previ- ous track.

iPod/USB Mode: previous track

CD mode: fast for- ward.

iPod/USB Mode: fast forward

Volume up Volume down MUTE

MP3 mode

Next track Previous track Fast forward Volume up Volume down MUTE

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

94 Steering wheel controls

Steering wheel Audio + Telephone version controls

A B

(Mode) C

(PTT) D

+ - Press + - Press

Radio mode Station search.

Increase frequen- cy

Station search. Decrease fre-

quency

Press once: starts the search.

Press twice: can- cels the search

Change to phone

Enable voice recognition

Volume up Volume down MUTE

CD/ iPod-USB Mode

CD mode: next track.

iPod/USB Mode: next track

CD mode: previ- ous track.

iPod/USB Mode: previous track

CD mode: fast for- ward.

iPod/USB Mode: fast forward

Volume up Volume down MUTE

MP3 mode Next track Previous track Fast forward Volume up Volume down MUTE

Phone mode Next name in phone book

Previous name in phone book

Accept

Change to ra- dio / CD /

iPod-USB / MP3

Volume up Volume down No function

specified

Incoming call mode

No function specified

No function specified

One press: accept call.

Held down: reject call

No function specified

No function specified

Volume up Volume down No function

specified

Active call mode

No function specified

No function specified

End call No function

specified No function

specified Volume up Volume down

No function specified

Voice activation mode

No function specified

No function specified

No function speci- fied

No function specified

Cancel Volume up Volume down No function

specified

95Steering wheel controls

Steering wheel controls, Navigation System* version

A B

(Mode) C

(PTT) D

+ - Press + - Press

Radio mode Station search.

Increase frequen- cy

Station search. Decrease fre-

quency

Press once: starts the search.

Press twice: can- cels the search

No function specified

No function specified

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of the last naviga- tion order (only

if active)

CD/ iPod-USB Mode

CD mode: next track.

iPod/USB Mode: next track

CD mode: previ- ous track.

iPod/USB Mode: previous track

CD mode: fast for- ward.

iPod/USB Mode: fast forward

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of the last naviga- tion order (only

if active)

MP3 mode Next track Previous track Fast forward Volume up Volume down

Repetition of the last naviga- tion order (only

if active)

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

96 Steering wheel controls

Steering wheel controls, Navigation System + Telephone* version

A B

(Mode) C

(PTT) D

+ - Press + - Press

Radio mode Station search.

Increase frequen- cy

Station search. Decrease fre-

quency

Press once: starts the search.

Press twice: can- cels the search

Change to phone

Enable voice recognition

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of the last naviga- tion order (only

if active)

CD/ iPod-USB Mode

CD mode: next track.

iPod/USB Mode: next track

CD mode: previ- ous track.

iPod/USB Mode: previous track

CD mode: fast for- ward.

iPod/USB Mode: fast forward

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of the last naviga- tion order (only

if active)

MP3 mode Next track Previous track Fast forward Volume up Volume down

Repetition of the last naviga- tion order (only

if active)

Phone mode Next name in phone book

Previous name in phone book

Accept

Change to ra- dio / CD /

iPod-USB / MP3

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of the last naviga- tion order (only

if active)

Incoming call mode

No function specified

No function specified

One press: accept call.

Held down: reject call

No function specified

No function specified

Volume up Volume down

Repetition of the last naviga- tion order (only

if active)

Active call mode

No function specified

No function specified

End call No function

specified No function

specified Volume up Volume down

Repetition of the last naviga- tion order (only

if active)

Voice activation mode

No function specified

No function specified

No function speci- fied

No function specified

Cancel Volume up Volume down No function

specified

97Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Remote control keys

Set of keys

Fig. 67 Set of keys sup- plied with the vehicle

Fig. 68 Remote control key: Release button

The set of keys belonging to your vehicle consists of the following items:

one remote control key.

one key without remote control.

a plastic key tab*.

Remote control key

The remote control key will lock and unlock the vehicle and start the engine. Press the release button Fig. 68 (arrow) to make the key spring out of the handle and to fold it back in.

Replacing a key

If you lose a key, please contact the Technical Service. Have the remote con- trol coding for that key disabled. You should therefore bring the plastic key tab* and all available keys with you. It is also important to notify your insur- ance company if a key or the plastic key tab has been lost.

A

B

C

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

98 Opening and closing

2 remote control keys

In certain European markets, vehicles with alarm are equipped with 2 re- mote control keys.

WARNING

Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. This is particularly important if there are children in the vehicle, as they might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could cause injuries.

Wait for the vehicle to come to a standstill before removing the igni- tion key from the lock! Otherwise, the steering lock could engage sud- denly, causing an accident.

Indicator light on the remote control key

The condition of the battery in the remote control key is monitored by the indicator light.

Fig. 69 LED on the re- mote control key

Condition of the key battery

The indicator light Fig. 69 (arrow) flashes when one of the buttons is pressed. If the indicator light does not light up or flash, this means that the battery is exhausted and must be replaced.

Replacing the batteries page 98.

Replacing the key battery

Fig. 70 Master key: Opening the cover

We recommend you have the batteries changed in a specialised workshop. If you decide to change the used battery yourself, follow the steps below:

Carefully prise apart the key Fig. 70 A and the cover B us- ing a coin.

Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow.

Remove the used battery from the cover.

99Opening and closing

Insert the new battery. Make sure that the + symbol on the battery is facing downwards. The correct polarity is indicated on the cover.

After inserting the battery, align the cover and key and press the two parts together.

For the sake of the environment Used batteries must be disposed of at an appropriate waste facility or through an authorised service, given that their components can affect the environment.

Note The system must be re-synchronised after each battery replacement to be able to lock and unlock the vehicle using the remote control page 107.

The new battery must be of the same type as the original.

Electronic immobiliser

The electronic immobiliser is designed to prevent unauthor- ised persons from starting up the vehicle.

There is an electronic chip inside the key which automatically deactivates the immobiliser when the key is inserted into the ignition lock. The electron- ic immobiliser is enabled automatically when the ignition key is removed from the ignition lock after coming to a stop.

If an uncoded key is used, the message SAFE* will appear in the trip record- er display.

Note The engine can only be started using an original SEAT key with the cor- rect code.

It may not be possible to start the engine with the key if there is another ignition key from a different make of vehicle on the same key tab.

Central locking system

Description

The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all the doors, the rear lid and the tank flap together.

The central locking system on your vehicle locks and unlocks all the doors and the tank flap simultaneously. The rear lid is unlocked when the vehicle is opened. However, the handle must be used to open it. The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the remote control page 105 or by turning the key in the lock in the driver door.

The windows can also be centrally opened or closed using the central lock- ing system page 111. The sunroof* can be closed but not opened using the central locking system.

The central locking system is combined with an anti-theft security system. If the vehicle is locked with the key from the outside, the interior opening levers stop working, which prevents unauthorised persons from entering the vehicle.

Should the central locking system fail to work, you can activate all the locks individually.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

100 Opening and closing

Automatic locking function (Auto Lock)*

The Auto Lock* function automatically locks all doors and the rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speed of about 15 km/h.

The vehicle is unlocked again automatically when the ignition key is re- moved. Alternatively, the driver can also unlock the vehicle using the central locking switch or by opening one of the doors.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.

Note Should the central locking system fail to work, you can still lock and un- lock the driver door and the rear lid using the key. Locking the doors man- ually if central locking fails to work page 103.

The anti-theft mechanism and the anti-theft alarm* cannot be enabled if the central locking is not working.

Never leave any valuable items in the vehicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle is not a safe.

Unlocking the vehicle with the key

Fig. 71 Turning the key to enable the open and close functions

To unlock the vehicle, turn the key in the driver door to position A Fig. 71.

Pull the handle to open the door.

This will unlock all the doors, the rear lid and the tank flap simultane- ously.

The anti-theft security system will be disabled.

Locking with the key

To lock the vehicle, turn the key in the driver door to position B

Fig. 71 .

101Opening and closing

This will lock all the doors and the rear lid.

The interior lights are switched off, provided the light switch is in the courtesy light position.

The windows and the sunroof* will close as the key is held in the locking position.

The anti-theft security system will be enabled immediately.

Locking the vehicle without activating the anti-theft security system

With the anti-theft security system enabled, it is more difficult to break into the vehicle. If the anti-theft security system has been enabled, the inside door handles and the central locking switch will not work .

If you are leaving passengers in the vehicle while it is parked, it is possible to lock the vehicle without activating the anti-theft security system.

To do so, turn the key in the driver door twice in quick succession to posi- tion B Fig. 71.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.

CAUTION If the driver door is locked using the key while open, the vehicle will be au- tomatically immobilised and the alarm triggered.

Note Please note that when the vehicle is locked without activating the anti- theft mechanism, the anti-theft alarm* remains operative. You should there- fore switch off the interior monitoring* before locking the vehicle, as other- wise the alarm* could be triggered unintentionally.

The driver door cannot be locked using the central locking system when it is still open. The door must be locked separately after it has been closed. This helps to prevent you from being locked out of the vehicle.

Central locking switch

The central locking system can be enabled from inside the vehicle using the central locking switch on the driver door.

Fig. 72 Detail of the driver door: Central lock- ing switch

Locking the vehicle

Press button Fig. 72 .

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

102 Opening and closing

Unlocking the vehicle

Press button .

Please note the following when using the central locking switch to lock your vehicle:

The doors and the rear lid cannot be opened from the outside (for secur- ity reasons, e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).

You can open the doors individually from the inside by pulling the inside door handle.

When the driver door is open, it cannot be locked by pressing the central locking switch and then closing the door. This helps to prevent you from be- ing locked out of the vehicle. The door has to be locked separately after it has been closed.

In the event of an accident in which the airbags inflate, doors locked from the inside will be automatically unlocked to facilitate access and assis- tance.

WARNING

The central locking switch is still operative when the ignition is switched off. This switch can be used to automatically lock all the doors and the rear lid. However, since this makes it difficult to enter the vehicle from the outside, you should never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.

Note The central locking switch inside the vehicle will not be operative if the anti- theft mechanism has been enabled.

Security central locking*

The security central locking feature allows you to only unlock the driver door and the tank flap. All other doors and the rear lid remain locked.

Unlocking the driver door and tank flap

Turn the key once to the unlock position, or press the unlock button on the remote control once.

Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and the tank flap simultaneously.

Turn the key twice within five seconds, or press the unlock but- ton on the remote control twice within five seconds.

The security system and the anti-theft alarm* are immediately disabled if you unlock only the driver door, without unlocking the other doors page 107.

103Opening and closing

Locking the doors manually if the central locking fails to work

Should the central locking system fail to work at any time (for instance if there is no electrical power supply), each door will have to be locked separately.

Fig. 73 Manual lock- ing device

Fig. 74 Activating manual locking

A manual locking device is provided on the front passenger door and the rear doors (only visible when the door is open).

Open the door.

Use the key Fig. 73 to turn the cap slightly and then fold it downwards.

Insert the key into the slot inside Fig. 74 and turn it as far as the stop, i.e. about 90 degrees to the right (doors on right side) or to the left (door on the left side).

Once the door has been closed it can no longer be opened from the outside. The door can be opened from the inside by pulling the door handle. If the childproof lock is engaged on one of the rear doors, the door can be opened by pulling the inside door handle once and then opening the door from the outside.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

104 Opening and closing

Rear lid

Rear lid: opening and closing

Fig. 75 Driver door: Un- locking the rear lid

Fig. 76 Luggage com- partment: opening from the outside

Opening the rear lid

Press the centre button on the remote control key or press the switch* on the driver door Fig. 75. The rear lid will open.

Then lift up the rear lid. If your vehicle is equipped accordingly, the rear lid will open automatically*.

Closing the rear lid

Pull down the rear lid and let it drop into the latch .

Use the recessed handle in the interior trim to make it easier to pull down the rear lid.

WARNING

After closing the rear lid, always check that the catch has engaged properly. If not, the rear lid could open while driving, even if it has been locked. Risk of accident!

The rear lid must always be completely closed when the vehicle is moving, otherwise toxic exhaust fumes may be drawn into the vehicle. Danger of poisoning!

Note The door/rear lid warning symbol lights up on the instrument panel dis- play if the rear lid is not properly closed when the ignition is switched on page 75.

105Opening and closing

Childproof lock

Childproof locks on rear doors

The childproof lock prevents the rear doors from being opened from the inside.

Fig. 77 Childproof lock on the rear doors

The rear doors are equipped with childproof locks. These can be operated using the ignition key. The childproof locks are only visi- ble with the doors open.

Activating the childproof lock

Turn the key in the direction of the arrow Fig. 77.

Deactivating the childproof lock

Turn the key in the opposite direction of the arrow.

When the childproof lock is enabled, the inside door handle will not work and the door can only be opened from the outside.

Remote control key

Description

The remote control key will lock and unlock the vehicle with- out having to insert the key in the lock.

The following functions are available:

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

Unlocking the rear lid

All the turn signals will flash as confirmation when the vehicle is locked or unlocked. Furthermore, the interior lights will automatically light up when the vehicle is unlocked and go out when the vehicle is locked, provided that the switches are in the courtesy light position.

The remote control transmitter and the battery are integrated into the han- dle of the key. The receiver is in the interior of the vehicle. The maximum range depends on different circumstances. The range is reduced when the battery starts to lose power.

The remote control incorporates a foldaway key that can be used to manual- ly lock or unlock the vehicle, as well as to start the engine.

If the receiver has been repaired or replaced, or if a replacement key is used, the system will need re-programming by a specialised workshop. Only then will you be able use the remote control again.

The remote control meets all relevant authorisation requirements and has been approved by the Federal Approvals Office for Telecommunications of the Federal Republic of Germany. All components are marked in accordance with the current legal requirements. This certification forms the basis for of- ficial approval for use in other countries.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

106 Opening and closing

Note The remote control is automatically disabled when the ignition is switch- ed on.

The function of the remote control may be impaired by interference from other nearby radio signals (e.g. from a mobile phone or TV transmitter) if these are in the same frequency range.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

Fig. 78 Remote control key: Control buttons

Unlocking the vehicle

Press button A Fig. 78 for about 1 second.

Locking the vehicle

Press button B for about 1 second.

Opening the rear lid

Press button C and hold for at least one second.

The turn signals will flash twice as confirmation when you unlock the vehi- cle. The vehicle will be locked again automatically if you do not open one of the doors or the rear lid within 60 seconds after unlocking the vehicle with button A . This function prevents the vehicle from remaining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake.

In vehicles with the security central locking* feature, you can unlock just the driver door and the tank flap by pressing button A once or the whole vehicle by pressing the button twice.

The turn signals flash once when the vehicle is locked to confirm that the doors and rear lid are properly locked.

Moreover, apart from unlocking the vehicle, the seat* and mirror* memory programmed in the key is activated. The driver seat and exterior mirrors will be automatically adjusted to the positions stored in the memory.

The interior lights will automatically light up when the vehicle is unlocked and go out when the vehicle is locked, provided that the switch is in the courtesy light position.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.

Note The remote control should only be used when the doors and the rear lid are closed.

The remote control should not be used when the vehicle is out of sight.

The anti-theft alarm* can be accidentally triggered and the vehicle locked if you press the locking button on the remote control inside the vehicle before inserting the key in the ignition. If this should happen by mistake, press the unlock button .

107Opening and closing

Re-synchronising

Should the remote control fail to lock or unlock the vehicle, the system must be re-synchronised.

If the vehicle is locked, use the key to unlock the driver door.

Press the unlock button on the remote control.

Insert the key into the ignition and switch on the ignition.

Switch off the ignition and remove the key.

Press the unlock or the lock button .

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description

The system triggers an alarm if anyone attempts to break in- to the vehicle.

The anti-theft alarm helps to prevent the vehicle being broken into or sto- len. If the system senses interference with the vehicle, it triggers an audible and visible alarm.

How is the system enabled?

The anti-theft alarm system is enabled automatically when the vehicle is locked with the remote control or by turning the key in the driver door (if the door is closed). The anti-theft alarm is enabled about 30 seconds after the vehicle is locked.

How is the system disabled?

The anti-theft alarm is only disabled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control. The vehicle will lock again automatically if none of the doors is opened within 60 seconds after pressing the remote control button.

If the vehicle is unlocked by turning the key in the driver door, all the other doors, the rear lid and the tank flap will remain locked.

If the vehicle has been unlocked with the key in the driver door, the key must be inserted in the ignition lock and the ignition switched on within 15 seconds of opening the door in order to disable the alarm. The alarm will be triggered if the ignition is not switched on within 15 seconds.

Opening and closing function in cars with alarm

When using the key only without remote control to lock and unlock:

in unlocking all the doors, they unlock simultaneously.

When using the key only without remote control to lock and unlock:

in unlocking all the doors, they unlock simultaneously.

When combining locking using the remote control key and unlocking using the key but without the remote control:

when unlocking, only the driver door will unlock.

When does the system trigger the alarm?

The following parts of the vehicle are monitored when the vehicle is locked:

Engine compartment (bonnet)

Luggage compartment

Doors

Tilt angle (tow-away protection)

Ignition

Radio (only with a factory-fitted SEAT radio)

Interior page 108

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

108 Opening and closing

If any of these areas are entered, the alarm will be triggered.

How is the alarm disabled?

The alarm can be switched off by unlocking the vehicle using the remote control, or by switching on the ignition with the key, thus disabling the alarm system. The alarm will also switch off when it comes to the end of its cycle.

Turn signals

The turn signals flash briefly when the vehicle is locked to confirm that the doors, the engine bonnet and the rear lid are properly closed and locked.

If the turn signals do not flash, check the doors, the bonnet and the rear lid to make sure they are properly closed. The turn signals will also flash briefly if one of the doors or the rear lid or engine bonnet is closed after the alarm system has been enabled.

LED

When the vehicle is locked, the LED on the top of the driver door trim will flash rapidly for about 30 seconds and then continue flashing slowly. This is to indicate that the anti-theft alarm system (including the interior monitor- ing and tow-away protection) is operative. If the LED lights up continuously for about 30 seconds when the vehicle is locked instead of flashing, this means the alarm system is not working properly.

Note To make sure that the alarm is fully operative when leaving the vehicle, briefly check that all the doors and windows and the sunroof* are closed.

The alarm is triggered immediately if one of the battery cables is discon- nected while the alarm system is enabled.

Interior monitoring*

The interior monitoring triggers an alarm if it detects move- ment inside the vehicle.

Fig. 79 Interior monitor- ing switch

You should disable the interior monitoring if there is a possibility that the alarm could be triggered, e.g. by a pet or by an object moving inside the vehicle . The tow-away protection feature, which is integrated into the alarm system, should be disabled if the vehicle is being towed or transported (e.g. by rail or ship).

Deactivating the interior monitoring

Open the door and pull out the switch A (with the symbol ) to one side of the storage compartment, in the driver door Fig. 79.

Lock the vehicle.

109Opening and closing

Deactivating the tow-away protection

Open the door and pull out switch B (with the symbol ) to one side of the storage compartment, in the driver door Fig. 79.

Lock the vehicle.

The LED on switch will light up when the interior monitoring is disabled. The LED on the top of the driver door trim will also light up for about 3 sec- onds. When the vehicle is locked, the LED on the top of the driver door trim will flash rapidly for about 3 seconds. About 30 seconds later it starts flash- ing slowly. The interior monitoring is automatically enabled again the next time the vehicle is locked.

The LED on switch will light up when the tow-away protection function is disabled. The LED on the top of the driver door trim will also light up for about 3 seconds. When the vehicle is locked, the LED on the top of the driv- er door trim will flash rapidly for about 3 seconds. The tow-away protection is automatically enabled again the next time the vehicle is locked.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside and the anti-theft security system is enabled, as the doors and windows cannot then be opened from the inside. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.

Electric windows

Controls

Fig. 80 Detail of the driver door: Controls

Switches for front electric windows

Switch Fig. 80 for the driver door window

Switch for the front passenger door window.

Switches for rear electric windows

Switch for the rear left door window

Switch for the rear right door window

Safety switch

A

B

C

D

E

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

110 Opening and closing

WARNING

Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. This is particularly important if there are children in the vehicle, as they might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could cause injuries. The electric window switches are only disa- bled when the driver door or the front passenger door is opened.

Never close the windows in a careless or uncontrolled manner, as there is a risk of causing injuries.

When locking the vehicle from the outside, make sure that nobody is inside the vehicle, as the windows cannot be opened from the inside in an emergency.

Switches on the driver door

The driver can operate all the electric windows in the vehi- cle.

The electric windows are controlled by two-stage switches:

Opening the windows

Press the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the win- dow has moved to the desired position.

Press the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will automatically open all the way.

Closing the windows

Pull the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the win- dow has moved to the desired position.

Pull the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will automatically close all the way.

Safety switch

The safety switch Fig. 80 E can deactivate the rear door switches. The windows can only be operated from the rear when the safety switch is press- ed in.

The symbol lights up on the safety switch when the electric windows in the rear doors are disabled (switch not pressed in).

Note The windows will work for about ten minutes after the ignition has been switched off. The electric window switches are only disabled when the driver door or the front passenger door is opened.

Switches on the front passenger's door and rear doors

Each of these doors has a switch for its own window.

Fig. 81 Switch on front passenger door

111Opening and closing

The electric windows are controlled by two-stage switches:

Opening the windows

Press the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the win- dow has moved to the desired position.

Press the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will automatically open all the way.

Closing the windows

Pull the switch as far as the first stop and hold it until the win- dow has moved to the desired position.

Pull the switch briefly to the second stop and the window will automatically close all the way.

Note The windows will work for about ten minutes after the ignition has been switched off. The electric window switches are only disabled when one of the front doors is opened.

Opening and closing the windows using the central locking function

The windows can be opened or closed simultaneously when the vehicle is unlocked or locked.

Opening the windows using the remote control

Press and hold the unlock button on the remote control until the windows reach the desired position.

Opening the windows using the ignition key

Unlock the driver door with the key and hold the key in the un- lock position until all the windows are open.

Closing the windows using the remote control

Press and hold the lock button until all windows are closed .

Closing the windows using the ignition key

Lock the driver door with the key and hold the key in the lock position until all the windows are closed .

The windows will stop moving when you release the remote control button or turn the key back to its initial position in the door lock.

WARNING

Be careful when closing the windows to ensure nobody is hurt.

For safety reasons, you should only use the remote control open and close functions within about 2 metres of the vehicle. To avoid injuries, al- ways keep an eye on the windows when pressing the button to close them. The windows stop moving as soon as the button is released.

Possible malfunctions

Automatic open and close function not working

The automatic open and close function will not work if the battery has been temporarily disconnected. The function can be restored as follows:

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

112 Opening and closing

Close the window as far as it will go by lifting and holding the electric window switch.

Release the switch and then lift it again for one second. This will re-ena- ble the automatic function.

Sliding/tilting sunroof*

Description

The sliding/tilting sunroof is operated using the rotary knob Fig. 82. The rotary knob for sliding the roof open can be adjusted to several different settings (with click stops). This knob only works when the ignition is switch- ed on. The rotary knob must be in the 0 position if you want to tilt the roof up at the rear.

The sunroof will work for about ten minutes after the ignition has been switched off. However, it is immediately disabled when one of the front doors is opened.

Opening/Tilting

The sunroof will create less wind noise if it is opened in the convenience position.

Fig. 82 Detail of headlin- er: Sliding/tilting sunroof control

Convenience position

Turn the control until it engages at position 1 Fig. 82. The sunroof will now only open as far as the convenience position which means there is less wind noise.

Opening completely

Turn the switch to position 2 and hold it until the sunroof rea- ches the desired position. This position can cause more wind noise.

Tilting open

Turn the control to position 0 .

113Opening and closing

With the control in position 0, press the control briefly to make the roof tilt open all the way.

To open the roof as far as an intermediate setting, press and hold the control until the roof has moved to the desired posi- tion.

When you release the switch it will automatically spring back from position 2 to position 1 .

The sliding sun blind in the headliner automatically opens when the sunroof is slid open. If required, it can be closed by hand when the sunroof is closed.

It is advisable to close the sun blind when the vehicle is left standing in the sun. It is important to remember to close the sunroof when parking the vehi- cle or if it suddenly starts raining, especially when the sun blind is closed.

For further information on the automatic close function, see page 113.

Closing

Closing

Turn the control to position 0 Fig. 82 to close the sunroof .

Closing the sunroof from the tilt position

Pull the specially formed rear end of the control and hold it until the sunroof has moved down to the desired position.

Pull the switch briefly to lower the sunroof automatically to the fully closed position. If required, the sunroof can be stopped in any position by briefly pulling the control again .

WARNING

Take care when closing the sunroof. There is a risk of suffering injury. For this reason, always take out the ignition key when leaving the vehicle.

Automatic close function

The sunroof can also be closed from outside the vehicle.

Turn the key in the lock on the driver door and hold it in the lock position or press the lock button on the remote control until the sunroof has closed all the way .

WARNING

Take care when closing the sunroof. There is a risk of suffering injury.

Solar sunroof*

The solar cells in the sunroof power the air conditioner fan.

The solar sunroof is operated in the same way as the normal sliding/tilting sunroof.

The interior trim is fixed to the solar sunroof and cannot be opened and closed separately.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

114 Opening and closing

Emergency electrical activation

In an emergency it is possible to close the sunroof electroni- cally.

The sliding sunroof mechanism is equipped with a safety cut-out. If the roof should fail to close normally, it can be closed with the emergency function.

Turn the control to position 0 Fig. 82.

Pull on the control switch until the roof closes.

WARNING

Take care when closing the sunroof. There is a risk of suffering injury. For this reason, always take out the ignition key when leaving the vehicle.

115Lights and visibility

Lights and visibility

Lights

Lights: switching on and off

Fig. 83 Detailed view of the dash panel: Light switch

Switching on the side lights

Turn the light switch Fig. 83 to position .

Switching on dipped or main beam headlights (driving lights)

Dipped beam headlights

Turn the lights switch to position .

Main beam headlights

Turn the lights switch to position .

Press the main beam lever forward page 122.

Switching off the lights

Turn the light switch to position O.

Daytime running lights: In vehicles for countries where daytime running lights are obligatory and in all vehicles with AFS headlights, daytime run- ning lights are turned on or off with the ignition. Daytime running lights have main beam flashers, as usual, but not the dipped beam headlight function

The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The head- lights are automatically switched to side lights after the ignition has been switched off.

If the side lights or the dipped beam headlights are turned on, the sym- bol will come on together with the lights switch.

Note If the lights are left on after the key has been taken out of the ignition lock, a buzzer sounds when the driver door is opened.

Observe all relevant legal requirements when using the signalling and lighting systems described here.

Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on the lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

116 Lights and visibility

Automatic headlight switch* (sensor-controlled)

If you set the light switch to AUTO, the dipped headlights will switch on and off automatically according to the ambi- ent light level.

Fig. 84 Detailed view of the dash panel: Light switch

Turning on dipped beam headlights

Turn the light switch Fig. 84 to the AUTO position.

Turning off dipped beam headlights

Turn the light switch to position O.

The symbol on the switch lights up when the switch is in the AUTO position.

The dipped beams, side lights, tail lights and number plate lights come on together when the headlights are switched on automatically.

When you are using the automatic headlights switch, you can also operate the main beam headlights, however, please note the following: If you ena- ble the main beam headlights while using the automatic headlights func- tion during the day (e.g. when driving through a tunnel), but do not disable

them again, only the dipped beam headlights will come on the next time the lights are automatically switched on. To be able to use the main beam headlights again, you must first pull the main beam lever back to the "off" position and then push it forward again to "on".

The side lights, headlights, fog lights and rear fog light can still be switched on manually in the normal way by using lights switch page 115.

The interior mirror is fitted with sensors that measure the ambient light. The dipped beam headlights will be switched on automatically if the available light drops below the factory preset value (for instance when driving through a tunnel, etc.). The headlights switch off again automatically when the light level increases .

WARNING

The automatic dipped beam headlights are only intended to assist the driver. Automatic dipped beam headlights do not relieve the driver of his or her responsibility to control them and turn off or turn on the lights manually according to weather or lighting conditions. The light sensors are, for example, unable to detect rain and fog - you should therefore al- ways switch on the dipped beam headlights manually in these condi- tions and when driving after dark.

Observe all relevant legal requirements when using the signalling and lighting systems described here.

Note If automatic headlight switching is activated, when the ignition is turned off the dipped beam headlights are turned off, and when the key is removed from the ignition the side lights are turned off.

If you have to attach any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the automatic dipped beam headlight or anti-dazzle function from working correctly or even from work- ing at all.

117Lights and visibility

The warning symbol will appear on the instrument panel if a malfunc- tion occurs page 82.

Observe all relevant legal requirements when using the signalling and lighting systems described here.

Front fog lights

The light switch can also be used to turn on the front fog lights.

Switching on the front fog lights

Do Fig. 83 not turn the light switch to the symbol .

First turn the light switch to the position or .

Then pull the light switch out to the first stop 1 .

The front fog light symbol next to the switch will light up when the front fog lights are on.

Rear fog light

The light switch can also be used to turn on the rear fog light.

Do Fig. 83 not turn the light switch to the symbol .

First turn the light switch Fig. 83 to the position or .

Then pull out the light switch to the second stop 2 to switch on the rear fog light.

The symbols and next to the switch will light up when the rear fog light is switched on.

If you are towing a trailer or caravan equipped with a rear fog light on a vehi- cle with a factory-fitted towing bracket*, only the rear fog light on the trailer or caravan will light up.

CAUTION To avoid dazzling the traffic behind you, the rear fog light should only be used in accordance with legal regulations.

Coming home / leaving home function*

The coming home and leaving home functions are used to light up the surroundings in the dark. The front fog lights, the rear side lights and the number plate light switch on.

Fig. 85 Detailed view of the dash panel: Coming home and leaving home functions

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

118 Lights and visibility

Activating the function

Briefly press the knob Fig. 85 to release it from its set posi- tion.

Turn the knob to position 1.

Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being changed unintentionally.

Deactivating the function

Briefly press the knob Fig. 85 to release it from its set posi- tion.

Turn the knob to position 0.

Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being changed unintentionally.

The coming home and leaving home functions are controlled by light sen- sors in the interior mirror housing. The system will function when the follow- ing requirements are met:

The knob is set to position 1.

The headlights and the ignition are switched off.

Dark conditions; the sensors register little or no light.

Coming home

When the system is enabled and it is dark, the corresponding exterior lights switch on as soon as the driver door is opened.

The exterior lights will stay on for up to a maximum of 2 minutes as long as one of the doors or the rear lid is open.

The exterior lights stay on for about 30 seconds to light up the area around the vehicle after all the doors and the rear lid have been closed.

This time interval is factory-set, but you can have it changed by a special- ised workshop to suit your own requirements (max. setting is 60 seconds).

Leaving home

The exterior lights are switched on when the vehicle is unlocked with the button on the remote control key.

The exterior lights go out when the driver door is opened or after 60 sec- onds when the vehicle locks itself again automatically page 106.

WARNING

Before leaving the vehicle, remove the key from the ignition, as the lights will not go out if the coming home function is activated. This will lead to battery discharge and vehicle breakdown.

Note If you always wish to use the coming home and leaving home functions, you can leave them permanently switched on. As the system is controlled via a photosensor, it will only work in dark conditions.

Permanent use of the coming home and leaving home functions, partic- ularly on short journeys, will increase the load on the battery. To make sure the battery is always sufficiently charged, occasionally drive longer distan- ces.

If the fog lights have been switched on by the coming home and leaving home functions, they will always be switched off when you switch on the ig- nition.

Observe all relevant legal requirements when using the signalling and lighting systems described here.

119Lights and visibility

Instrument lighting

The brightness of the instrument lighting, displays and cen- tre console lighting can be varied as required.

Fig. 86 Instrument panel lighting

Press the + button to increase the brightness.

Press the - button to reduce the brightness.

With the ignition switched on

The lighting of the digital displays will adjust automatically, depending on the ambient light.

With the vehicle's lights switched on

When the vehicle's lights are switched on, the brightness of the instrument lighting, displays and centre console lighting can be varied by pressing the + and - buttons.

Headlight range control

When the dipped beam headlights are switched on, the range of the headlights can be adjusted to suit the load of the vehicle.

Fig. 87 Headlight range control

Briefly press the knob Fig. 87 to release it from its set posi- tion.

Turn the knob to the required setting.

Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being changed unintentionally.

Settings

The settings roughly correspond to the following load conditions:

Two front occupants, luggage compartment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compartment empty

O

1

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

120 Lights and visibility

All seats occupied, luggage compartment loaded

Driver only, luggage compartment loaded

CAUTION Always adjust the headlights to avoid dazzling oncoming traffic. Make sure you lower the headlights when the vehicle is more heavily laden.

Dynamic headlight range control

On vehicles with xenon lamps, the headlights automatically adapt to suit the load being carried when the ignition is switched on and when the vehi- cle is moving, depending on the load of the vehicle and the type of driving (e.g. when accelerating and braking).

2

3

Daytime driving lights*

The daytime running lights turn on automatically when the ignition is switched on.

Fig. 88 Daytime running lights switch

Activating the function

Briefly press the knob Fig. 88 to release it from its set posi- tion.

Turn the knob to position 1.

Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being changed unintentionally.

Deactivating the function

Briefly press the knob Fig. 88 to release it from its set posi- tion.

Turn the knob to position 0.

121Lights and visibility

Press the knob in again to prevent the setting from being changed unintentionally.

This button activates or deactivates the daytime running lights function. With the function activated, when the ignition is switched on the daytime running lights are turned on automatically.

Note Please observe any relevant legal requirements which may apply in your country.

Adaptive headlights* (for driving around bends)

When driving around bends, the headlights will light the most important areas of the road.

Fig. 89 Adaptive head- lights when driving

The dynamic cornering light gives better illumination of the curve area and the side of the road when driving around a bend Fig. 89. The dynamic cor-

nering light is controlled automatically depending on the speed and the steering wheel angle.

The dipped beam headlights are regulated automatically when you drive around a bend, depending on how far you turn the steering wheel. The two main headlights move at different angles to avoid that the front of the vehi- cle is left completely in the dark.

Note The system operates from a speed of about 10 km/h (6 mph).

Hazard warning lights

The hazard warning lights are used to draw the attention of other road users to your vehicle in emergencies.

Fig. 90 Centre console: Switch for hazard warn- ing lights

Press the switch Fig. 90 to switch the hazard warning lights on or off.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

122 Lights and visibility

All four turn signals flash simultaneously when the hazard warning lights are switched on. The turn signal indicators and the hazard control lamp indicator flash at the same time. The hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off.

In an accident in which the airbags are triggered, the hazard warning lights are switched on automatically.

Note You should switch on the hazard warning lights to warn other road users, e.g.

When reaching the tail end of a traffic jam

If your vehicle breaks down or there is an emergency

If your vehicle is being towed away or if you are towing another vehicle

Turn signal and main beam headlight lever

The turn signal and main beam headlight lever also oper- ates the parking lights and the headlight flasher.

Fig. 91 Turn signal and main beam headlight lev- er

The turn signal and main beam headlight lever has the following functions:

Turn signals

Move the lever all the way up to indicate right or all the way down to indicate left Fig. 91.

Move the lever up or down just as far as the point of resistance and hold it there: the turn signals flash for as long as you hold the lever (for instance when changing a lane).

Move the lever briefly up or down as far as the point of resist- ance and release it to signal briefly (the turn signals flash three times).

123Lights and visibility

Main beam headlights

Press the lever forward to switch on the main beams.

Pull the lever back towards you to switch the main beam head- lights off again.

Headlight flasher

Pull the lever towards the steering wheel to operate the flasher.

Parking light

Switch the ignition off.

Move the lever up or down to turn on the right or left-hand park- ing lights respectively.

Notes on these functions

The turn signals only work when the ignition is switched on. The turn signal lamp or flashes in the instrument panel when the turns signals page 65 are working.

The turn signals are cancelled automatically when the steering wheel is returned to the straight-ahead position.

The main beam headlights can only be switched on if the dipped beam headlights are already on. The main beam headlight indicator lamp then comes on in the instrument panel.

The headlight flasher comes on for as long as you pull the lever, even if no other lights are switched on. The main beam headlight indicator lamp then comes on in the instrument panel.

When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the tail light on one side of the vehicle light up with reduced intensity. The parking lights will only work with the ignition off.

CAUTION Never use the main beam headlights or the headlight flasher if this would dazzle oncoming traffic.

Interior lights

Front interior lights and glove compartment light

The front interior light also incorporates the reading lights for the driver and passenger.

Fig. 92 Detail of headlin- er: front interior lights

The rocker switch A Fig. 92 for the front interior light has the following functions:

Door light position

Move switch A to the centre position.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

124 Lights and visibility

Interior light switched on

Move switch A to position I.

Interior light switched off

Move switch A to position O.

Front reading lights

Press one of the switches B to turn the left and right reading lights on and off.

Glove compartment light

Open the glove compartment on the front passenger side. The glove compartment light will come on automatically if the side lights or headlights are switched on, and will go out again when the glove compartment is closed.

Footwell* and door lighting

This is switched on when the doors are opened and off when they are closed.

If the switch is in the courtesy light position, the interior light comes on au- tomatically when the vehicle is unlocked or the doors are opened. The light also comes on when the key is pulled out of the ignition. The light turns off about 30 seconds after closing the doors. The interior light is switched off immediately when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is switched on.

If a door is left open, the light is switched off after about 10 minutes to pre- vent the battery from running flat.

The brightness of the lights is automatically adjusted by a dimmer when they are switched on.

Ambient lighting*

The ambient lighting illuminates a number of important controls.

Fig. 93 Detail of headlin- er: Ambient lighting

The lights in the door handles come on automatically when the ignition is switched on.

The lighting above the windscreen* also comes on when the side lights or headlights are switched on. The centre console is illuminated from above.

The ambient lighting* cannot be switched off manually.

125Lights and visibility

Rear reading lights

Fig. 94 Detail of headlin- er: rear reading lights

The reading lights are switched on and off with the switches .

Luggage compartment light

Fig. 95 Detailed view of the top of the luggage compartment: luggage compartment lighting

The light is in the upper part of the luggage compartment. A second light is provided on the inside, below the loading edge.

The light Fig. 95 switches on automatically when the rear lid is opened. The luggage compartment light is switched off automatically if the rear lid is left open for more than 10 minutes.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

126 Lights and visibility

Visibility

Heated rear window

The rear window heating clears the rear window of conden- sation.

Fig. 96 Switch for heat- ed rear window

Press button to switch the rear window heating on or off Fig. 96.

The heated rear window only works when the ignition is switched on. An in- dicator lamp on the button lights up when the rear window heater is switch- ed on.

The heated rear window switches off automatically after about 10 minutes if the outside temperature is above 0 C.

Depending on the outside temperature, the exterior mirrors are also heated while the heated rear window is turned on.

The exterior mirror heating is not activated at temperatures above approxi- mately 20 C.

For the sake of the environment Switch off the heated rear window as soon as the rear window has demis- ted. By saving electrical power you can also save fuel.

Sun visors

The sun visors can improve visibility and contribute to safe- ty.

Fig. 97 Sun visor

The sun visors 1 for the driver and the front passenger can be pulled out of their mountings in the centre of the vehicle and turned towards the doors Fig. 97.

The vanity mirrors in the sun visor have covers. On opening the cover 2 , the mirror light* located in the headliner is automatically switched on. The

127Lights and visibility

light switches itself off when the cover is closed and when the sun visor is pushed back up.

Sun blind*

Sun blinds are provided for the rear window and the rear side windows.

Fig. 98 Sun blind exten- ded to cover rear side window

Fig. 99 Switch for elec- tric sun blind on rear win- dow

Sun blind (rear side windows)

Pull out the blind and hook it into the hooks at the top of the door frame Fig. 98.

Sun blind (rear window)

Press the switch to extend or retract the electric sun blind for the rear window Fig. 99.

The sun blind for the rear window switches off automatically when it reaches the end position. It can be made to move in the other direction before it rea- ches its end position by briefly pressing the switch a second time. If the ig- nition is turned off while the blind is still moving, it continues until it rea- ches the end position before switching off.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

128 Lights and visibility

Note An overload cut-out may be triggered if the sun blind for the rear window is operated repeatedly. There will then be a short delay before the blind can be operated again.

As the material of the sun blind is less flexible at low temperatures the electric actuator is switched off when the temperature in the car is below -5 C. The sun blind can only be operated when the temperature inside the car rises above this level.

Windscreen wipers

Windscreen wipers

The windscreen wiper lever controls the windscreen wipers and the automatic wash and wipe.

Fig. 100 Windscreen wiper lever

The windscreen wiper lever Fig. 100 has the following settings:

Short wipe

Move the lever down to position 1 to give the windscreen a short wipe.

Intermittent wipe / Rain sensor* (activate)

Move the lever up to position 2 .

Move the switch A up or down to set the wiper intervals.

In vehicles equipped with a rain sensor*, you can move the switch A up and down to set the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

Slow wipe

Move the lever up to position 3 .

Continuous wipe

Move the lever up to position 4 .

Automatic wash and wipe

Pull the lever towards the steering wheel, 5 , to activate the windscreen washer.

Release the lever. The washer will stop and the wipers will keep running for approximately 4 seconds.

Deactivating the windscreen wiper

Pull the lever to basic position 0 .

General notes

The washers and wipers will work only when the ignition is switched on.

129Lights and visibility

If you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights, the wiper speed will automatically be reduced. The rain sensor* will automatically be set to the intermittent wipe function.

The windscreen washer jets are heated when the ignition is switched on.

The wiper intervals in the intermittent wipe setting are also varied automati- cally according to the road speed (in addition to the manual delay setting).

When the lights are switched on you should only pull the lever briefly to wash the windscreen, otherwise the headlight washers* will also be ena- bled. This will use an unnecessary amount of fluid from the reservoir.

Rain sensor

The rain sensor* will only function in the intermittent wipe position. The in- termittent wipe function is enabled automatically when it starts to rain.

If the windscreen wiper lever was in the intermittent wipe position when the ignition was off, the rain sensor will not activate until you reach a speed of 6 km/h.

Use switch A to set the sensitivity of the rain sensor*.

If you have selected a high sensitivity level for the rain sensor the wind- screen wipers will react sooner to any moisture on the windscreen.

The wiper intervals in the intermittent wipe setting are also varied automati- cally according to the road speed (in addition to the sensitivity setting).

WARNING

For correct visibility and safe driving, the wiper must be in perfect condition page 214. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

The rain sensor* is only intended to assist the driver. The driver is still obliged to manually operate the windscreen wipers as required de- pending on visibility.

Do not use water-repellent coatings on the windscreen. In bad visibili- ty conditions such as light rain, low sun or when driving at night, these coatings can cause increased dazzle, which is a serious safety hazard. Such coatings can also cause the windscreen wiper blades to make noise.

CAUTION In the event of frost, check that the wiper blade has not frozen before activating the windscreen wipers. Should the windscreen wiper system be enabled when the blade is frozen, this could damage it or even the wind- screen wiper system motor.

Make sure you switch off the windscreen wiper system (lever in position 0) before you use an automatic car wash. This will avoid inadvertent trigger- ing of the wipers and possible damage to the wiper system.

Note Check that the washer fluid reservoir is full before starting a long jour- ney. Fill the reservoir page 235.

Worn or dirty wiper blades can cause smearing on the glass which can also impair the effectiveness of the rain sensor*. Check the condition of windscreen wiper blades at regular intervals.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

130 Lights and visibility

Headlight washer system

Fig. 101 Headlight with extended washer jet

With the lights switched on, operate the automatic wash and wipe Fig. 100 5 , and keep the lever pulled towards you for at least 1 second.

The headlight washer jets come out of the bumper automatically (under wa- ter pressure) Fig. 101.

Clean off dirt (insects, etc.) from the lenses at regular intervals, for instance when filling the tank.

To ensure that the system works properly in winter, keep the nozzle holders free of snow and remove any ice with a de-icer spray.

Rear vision mirrors

Interior mirror with manual anti-dazzle setting

Normal setting

Point the lever at the bottom of the mirror forwards.

Anti-dazzle setting for the interior mirror

Position the small lever of the lower edge of the mirror to face towards the rear.

Interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle adjustment*

The automatic anti-dazzle function can be switched on and off as desired.

Fig. 102 Interior mirror with anti-dazzle setting: Indicator lamp and on/off switch

131Lights and visibility

Switching off the anti-dazzle function

Press button A Fig. 102. Control lamp B goes off.

Switching on the anti-dazzle function

Press button A Fig. 102. Indicator lamp B turns on.

Anti-dazzle function

The anti-dazzle function is activated every time the ignition is switched on. The green warning lamp lights up in the rear vision mirror housing.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the interior rear vision mirror will darken automatically according to the amount of light it receives. The anti- dazzle function is disabled if:

the interior lighting is switched on

reverse gear is engaged

Sensors for automatic headlights*

When the light switch is set to the AUTO position, the dipped beam head- lights are switched on and off automatically according to the ambient light level with the aid of the sensors located in the interior mirror page 116.

WARNING

Electrolyte fluid can leak from a broken mirror. This could cause irritation to the skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If you come into contact with this liquid, it must be rinsed with large quantities of water. Seek medical assistance if needed!

CAUTION Electrolyte fluid leaking from a broken mirror can cause damage to plastic surfaces. Use a sponge or similar to remove the fluid as soon as possible.

Note The interior mirror automatic anti-dazzle function* will only work proper- ly if the sun blind* for the rear window is retracted and if there are no other objects preventing light from reaching the mirror.

If you have to stick any type of sticker on the windscreen, do not do so in front of the sensors. Doing so could prevent the automatic headlight or anti- dazzle function from working correctly or even from working at all.

Exterior mirrors

The exterior mirrors are adjusted electrically.

Fig. 103 Detailed view of the armrest: Adjuster knob

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Turn the adjuster knob to position Fig. 103 L (left exterior mirror) or position R (right exterior mirror).

Move the knob as required to adjust the exterior mirror for a good view behind you.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

132 Lights and visibility

Retracting both exterior mirrors

Turn the knob to position A .

It is advisable to fold the exterior mirrors, for example when parking or when driving through narrow spaces.

Heated mirrors

The mirrors are heated (depending on the outside temperature) when the heated rear window page 126 is switched on.

The exterior mirror heating is not activated at temperatures above approxi- mately 20 C.

Memory for exterior mirrors*

In vehicles with memory function for the driver seat, the setting of the exte- rior mirrors is automatically stored together with the seat position page 137.

Tilting function for exterior mirror on the passenger side* (only if equipped with memory for exterior mirrors)

When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror surface tilts slightly downwards, provided the mirror control is switched to the exterior mirror on the passen- ger side (knob in position R Fig. 103). This provides a better view of the kerb when parking.

The mirror returns to its original position as soon as reverse gear is disen- gaged and the vehicle is driven forwards at a speed above 15 km/h, or when the mirror control is turned to position L or to the neutral position

0 .

CAUTION Rear view convex or aspheric* mirrors increase the field of vision, al- though objects appear smaller and further away in the mirrors. Therefore, you should not rely on these mirrors for judging the distance of vehicles be- hind.

If one of the mirror housings is knocked out of position (e.g. when park- ing), the mirrors must first be fully retracted with the electric control. Do not readjust the mirror housing by hand, as this will interfere with the mirror ad- juster function.

Note If the electrical adjustment ever fails to operate, the mirrors can be adjusted by hand by lightly pressing the edge of the mirror glass.

133Seats and storage

Seats and storage

Manual adjustment of the front seats

Seat adjuster controls

There are several seat adjustment functions for your conven- ience

Fig. 104 Adjuster con- trols on driver seat

Some of the equipment listed is only fitted on certain models or is an op- tional extra.

Controls

Moving the seat backwards or forwards

Raising/lowering the seat

Adjusting the backrest angle

Adjusting the lumbar support

1

2

3

4

Moving the seats forwards and backwards

Lift the lever 1 Fig. 104 and move the seat to the desired po- sition.

Then release the lever 1 and move the seat further until the catch engages.

WARNING

The driver seat must only be moved forwards and backwards when the vehicle is at a standstill. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Adjusting the seat height*

Raising the seat

Pull the lever 2 Fig. 104 up repeatedly until the seat is in the desired position.

Lowering the seat

Press the lever 2 down repeatedly until the seat is in the de- sired position.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

134 Seats and storage

WARNING

The height of the driver seat must not be adjusted while driving. Fail- ure to do so could result in an accident.

Be careful when adjusting the seat height. Injuries can be caused if the seat height is adjusted without due care and attention.

Adjusting the backrest angle

Lean forwards to take your weight off the backrest.

Turn the adjuster wheel 3 Fig. 104 to set the angle of the backrest as required.

WARNING

The front seat backrests must not be reclined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts and the airbag system might not protect as they should, with the subsequent danger of injury.

Adjusting lumbar support*

Do not exert any pressure on the backrest and turn adjuster wheel 4 Fig. 104 to adjust lumbar support.

As you make the adjustments, the curvature of the cushioned area of the lumbar region becomes more or less acute. In this way, it adapts to the nat- ural curvature of the spine.

135Seats and storage

Electric adjustment of front seats*

Adjusting the seat

The arrangement of the switches corresponds with the de- sign of the seats.

Fig. 105 Front seat: Ad- juster controls

Fig. 106 Front seat: Seat adjustment switches

The adjustment switches for the seat and backrest correspond with the layout, design and operation of the seat. The seats can be ad- justed merely by pressing the corresponding switch in the required direction.

Moving the seat forwards / backwards

Press switch A Fig. 105 forwards or backwards 1

Fig. 106 .

Raising/lowering the seat

Press switch A up or down .

Raising/lowering the front part of the seat

Press the front of switch A up or down 2 .

Raising/lowering the rear part of the seat

Press the rear of switch A up or down 3 .

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

136 Seats and storage

Controls

Seat adjustment

Backrest adjustment

Lumbar support*

WARNING

The electrical seat adjustment also works when the ignition is off or when the key is not in the ignition. To avoid accidental injuries, never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

For safety reasons, the seat must only be adjusted when the vehicle is at a standstill. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Be careful when adjusting the seat height. Injuries can be caused if the seat height is adjusted without due care and attention.

Adjusting the backrest angle

Fig. 107 Front seat: Backrest adjuster switch

A

B

C

Press the button in the appropriate direction of the arrow Fig. 107 to adjust the backrest .

WARNING

The front seat backrests must not be reclined for driving. Otherwise, seat belts and the airbag system might not protect as they should, with the subsequent danger of injury.

Lumbar support*

The lumbar support can be adjusted to fit the natural curve of the spine.

Fig. 108 Front seat: Ad- juster switch for lumbar support

Adjusting the contour

Press the front part of the adjuster switch Fig. 108 to increase the contour of the lumbar support.

137Seats and storage

Press the rear part of the adjuster switch to decrease the con- tour of the lumbar support.

Adjusting the height

Press the top part of the adjuster switch to move the contour upwards.

Press the bottom part of the adjuster switch to move the con- tour down.

The lumbar support provides effective support for the natural curvature of the spine to give a more relaxed seating position, especially on long jour- neys.

Driver seat memory*

Description

The memory buttons in the driver door can be used to store and recall up to four different positions for the driver seat and exterior mirrors.

Fig. 109 Driver door: Memory system

Memory buttons

Using memory buttons 1, 2, 3 and 4 Fig. 109, you can store and recall the seat and exterior mirror positions for up to four different drivers.

STOP button

The seat memory will be disabled if the STOP button is in the up position (press and release). The word will light up next to the STOP button (only visible when the lights are switched on).

The stored settings will all remain in the memory. However, the seat and the exterior mirrors can now only be adjusted using the conventional electrical adjustment. Use of the STOP button is recommended to disable the memory

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

138 Seats and storage

system when the vehicle is being driven temporarily by a different driver whose settings do not need to be stored in the memory.

Note You can also use the remote control to call up the stored settings page 139.

Storing settings

The STOP button must be in its down position (pressed in) before you can store the desired settings.

Adjust the driver seat as required page 135.

Adjust both exterior mirrors page 131.

Press and hold the MEMO button. At the same time, press one of the memory buttons for at least a second.

Release both buttons. The setting is now stored on the selected memory button.

Any new setting selected automatically cancels the existing setting stored on the memory button. It is best to begin with memory button No. 1 for the first driver and then assign the other memory buttons to each subsequent driver.

The seat and mirror positions are stored when the vehicle is locked with the remote control and are assigned to the remote control key. The exterior mir- rors adjust automatically to the previous position when you unlock the vehi- cle; the driver seat adjusts automatically when you open the driver door.

However, this does not delete the settings stored in memory buttons 1 to 4. These settings can be enabled at any time.

Activating settings

Stored settings can be recalled using either the memory but- tons or the remote control (remote control key).

Using the memory buttons

If the driver door is open, press the desired memory button briefly.

If the driver door is closed, press and hold down the appropri- ate memory button until the seat and exterior mirrors reach their programmed positions.

Using the remote control

Unlock the vehicle using the remote control and open the driver door within the next ten minutes.

The seat adjustment will have to be called up using the memory buttons if the driver door is not opened within 10 minutes after unlocking the vehicle with the remote control.

WARNING

For safety reasons, the seat must only be adjusted when the vehicle is at a standstill. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

In an emergency, the memory function can be stopped at any time by pressing the STOP button or by briefly pressing any of the memory but- tons.

139Seats and storage

Assigning remote control keys

The key must be assigned to a memory button so that the positions stored in the memory can also be recalled using the remote control key.

Assigning the remote control key to a memory button

Using the memory button, recall the settings that are to be pro- grammed onto the key.

Keeping the memory button pressed down, press the unlock button on the remote control key within 10 seconds.

Wait for about 2 seconds before releasing the memory button.

Deleting assignment of the remote control key to the memory button

Press and hold the MEMO button and press the unlock button on the remote control key within 10 seconds.

Wait for about 2 seconds before releasing the MEMO button.

The previous settings are automatically cancelled when the keys are re-as- signed to different memory buttons.

Head restraints

Front head restraints

In combination with properly worn seat belts, the head re- straints offer effective protection, provided they are properly adjusted to suit the height of the occupant.

Fig. 110 Front seats: Head restraints

Raising the head restraint

Take hold of the sides of the head restraint with both hands.

Pull up the head restraint.

Lowering the head restraint

Press button A and lower the head restraint.

Removing the head restraints

Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

140 Seats and storage

Press button A and pull out the head restraint.

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restraint in its guides until it clicks into place. Press button A and lower the head restraint.

The height of the head restraints is adjustable. They should be set to suit the height of the occupant. In combination with the seat belts, the head re- straints offer effective protection, provided they are properly adjusted.

For best protection, the top of the head restraint should be at least at eye level or higher.

Head restraints on the side rear seats

Fig. 111 Outer rear seats: Head restraints

Raising the head restraint

Take hold of the sides of the head restraint with both hands.

Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Lowering the head restraint

Press button A Fig. 111 and lower the head restraint.

Removing the head restraint

Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Press button A Fig. 111 and pull out the head restraint.

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restraint in its guides until it clicks into place. Press button A and lower the head restraint.

When the rear seats are not occupied, the head restraints should be moved to the lowest position so that they do not obstruct the driver's field of vi- sion.

Rear seat central head restraint

Fig. 112 Centre rear seat: Head restraints

141Seats and storage

Raising the head restraint

Take hold of the sides of the head restraint with both hands.

Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Lowering the head restraint

Press button A Fig. 112 and lower the head restraint.

Removing the head restraint

Pull the head restraint up as far as it will go.

Press button A Fig. 112 and pull out the head restraint.

Fitting the head restraint

Insert the head restraint in its guides until it clicks into place. Press button A and lower the head restraint.

When the rear seats are not occupied the head restraints should be moved to the lowest position so that they do not obstruct the driver's field of vi- sion.

Armrests

The armrest can be adjusted to several positions and incor- porates a storage compartment.

Fig. 113 Armrest be- tween the driver seat and front passenger seat

Adjusting the armrest

To adjust the position of the armrest, fold the armrest all the way down.

Then lift the armrest gradually until it engages in the desired position.

Opening the storage compartment

Press the release lever Fig. 113.

Please note that the armrest can restrict the driver's movements when it is lowered. The armrest should therefore be raised when driving in city traffic.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

142 Seats and storage

Luggage compartment

Loading the luggage compartment

Loads in the luggage compartment should be safely se- cured.

Fig. 114 Position heavy items as far forward as possible.

To maintain safe handling on the road, please observe the follow- ing points:

Distribute the load evenly.

Position heavy items as far forward as possible Fig. 114.

WARNING

Unsecured objects in the luggage compartment can suddenly shift and cause changes in the handling of the vehicle.

In an accident or a sudden manoeuvre, loose objects in the passenger compartment can be flung forward and might injure vehicle occupants.

Always keep all objects in the luggage compartment and use appro- priate grips to secure them, particularly in the case of heavy objects.

When you transport heavy objects, always bear in mind that a change of the centre of gravity can also cause changes in vehicle handling.

Please refer to the notes on page 7.

Note The tyre pressure must be adjusted according to the load. Consult the label with the pressure values inside the fuel tank plug when required Fig. 167.

143Seats and storage

Extending the luggage compartment

The two sections of the backrest can be folded forwards ei- ther together or separately to increase the capacity of the luggage compartment.

Fig. 115 Backrest re- lease lever

Folding the backrest forwards

Press the release lever A Fig. 115 in the direction indicated by the arrow.

Fold down the backrest.

Returning the backrest to its upright position

Push the backrest up until it engages securely . The red marking on the tab B should no longer be visible when the backrest is properly secured.

WARNING

Make sure that the rear backrest is securely locked in position so that the seat belt can provide proper protection on the centre rear seat.

The rear backrest must always be securely latched so that objects stored in the luggage compartment will not fly forward through the inte- rior during sudden braking.

CAUTION When returning the backrest to an upright position, make sure that the seat belts for the outer rear seats are in their guides, so that they cannot be caught up and damaged in the catches for the backrest.

Rear shelf

The rear shelf behind the rear seat backrest can be used to store light items of clothing.

WARNING

Do not store any heavy or hard objects on the rear shelf. These could cause injury if the brakes are applied suddenly.

CAUTION Please note that hard objects could chafe against the wires of the heating element in the rear window and cause damage.

Note Make sure that the slots between the rear window and the rear shelf are kept clear to ensure unimpaired ventilation.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

144 Seats and storage

Ski bag*

You can use the ski bag to transport skis or other extra-long objects safely inside the vehicle without soiling or damag- ing the upholstery.

Fig. 116 Detailed view of the rear of the rear back- rest: Ski bag cover

Fig. 117 Securing the ski bag on the centre seat belt buckle on the rear seat bench

Loading

Open the rear lid.

Press the release catch for the ski bag cover (arrow) and fold the cover downwards Fig. 116.

Pull down the centre rear armrest.

From the passenger compartment, press down the release catch for the ski bag cover and pull out the cover.

Pull out and unfold the ski bag.

The long items can now be loaded through the luggage com- partment into the ski bag .

Securing

Insert the fastening belt A Fig. 117 of the ski bag into the centre seat belt buckle B .

Pull the free end of belt C to tighten.

Storing

Close the cover of the load-through hatch in the luggage com- partment.

Carefully fold away the ski bag.

Close the inside cover of the load-through hatch from the pas- senger compartment.

WARNING

The ski bag must be secured in place with the fastening belt after it has been loaded.

145Seats and storage

Note Do not fold away the ski bag after use if it is still damp.

Roof rack

Description

Additional luggage can be carried on the roof rack.

Note the following points if you intend to carry loads on the roof:

There are aerodynamic drainage channels on the roof of the vehicle and, therefore, normal roof racks cannot be used. We recommend using the ba- sic support units from the range of genuine SEAT accessories.

These basic supports are the base of a complete roof rack system. For safety reasons, however, the corresponding additional fastenings must be fitted to carry luggage, bicycles, surfboards, skis and boats. All the parts of this system are available from SEAT Official Services.

CAUTION Any damage to the vehicle caused by the use of other types of roof rack or incorrect installation will not be covered by the factory warranty. The roof rack system must therefore be installed exactly according to the instructions provided.

Attachment points

The roof rack must be attached at the marked points only.

Fig. 118 Attachment points for basic support units

Installation

The feet of the support units must be fitted exactly between the points marked with arrows on the roof sealing strip Fig. 118. The arrows are only visible with the doors open.

Roof load

Loads carried on the roof must be securely attached. The ve- hicle's handling is affected whenever you carry loads on the vehicle.

The authorised load on the roof of your vehicle is 75 kg. Use the weight of the roof rack system and that of the load as a basis to calculate the roof load.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

146 Seats and storage

If less resistant systems are used, the roof rack must not be loaded to the maximum weight permitted. If less resistant systems are used, these must only be loaded to the maximum weight permitted indicated in the assembly instructions.

WARNING

Loads carried on the roof must be securely attached. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Do not exceed the maximum roof load for the vehicle, the maximum axle loads or the maximum gross vehicle weight. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

When transporting heavy or bulky loads on the roof, bear in mind that the vehicle's handling is affected by the extra weight on the roof and a possible susceptibility to cross winds. Adjust your speed and driving style accordingly to avoid accidents.

For the sake of the environment Roof racks are often left attached for convenience, even when they are not being used. However, the increased air resistance means that the vehicle uses more fuel. For this reason you should always take off the roof rack when it is not in use.

Drink holder

Front drink holder

Fig. 119 Detailed view of the dash panel: Drink holder

To open the drink holder, press the symbol on the drink hold- er lid Fig. 119

To close the drink holder, press it in until it engages.

WARNING

Do not put any hot drinks in the drink holder while the vehicle is mov- ing. You can be scalded if the hot liquid is spilt.

Do not use hard china cups or glasses. These could cause injury in the event of an accident.

147Seats and storage

Drink holder in the rear armrest*

Fig. 120 Drink holder in the rear armrest

Opening the drink holder

Press the symbol A Fig. 120.

Adjusting the retainer arm

To adjust one of the retainer arms B , release it by pressing in the direction indicated (arrow) and move it as required.

The retainer arm should be positioned against the drink holder so that it is held securely.

One or two drink holders can be held in the centre console.

WARNING

Do not put any hot drinks in the drink holder while the vehicle is mov- ing. You can be scalded if the hot liquid is spilt.

Do not use hard china cups or glasses. These could cause injury in the event of an accident.

Ashtray*, cigarette lighter* and electric sockets*

Front ashtray*

Fig. 121 Centre console: Open ashtray

Opening the ashtray

Lightly press the front part of the ashtray A Fig. 121.

Removing the ashtray

Take hold of the sides of the ashtray B Fig. 121 and lift it out.

Fitting the ashtray casing

Insert the casing and press it into its mountings.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

148 Seats and storage

WARNING

Never put waste paper in the ashtray, as this could cause a fire.

Rear ashtray

Fig. 122 Rear ashtray

Opening the ashtray

Lift the lid.

Removing the ashtray

Take hold of the lid Fig. 122 and lift out the ashtray.

Fitting the ashtray casing

Open the lid on the ashtray and press the casing into the mounting as far as it will go.

WARNING

Never put waste paper in the ashtray, as this could cause a fire.

Cigarette lighter*

The 12 volt socket for the cigarette lighter can also be used as a power source for other electrical appliances.

Fig. 123 Cigarette light- er in the centre console

Using the cigarette lighter

Press in the cigarette lighter button.

Wait for the lighter to pop out slightly.

Pull out the cigarette lighter immediately.

Use the glowing heater element of the cigarette lighter to light your cigarette.

149Seats and storage

Put the cigarette lighter back in its socket.

Operating the socket

Take out the cigarette lighter.

Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the cigarette lighter socket.

The cigarette lighter Fig. 123 employs a standard 12 volt socket, which can also be used as a power source for electrical appliances. The applian- ces connected to the power socket must not exceed a power rating of 100 W.

WARNING

Be careful when using the electric cigarette lighter. Carelessness or negligence when using the cigarette lighter can cause burns.

The lighter will only work when the ignition is switched on.

The electrical sockets and, therefore, any appliances connected to them will only work when the ignition is switched on.

CAUTION Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.

Note The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a battery discharge.

Power socket*

Electrical equipment can be connected to the 12 volt power socket.

Fig. 124 Detailed view of the side trim in the lug- gage compartment: 12 volt power socket

Lift the power socket cover Fig. 124.

Insert the plug of the electrical appliance into the power socket.

Electrical equipment can be connected to the 12 volt power socket. The ap- pliances connected to the power socket must not exceed a power rating of 100 W.

WARNING

The electrical sockets and, therefore, any appliances connected to them will only work when the ignition is switched on.

CAUTION Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

150 Seats and storage

Note The use of electrical appliances with the engine switched off will cause a battery discharge.

230 volt socket for Europlug*

Electrical equipment can also be connected to the 230 volt socket in the centre console.

Fig. 125 Centre console: 230 volt socket

The 230 Volt socket can only be used when the engine is running .

In vehicles with folding cover:

Hold the cover of the socket at the lower recess.

Lift the cover to open Fig. 125.

Inserting the Europlug

Insert the Europlug in the socket. The childproof safety device on the socket is deactivated.

If necessary, press the Europlug as far as possible into the sock- et to ensure it is correctly inserted and will not jump out of place while driving over a bump or similar.

LED warning lamp above socket

Steady green light:

The childproof lock is unlocked. The socket is ready for use

Flashing red light:

There is a fault, for example, disconnection due to ex- cess current or temperature

Equipment which may be connected

The 230 volt socket can be used to connect electrical equipment with a Eu- roplug. Please note that the power consumption in this socket must not ex- ceed 150 watts (peaks of 300 watts).

Even when more than one appliance is connected, the total consumption of all the appliances must not exceed 150 watts. If necessary, please refer to the manufacturer's label to confirm the power consumption of the connec- ted equipment.

All connected appliances should be in perfect working order without any faults.

151Seats and storage

WARNING

Heavy appliances or connectors (for example, adapters) which hang down directly from the Europlug socket may damage the socket with the resultant risk of injury.

Ensure that appliances connected to the socket are secure to prevent them from being thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking or an accident. This could result in severe injury or loss of life page 16, Storing objects.

Never spill liquid over the power socket there is a risk of death. If any moisture enters the socket, ensure that it is thoroughly dry before using.

Improper use of the sockets or electrical accessories can lead to seri- ous injuries or cause a fire, with the resultant risk of injury.

Children must never be left alone in the vehicle with the engine run- ning. They could cause an accident.

Appliances connected to the socket do not behave in the same way as when they are connected to the mains power supply. They may overheat during use and cause injury.

When using adapters and extension leads, the childproof safety de- vice on the 230 volt socket is disconnected and the socket is live. Risk of injury!.

Never insert objects which conduct electricity, such as a needle, in the pins of the 230 volt socket. There is a risk of death.

Always switch off electrical appliances connected to the socket if the inverter goes off as a result of overheating. Failure to comply could result in injuries.

CAUTION The instructions for handling appliances connected to the socket must be observed.

If the power consumption of the appliances connected exceeds 150 watts, the socket inverter will overheat. If the temperature exceeds a certain value, the inverter will switch off. It may also switch off if the outside tem- perature is very high, even if the power consumption is normal. The inverter will switch on again automatically after it has cooled down. Appliances con- nected to the socket, and which have been left switched on, will automati- cally come back on .

Do not connect neon lamps to the socket. For technical reasons, these could break down.

Do not connect 115 volt appliances to the 230 volt power socket, as they could be damaged. If you have any queries, please check the manufac- turer's label for details of the power supply accepted by the appliance.

With some adapters, for example for laptops, their built-in overload dis- connection system prevents the equipment from switching on in the event of an excessive start-up current. In this case, disconnect the adapter from the power supply and try to reconnect after ten seconds.

Note Non-insulated equipment may cause interference to the radio or vehicle electronics.

The Europlug socket has a built-in childproof device and only carries live current when the Europlug is correctly plugged in.

Some appliances may not operate correctly in the absence of adequate power (watts).

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

152 Seats and storage

In some countries this socket is 115 volts. Therefore the socket should have a different inverter installed at the factory. You can obtain retrofit kits from your Technical Service. Do not connect 115 Volt appliances to the 230 Volt socket.

The use of electrical equipment in the vicinity of the aerial in the rear window may cause interference to the reception of stations broadcasting in AM.

Compartments

Overview

There are several storage compartments at various points in the vehicle.

Your vehicle has the following storage compartments:

First-aid kit*

Emergency triangle*

Glove compartment page 152

Storage compartment in the centre console

On-board documentation compartment*

Compartments in the door trims page 153

Coat hooks page 153

Rear shelf page 143

Side storage compartment in luggage com- partment

Some of the compartments listed are only provided in certain models or are optional extras.

Glove compartment

The lockable glove compartment is equipped with a light.

Fig. 126 Glove compart- ment

Opening the glove compartment

Pull the handle on the lid in the direction indicated (arrow) Fig. 126 and open the lid.

Closing the glove compartment

Close the lid and push it in until it engages.

If the side lights or headlights are switched on, the light in the glove com- partment comes on when it is opened.

The lid has separate holders for a pen and a note pad.

WARNING

For safety reasons, the glove compartment must always be closed when the vehicle is moving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

153Seats and storage

Compartments in the door trim

Storage compartments are provided in the door trims.

Fig. 127 Door trim with storage compartment

WARNING

The storage compartments in the door trims should only be used to store small objects. Make sure that they are stored safely inside the compart- ment, as they might otherwise impair the protection offered by the side airbags.

Coat hooks

There is a coat hook above each of the rear doors.

Fig. 128 Area above the rear doors: Coat hooks

WARNING

Please make sure that any items of clothing hanging from the coat hooks do not obstruct your view to the rear.

The coat hooks should only be used for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp objects in the pockets.

Do not use clothes hangers to hang up the clothing, as this could in- terfere with the function of the head-protection airbags*.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

154 Seats and storage

Compartments in the front seats*

There is a storage compartment with a lid at the front of each front seat.

Opening

Pull the handle to open the compartment.

Closing

Close the lid and push it in until it engages.

Note The compartments will hold a maximum weight of 1 kg.

155Air conditioning

Air conditioning

2C-Climatronic

Description

The air conditioner is designed to automatically keep the passenger compartment at the temperature you find most comfortable at all times of the year.

Recommended settings:

Set the temperature to 22 C (71 F).

Press the AUTO Fig. 129 button.

The following setting quickly provides a comfortable temperature inside the vehicle. We therefore recommend you do not modify the setting unless you find this temperature uncomfortable or where circumstances require as such.

The air conditioner provides heating and ventilation and also cools and de- humidifies the air inside the vehicle.

The air conditioner is fully automatic and will constantly maintain the tem- perature which has been set. To achieve this, the temperature of the air sup- plied to the interior, the blower speed (volume of air delivery) and the air distribution are regulated automatically. The system also takes solar radia- tion into account and, therefore, no subsequent manual readjustments are required. Therefore, automatic mode page 158 should be used for the comfort of all the passengers in virtually all conditions throughout the year.

Please note the following points:

The humidity of the air is automatically reduced when the system cools the interior of the vehicle. This helps to prevent condensation on the windows.

If the humidity and temperature outside the vehicle are high, condensation can drip off the evaporator in the air cooling system and form a pool under- neath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a leak.

If the outside temperature is low, the blower normally only switches to a higher speed once the coolant has warmed up sufficiently (this does not ap- ply to the defrost setting).

In order to achieve maximum engine power, the air conditioner compressor is temporarily switched off when pulling away from standstill with full throt- tle.

The compressor also switches off if the coolant temperature is excessively high to ensure adequate engine cooling under extreme loads.

Pollution filter

The pollution filter (a combined particulate filter and activated charcoal fil- ter) serves as a barrier against impurities in the outside air, including dust and pollen.

For the air conditioner to work with maximum efficiency, the pollution filter element must be replaced at the intervals specified in the Service Plan.

If the vehicle is driven in areas with a high level of air pollution and the filter is no longer fully effective, it may be necessary to change the filter element more frequently.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

156 Air conditioning

CAUTION If you suspect that the air conditioner system is damaged, switch over to ECON mode to prevent further damage and have the system checked by a specialised workshop.

Repairs to the air conditioner require specialist knowledge and special tools. For this reason, please contact a specialised workshop if the system is not working properly.

Note Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen clear of snow, ice and leaves to ensure unimpaired heating and cooling and to prevent the win- dows misting over.

The air from the outlets flows through the passenger compartment and out through the slots below the rear window. Therefore, do not cover these slots with items of clothing or other objects.

The air conditioner operates most effectively with the windows and the sliding/tilting sunroof* closed. However, if the vehicle has heated up after standing in the sun for some time, the air inside can be cooled more quickly by opening the windows briefly.

157Air conditioning

Controls

This overview will help you become quickly familiar with the controls for the air conditioner.

Fig. 129 Air conditioner controls

The left-hand display shows the temperature selected for the left-hand side and the right-hand display the temperature for the right-hand side.

The functions can be switched on or off by briefly pressing the buttons. The diode on the buttons lights up when the function is enabled.

The grille between buttons and must be kept clear, as the tempera- ture sensors are located behind the grille.

Do not cover the grille.

Do not clean the grille with a vacuum cleaner, as this could damage the temperature sensors located behind the grille.

Button(s) Meaning

Automatic mode

(left and right) Temperature selection for driver and passenger sides

Defrost

Manual air recirculation mode

Switches off air cooling

Switches off air conditioner (instead of )

Automatic air recirculation mode (instead of OFF )

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

158 Air conditioning

Button(s) Meaning

(in the centre) Adjusts blower speed

Air to the windows

Air from the dashboard outlets

Air to the footwells

The , and buttons (which regulate air distribution) can either be selected individually or in combination.

Automatic mode AUTO

Standard setting for all seasons.

Switching on automatic mode

It is possible to select interior temperatures from +18 C (64 F) to +29 C (86 F).

Press the AUTO Fig. 129 button.

The automatic mode maintains a constant temperature inside the vehicle and dehumidifies the air. Air temperature, air delivery and air distribution are regulated automatically to reach the desired interior temperature as quickly as possible, and then to maintain this temperature. The system au- tomatically compensates for any variations in the outside temperature and for the effect of direct sunlight.

The automatic temperature regulation only operates at temperature settings between +18 C and +29 C. If a temperature below +18 C is selected, LO appears on the display. If a temperature is selected which is higher than

+29 C, the display will show HI. In the maximum and minimum settings, the climate control operates continuously with maximum cooling or heating output and the temperature is not regulated automatically. The temperature is not regulated.

Note By keeping the AUTO button on the driver side pressed for several seconds, the temperature of the passenger side can be set to the temperature of the driver side or vice versa. The display indicates the new temperature value.

Selecting the temperature - +

Separate temperatures can be selected for the driver and front passenger sides.

Press the - or + buttons below the displays Fig. 129 until the desired temperature is selected for the driver side or front passenger side.

The currently selected temperature setting is shown in the display above the buttons.

By keeping the AUTO button on the driver side pressed for several seconds, the temperature of the passenger side can be set to the temperature of the driver side or vice versa. The display indicates the new temperature value. The previous temperature setting can be restored by resetting the display on the driver or passenger side as required.

159Air conditioning

Defrosting

The windscreen and side windows are defrosted or demisted as quickly as possible.

To enable this mode, press the Fig. 129 button.

To switch off, press the button again, or select the AUTO but- ton.

The temperature is regulated automatically. The air output is increased to maximum and most of the air comes out of outlets 1 and 2 page 162.

The air recirculation and ECON modes are switched off when the button is pressed.

Air recirculation: manual activation

The air recirculation setting prevents fumes etc. from enter- ing the interior.

Activating air recirculation mode

Press button Fig. 129 .

Deactivating air recirculation mode

Press the button again or

Press the AUTO button or

Press button .

In this setting, the air in the vehicle is constantly recirculated. We recom- mend using the air recirculation mode in the following circumstances:

When driving through a tunnel or in traffic congestions, to prevent ex- haust gas entering the interior of the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not drive for too long with the air recirculation mode enabled because, if the compressor is disconnected, the windscreen may mist up because no fresh air is entering the interior of the vehicle, with the subsequent risk of accidents.

ECON Mode (economy) ECON

ECON mode helps save fuel.

To activate, press the ECON button Fig. 129.

To deactivate, press the ECON button again or select the AUTO

button.

Air cooling is disconnected in ECON mode. The heating and the blower are adjusted automatically. ECON stands for Economy. Disconnecting air cooling (compressor) reduces fuel consumption.

Please note that the interior temperature must not be lower than the outside temperature in ECON mode. The blower does not cool or dehumidify the air in the interior. The windows could therefore mist up.

In diesel vehicles, the auxiliary heater is switched off in ECON mode to save fuel.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

160 Air conditioning

Note If the diode on the ECON button continues to light up when the ECON mode has been switched off (i.e. the air conditioner has been switched on) this is due to a defect in one of the air conditioner components. If a malfunction should occur, please contact a specialised workshop.

Air recirculation: automatic activation*

If the outside air is polluted by diesel and petrol emissions, an air quality sensor in the vehicle will automatically switch on the air recirculation.

Fig. 130 Button for auto- matic air recirculation

Activating air recirculation mode

Press the button Fig. 130.

Deactivating air recirculation mode

Press the button again or

Press the AUTO button or

Press button .

The automatic air recirculation mode should normally be left switched on at all times.

The system is ready to operate approx. 30 seconds after the engine ignition key has been turned. During this initial period, fresh air is fed into the vehi- cle.

If the air purity sensor in the air conditioner detects a certain concentration of fumes in the outside air, the control unit will either pass the incoming air through the pollution filter or automatically switch on the air recirculation. If there is a high concentration of pollution in the outside air, the air condi- tioner automatically switches to air recirculation and the supply of air from the outside is cut off. As soon as the level of pollution decreases, air is fed into the vehicle from the outside again.

The automatic air recirculation operates for a maximum period of 12 mi- nutes. If the windows mist up when the automatic air recirculation is on, press the button immediately.

The automatic air recirculation switches itself off under certain circumstan- ces (for instance if or is selected). In ECON and at temperatures lower than approx. 8 C below zero, the automatic air recirculation mode is limited to 12 seconds.

161Air conditioning

Switching the temperature display from C to F and vice versa

The outside temperature indicator can be switched from C (degrees Celsius) to F (degrees Fahrenheit) and vice versa.

Press and hold the button for air recirculation mode and briefly press the plus button of the left-hand temperature selec- tor Fig. 129.

Switching the air conditioner on/off

Switching the air conditioner off: models with an OFF button

Press the OFF button. The air conditioner is switched off and the supply of air from outside the vehicle is cut off.

Switching the air conditioner off: models with a button

Keep pressing the - button for the blower until the display seg- ment is empty. The air conditioner is switched off and the sup- ply of air from outside the vehicle is cut off.

Switching the air conditioner on: models with an OFF button

Press the OFF button again, or

Press the AUTO button or

Press one of the air distribution buttons , or .

Switching the air conditioner on: models with a button

Press the + button for the blower, or

Press the AUTO button or

Press one of the air distribution buttons , or .

The air conditioner also starts to operate if one of the blower or temperature selector buttons is pressed.

Blower speed - +

The automatically selected blower speed can be reduced or increased manually.

Press the - and + buttons in the centre of the control panel Fig. 129 to set the blower to the desired speed (and regulate the volume of air delivery).

The air conditioner system automatically regulates the blower speed accord- ing to the interior temperature. However, you can also adjust the air delivery manually. The current blower setting is illustrated by a bar in the middle dis- play (above the buttons).

Automatic change of passenger temperature

In order to automatically set the passenger temperature like the driver tem- perature, press the AUTO button on the driver side for 2 seconds approxi- mately. In order to automatically set the driver temperature like the passen- ger temperature, press the AUTO button on the passenger side for 2 sec- onds approximately.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

162 Air conditioning

Air outlets

Fig. 131 Dash panel: Location of air outlets

The air outlets Fig. 131 3 and 4 can be operated as follows:

Outlets 3 and 4

The outlets can be opened and closed by turning the left thumbwheels.

The direction of air delivery from the outlets can be varied as re- quired using the adjuster in the centre of each outlet grille. The direction of air flow can be adjusted horizontally and vertically as desired.

The flow of air from the outlets is controlled either automatically or manual- ly, depending on the operating mode selected. All the outlets can provide air that is either heated, unheated or cooled.

The heater outlets for the rear footwells are located under the front seats. They are controlled together with outlets 5 .

Note The cool air provided by the air conditioner is mainly issued from outlets 3

and 4 . To ensure adequate cooling, outlets 3 and 4 should therefore never be closed completely.

Air distribution

The automatically-programmed air distribution can be al- tered manually.

The buttons , and can be operated either separately or in combi- nation. To return to automatically controlled air distribution, switch off the selected functions separately or press the AUTO button

Each of the three buttons has a specific function. The numbers relate to the air outlets Fig. 131.

163Air conditioning

Air directed to windows

This setting directs all the air to outlets 1 and 2. Unlike in setting , the volume of air delivery remains the same.

Air to the driver/front passenger

All the air comes from outlets 3 and 4 in the dash panel and from the rear of the centre console.

Air to the footwells

Most of the air emerges from outlets 5 and the outlets under the front seats. Some of the air will also be issued from outlets 3 and 4.

Note In all of the above air distribution settings, a small amount of air will still come from the other outlets.

Economical use of the air conditioner

Economical use of the air conditioner will help save fuel.

Engine power is reduced and fuel consumption increases when the air conditioner is in cooling mode. To ensure that the system is on- ly switched on when it is really necessary, please note the follow- ing points:

Select ECON mode if you wish to save fuel.

Select ECON mode if you decide to open the windows or sun- roof* while driving.

If the vehicle has heated up after standing in the sun, open the windows and doors for a short time to cool the vehicle.

For the sake of the environment By saving fuel you also reduce the amount of pollutants emitted from your vehicle.

Key settings

When the ignition is switched on, the air conditioner set- tings assigned to the key are selected automatically.

The air conditioner settings selected are automatically stored and assigned to the key in use. When the vehicle is started, the air conditioner automati- cally selects the settings assigned to the key. Hence, every driver automati- cally obtains his/her preferred settings without having to select them man- ually.

Note Should another driver use the key and enter other settings, the previous settings will be deleted.

Solar-powered blower/sunroof*

If the vehicle is parked in sufficiently strong sunlight, the blower will operate in solar-powered mode when the igni- tion is switched off.

After the ignition is switched off, the blower is supplied with electrical pow- er from the sunroof. Please ensure that outlets 3 and 4 are open Fig. 131 to ensure the best possible ventilation.

The blower only works when the sunroof is closed or tilted open at the rear.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

164 Air conditioning

If the air recirculation mode is on when you switch off the engine, the air conditioner will automatically switch to fresh air ventilation.

Auxiliary heater*

Diesel vehicles are fitted with an auxiliary heater1) to raise the temperature of the interior as quickly as possible. At outdoor temperatures below +5 C and with the engine running, the supplementary heating will switch on and off automatically depending on the temperature of the coolant.

In order to save fuel, the auxiliary heater can be can be switched off by brief- ly pressing the button on the air conditioner.

Seat heating*

The surface and backrest of the front seats can be electrical- ly heated.

Fig. 132 Detailed view of the dash panel: Thumb- wheel controls for seat heating

Turn thumbwheel 1 or 2 Fig. 132 to switch on and adjust the heating on the left or right front seats.

The heating is switched off when the thumbwheel is set to 0. The tempera- ture settings range from 1 to 6.

CAUTION To avoid damaging the heating elements of the seat heating, please do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single point.

1) For Nordic countries only.

165Driving

Driving

Steering

Adjusting the steering wheel position

The height and reach of the steering wheel can be freely ad- justed to suit the driver

Fig. 133 Lever beneath steering column

Push the lever Fig. 133 down .

Move the steering wheel to the desired position.

Then push the lever back up against the steering column until it engages in position.

WARNING

Never adjust the position of the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this could cause an accident.

For safety reasons, the lever must always be securely engaged when the vehicle is moving, so that the position of the steering wheel cannot shift unexpectedly. Otherwise this could cause an accident.

Safety

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

The ESC helps make driving safer in extreme driving condi- tions.

Fig. 134 Detailed view of the centre console: ESC button

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

166 Driving

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) contains the electronic differential lock (EDL) and the traction control system (ASR). The ESC works together with the ABS. If a fault in the ABS occurs, both warning lamps light up, but if the ESC fails, only the ESC warning lamp lights up.

The ESC system is started automatically when the engine is started.

The ESC system is always active and cannot be switched off. The ESC switch only switches the ASR off.

The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin is desirable.

For example:

When driving with snow chains.

When driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces.

When the vehicle is stuck, to rock it backwards and forwards.

Press the button to switch the ASR back on when you no longer need wheel spin.

Situations in which the warning lamp lights

On switching the ignition on, it lights up for about two seconds to carry out a function control.

The warning lamp will start flashing when the vehicle is moving if the ESC or the ASR is activated.

It will light up continuously if there is a fault in the ESC.

WARNING

Do not forget that the Electronic stability control ESC cannot defy the laws of physics. This should be kept in mind, particularly on slippery and wet roads and when towing a trailer.

Always adapt your driving style to suit the condition of the roads and the traffic situation. The greater safety provided by the ESC should not encourage you to run any risks.

Please refer to the corresponding warning notes on ESC in page 188, Intelligent technology.

Ignition lock

Ignition key positions

The ignition key is used to start and stop the engine.

Fig. 135 Ignition key po- sitions

167Driving

Position 1

The ignition key is inserted in this position. To engage the steering wheel lock, take out the key and turn the wheel until you hear the pin engage. You should always engage the steering lock when you leave the vehicle. This will help to deter thefts .

Switching on the ignition/pre-heating glow plugs 2

If the key is difficult to turn in the lock, move the steering wheel (to take the load off the steering lock mechanism) until the key turns freely. In the case of vehicles with a diesel engine, the key is turned to this position to preheat the glow plugs.

Starting the engine 3

The engine is started in this position. Electrical components with a high power consumption are switched off temporarily.

After the engine has started, the ignition key returns to position 2 by itself.

The ignition key has to be turned back to position 1 before re-starting the engine. The starter inhibitor in the ignition lock prevents the starter motor from engaging when the engine is running, as this could cause damage.

Switching off the ignition 1

Turn the ignition key to this position.

WARNING

Never remove the ignition key until the vehicle is stationary! Other- wise the steering lock could engage suddenly, which could cause an acci- dent.

Always take the key with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only intend to be gone for a short time. This is particularly important if there are children in the vehicle, as they might otherwise be able to start the engine or use power-operated equipment (e.g. the electric windows), which could cause injuries.

Note If the battery has been disconnected and then reconnected, it will be necessary to leave the key in position 2 for about 5 seconds before start- ing the engine.

Vehicles with automatic gearbox: After switching off the ignition, you can only remove the ignition key if the selector lever is in position P (park- ing lock). The selector lever is locked after the ignition key has been re- moved.

Starting and stopping the engine

Starting the engine

The engine can only be started with an original SEAT key.

Fig. 136 Ignition key po- sitions

Vehicles with a petrol engine:

Apply the foot brake.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

168 Driving

Manual gearbox: Push the clutch pedal all the way down.

Move the gear lever into neutral (automatic gearbox: selector lever to P or N) .

Turn the ignition key to position 3 without pressing the accel- erator.

Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts (the start- er motor must not be allowed to run on with the engine).

Vehicles with a diesel engine:

Apply the foot brake.

Manual gearbox: Push the clutch pedal all the way down. Other- wise, the engine will not start.

Move the gear lever into neutral (automatic gearbox: selector lever to P or N) .

Turn the ignition key to position 2 . The pre-heating indicator light comes on while the glow plugs are preheating.

When the indicator light goes out, turn the ignition key to position 3 . Do not press the accelerator.

Having completed the previous action the key can be released immediately, it will return to position 2 and the engine will have started.

When starting a very cold engine, it may be a little noisy for the first few sec- onds until oil pressure has built up in the hydraulic valve compensators. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern.

If the engine fails to start straight away, stop after 10 seconds and try again after about half a minute.

Glow plug system*

To assist starting at low temperatures, diesel engines are equipped with a glow plug preheating system. The preheating time depends on the coolant temperature and the outside temperature. Start the engine as soon as the glow plug indicator light goes out.

When the engine is warm or at outside temperatures above +8 C the glow plug indicator lamp will only light up for about one second. This means that the engine can be started immediately.

If the engine will not start...

page 286

page 290

page 224, Refuelling

WARNING

Never run the engine in confined spaces, as the exhaust gases are poi- sonous.

CAUTION Avoid high engine speeds, full throttle and extreme load conditions until the engine has reached its normal operating temperature, otherwise this can damage the engine.

For the sake of the environment Do not warm up the engine by running the engine with the vehicle station- ary. Start immediately. This will help avoid unnecessary exhaust emissions.

Stopping the engine

Turn the ignition key to position 1 Fig. 136.

169Driving

WARNING

Never switch the engine off until the vehicle is stationary.

The brake servo and the power steering system work only when the engine is running. You need more strength to steer and brake the vehicle when the engine is switched off. Given that you will be unable to steer and brake as usual, this could lead to a risk of accidents and injuries.

CAUTION If the engine has been running under high load for a long time, there is a risk of heat building up in the engine compartment after the engine has been switched off; this could cause engine damage. Therefore, you should let the engine idle for approximately 2 minutes before you switch it off.

Note After the engine is switched off the radiator fan may run on for up to 10 mi- nutes, even if the ignition is switched off. It may also start running again af- ter some time if the coolant temperature rises due to a build-up of heat un- der the bonnet, or if the engine is already warm and the engine compart- ment is heated up further by direct sunlight.

Start-Stop function*

Description and operation

The Start-Stop function stops the engine when the vehicle is stop- ped and starts it automatically when required.

When the vehicle is stopped, put it in neutral and release the clutch pedal. The engine will stop.

When the clutch pedal is pressed, the engine starts again.

The instrument panel display shows information about the sta- tus of the Start-Stop function Fig. 138.

Start-Stop function conditions

The driver seat belt must be buckled.

The bonnet must be closed.

The engine must be at operating temperature.

The steering wheel must not be turned more than 270.

The vehicle must not be on a steep gradient.

The vehicle must not be in reverse.

A trailer must not be connected.

The temperature of the passenger compartment must be within the con- venience limits ( ECON button should not be selected).

The windscreen de-mist function must be off.

Otherwise it requires more than 50% of the airflow that the fan can sup- ply.

The temperature must not be set to HI or LO.

The driver door must be closed.

The diesel particulate filter must not be in regeneration mode, for diesel engines.

The battery charge must not be low for the next start.

The battery temperature must be between -1 C and 60 C.

Start-Stop function interruption

In the following situations, the Start-Stop function will be interrupted and the engine will automatically start:

The vehicle starts moving.

The brake pedal is pressed several times in a row.

The battery has been discharged excessively.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

170 Driving

The Start-Stop System is manually deactivated.

The windscreen de-mist function is turned on.

The temperature of the passenger compartment exceeds the comfort limits (button ECON should not be selected).

If more than 50% of the airflow that the fan can supply is ordered.

Temperature setting HI or LO is selected.

The engine coolant temperature is insufficient.

The alternator is faulty, for example the V-belt has ruptured.

If any of the conditions described in the previous section are not fulfil- led.

WARNING

Never allow the vehicle to move with the engine off for any reason. You could lose control of your vehicle. This could cause an accident and seri- ous injury.

Power steering does not work when the engine is not running. That is why it is much more difficult to turn the steering wheel.

Turn off the Start-Stop system when driving through water (fording streams, etc.).

Note For vehicles with the Start-Stop function and a manual gearbox, when the engine is started, the clutch must be pressed.

When the conditions for the Start-Stop function are not fulfilled, the in- strument panel displays the Start-Stop indicator dimmed.

If the steering wheel is turned more than 270, Stop will not function; however, the angle of steering wheel turn does not affect starting the vehi- cle.

Activating and deactivating the Start-Stop function

Fig. 137 The Start-Stop function button.

Every time the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is au- tomatically switched on.

Manually deactivating the Start-Stop function

Press the Fig. 137 button located on the centre console. When the Start-Stop function is deactivated, the pushbutton in- dicator lights.

If the Start-Stop function is operating then the engine starts im- mediately.

Switching the Start-Stop function on manually

Press the Fig. 137 button located on the centre console. The indicator on the button will go out.

171Driving

Driver messages

Fig. 138 Display on the instrument panel during Start-Stop function oper- ation.

Fig. 139 Display on the instrument panel during Start-Stop function oper- ation.

When the engine is turned off by the Start-Stop function, this is displayed on the instrument panel.

At each stop, the central Start-Stop symbol lights up for about 5 seconds. After this time, it turns off and the symbol on the upper right part of the dis- play remains lit Fig. 139.

Note There are different versions of the dash panel; the display of indications on the screen may differ.

Some indications/symbols of the Start_stop system that appear in the upper part of the display may not be visible in the case of high priority indi- cations (faults, fuel reserve indicator, windscreen washer liquid level, etc.).

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

172 Driving

Warnings

Fig. 140 Driver warnings

Fig. 141 Driver warnings

Start the engine manually. Start-Stop system activated

Start-Stop is not possible.

A

B

Fault or warning with priority over the Start-Stop warnings that appear in the upper part of the display. Some Start-Stop warning in this zone may not be displayed.

Press clutch pedal to start engine warning.

On-screen message and audible warning of the Start-Stop system in the event that a door is opened and seat belt is unfastened in a stop phase.

Handbrake

Handbrake

The handbrake should be applied firmly to prevent the vehi- cle from accidentally rolling away.

Fig. 142 Detailed view of the centre console: Hand- brake on

Applying the handbrake

Pull the handbrake lever up all the way.

C

D

E

173Driving

Releasing the handbrake

Pull the lever up slightly and at the same time press in the re- lease button Fig. 142 (arrow).

Keep the release button pressed and push the lever all the way down .

If you drive by mistake with the handbrake still applied, you will hear a warning buzzer and the display will show the message:

Handbrake on

The handbrake warning switches on after driving for 3 seconds at speeds above 5 km/h.

The handbrake warning lamp lights up when the handbrake is applied with the ignition on.

WARNING

Please note that the handbrake should be released all the way. If the handbrake is only partially released, this will cause the rear brakes to overheat, which can impair the function of the brake system and could lead to an accident.

CAUTION Once the vehicle has come to a standstill, always apply the handbrake firm- ly and then, on a manual gearbox, engage a gear, or select P on an auto- matic.

Parking

The following points will ensure there is no risk of the vehi- cle rolling away accidentally after it is parked:

Use the foot brake to stop the vehicle.

Apply the handbrake firmly.

Switch the ignition off.

On a manual gearbox engage 1st gear or on an automatic move the selector lever to P .

When parking on slopes:

Turn the steering wheel so that the, if the vehicle moves, it will do so to- wards the curb.

WARNING

Do not leave anyone (especially children) in the vehicle when it is locked. Locked doors could delay assistance in an emergency, potentially putting lives at risk.

Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. They could release e.g. the handbrake or gear lever, moving the vehicle and causing an acci- dent.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

174 Driving

Parking aid acoustic system

General notes

Various parking aid systems are available to help you when parking or ma- noeuvring in tight spaces, depending on the equipment fitted on your vehi- cle.

The SEAT Parking System gives an acoustic warning if there are any obsta- cles behind your vehicle page 174.

When you are parking, SEAT Parking System Plus warns you acoustically and optically about obstacles in front of and behind the vehicle page 175.

Note To ensure the acoustic parking aid works properly, the sensors must be kept clean and free of snow and ice.

SEAT Parking System*

SEAT Parking System is an acoustic parking aid.

Sensors are located in the rear bumper. When the sensors detect an obsta- cle, you are alerted by audible warnings. The measuring range of the sen- sors starts at approximately:

Rear Side 0.60 m

Centre 1.60 m

The audible warnings sound with increasing frequency as you approach the obstacle. When the vehicle is less than 0.30 m away from the obstacle, the warning tone will sound continuously. Do not drive on!

The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about 4 seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected obsta- cle (it does not affect the permanent acoustic signal).

The parking aid is switched on automatically when reverse gear is engaged. You will hear a brief confirmation tone.

WARNING

The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver is personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.

The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered. Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid ac- cidents.

Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full use of the rear vision mirrors.

CAUTION Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be registered by the sensors as the vehicle moves closer, so the system will not give any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains, thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be de- tected by the system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.

Note Please refer to the notes on towing page 176.

175Driving

SEAT Parking System Plus*

SEAT Parking System Plus is an acoustic parking aid.

Sensors are located in the front and rear bumpers. When the sensors detect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible warnings. The measuring range of the sensors starts at approximately:

Front Side 0.90 m

Centre 1.20 m

Rear Side 0.60 m

Centre 1.60 m

The audible warnings sound with increasing frequency as you approach the obstacle. When the vehicle is less than 0.30 m from the obstacle the warn- ing tone will sound continuously. Stop moving immediately!

The volume of the warning beeps will be gradually reduced after about 4 seconds if the vehicle remains at a constant distance from a detected obsta- cle (it does not affect the permanent acoustic signal).

Activating/Deactivating

Fig. 143 Centre console: switch for parking aid

Activate

Engage reverse gear or

Press the button on the centre console Fig. 143 or on the gear selector gate. You will hear a brief confirmation tone and the LED on the switch will light up.

Deactivating

Drive forward faster than 10 km/h (6 mph), or

Press the button or

Switch off the ignition or

Disengage the reverse gear.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

176 Driving

WARNING

The parking aid is not a replacement for driver awareness. The driver is personally responsible for safe parking and other manoeuvres.

The sensors have blind spots in which obstacles are not registered. Always look out for small children and animals because the system will not always detect them. Always pay attention when reversing to avoid ac- cidents.

Always keep a close eye on the area around the vehicle and make full use of the rear vision mirrors.

CAUTION Please note that low obstacles detected by the system may no longer be registered by the sensors as the vehicle moves closer, so the system will not give any further warning. Certain kinds of obstacles (such as wire fences, chains, thin painted posts or trailer draw bars, etc) may not always be de- tected by the system, so take care not to damage the vehicle in such cases.

Note Please refer to the notes on towing page 176.

There is a slight delay in the picture display.

Towing bracket*

In towing mode, the rear parking aid sensors are not enabled when you se- lect reverse gear or press the switch . This function may not be guaran- teed on towing brackets that are not factory fitted. This results in the follow- ing restrictions:

SEAT Parking System*

There is no distance warning.

SEAT Parking System Plus*

There is no rear distance warning. The system will still give a warning when obstacles are detected while driving forward.

Fault messages*

If you hear a long beep for a few seconds and the LED on the button* starts flashing when you switch on the parking aid, a system fault has oc- curred. Please have the fault corrected by a Technical Service or specialised workshop.

Note If the fault is not corrected before you switch off the ignition, it will only be indicated by the flashing LED on the switch * the next time you switch on the parking aid.

Cruise speed* (Cruise control system)

Introduction

The cruise control system allows you to maintain a constant speed.

Using this system, any speed over 30 km/h can be kept constant, as long as the engine power allows it. This is subject to power output and braking abil- ity of the engine. This helps to reduce fatigue, especially on long journeys.

The control lamp on the instrument panel lights up when the cruise con- trol system is operating.

177Driving

WARNING

For safety reasons, the cruise control system should not be used in dense traffic or poor road conditions (with ice, slippery surfaces, loose grit or gravel), as this could cause an accident.

CAUTION In vehicles with a manual gearbox: do not go into neutral if the device is en- abled without previously releasing the clutch, as the engine will increase its revs and, under certain conditions, could break down.

Note The cruise control cannot maintain a constant speed when travelling down steep hills. The vehicle tends to accelerate under its own weight. Change down to a lower gear or use the foot brake to slow the vehicle.

Setting the speed

The desired cruising speed has to be stored in the memory.

Fig. 144 Controls for the cruise control system

Drive at the desired speed.

Pull the lever A to position Fig. 144 1 to activate the sys- tem.

Briefly press button B .

When button B is released, the current speed is stored in the memory and the vehicle will then maintain this speed.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

178 Driving

Adjusting the stored speed

The desired cruising speed can be adjusted up or down as required.

Acceleration

Move the lever A up towards Fig. 144 + .

Release the lever to store the current cruising speed.

Deceleration

Move the lever A down towards Fig. 144 - .

Release the lever to store the current cruising speed.

Pressing lever A briefly

You can increase the set speed in steps of 2 km/h by briefly pressing the lever A up towards Fig. 144 + .

You can decrease the set speed in steps of 2 km/h by briefly pressing the lever A down towards Fig. 144 - .

You can also use the accelerator pedal momentarily to increase speed. The previously programmed speed will be automatically resumed when the ac- celerator pedal is released.

However, if the vehicle exceeds the programmed speed by more than 10 km/h for more than 5 minutes, the programmed speed will be deleted. You will then need to enter the speed again.

Deactivating the cruise control temporarily

Fig. 145 Controls for the cruise control system

Press the brake pedal or

The clutch or

Press the lever A Fig. 145 to position a (click stop not en- gaged).

Any intervention of the ASR or the ESC will switch off the cruise control.

The speed stored at this point remains in the memory if the system is only temporarily deactivated.

To resume the programmed cruising speed, release the clutch or brake ped- al and pull the lever A to position b .

If no speed was stored when the system was temporarily disabled, a new speed can be set as follows: drive at the desired cruising speed and briefly press button Fig. 144 B (SET).

179Driving

WARNING

Retrieve the programmed speed only if this is not excessive for the cur- rent traffic conditions. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Deactivating the cruise control

While driving

Move lever A Fig. 144 to position 2 (click stop engaged).

While the vehicle is stationary

Switch the ignition off.

Manual gearbox

Driving with a manual gearbox

Fig. 146 Detailed view of the centre console: gear shift pattern of a 6-speed manual gearbox

Engaging the reverse gear

The vehicle should be stationary with the engine idling. Press the clutch down thoroughly.

Place the gearbox lever into neutral and push the lever down- wards.

Slide the gearbox lever to the left, and then into the reverse po- sition shown on the lever.

The reverse gear can only be engaged when the vehicle is stationary. When the engine is running and before engaging this gear, wait about 6 seconds with the clutch pressed down thoroughly in order to protect the gearbox.

The reverse lights switch on when the reverse gear is selected and the igni- tion is on.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

180 Driving

WARNING

When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch released.

Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident.

Note Do not rest your hand on the gear lever while driving. The pressure of your hand could cause premature wear on the selector forks in the gearbox.

When changing gear, you should always depress the clutch fully to avoid unnecessary wear and damage.

Do not hold the vehicle on the clutch on hills. This causes premature wear and damage to the clutch.

Do not leave your foot on the clutch pedal; although the pressure may seem insignificant, it can cause the premature wear of the clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you do not need to change gear.

Automatic gearbox*

Introduction

multitronic, tiptronic (7-speed gearbox)

Vehicles with multitronic gearbox

The vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled continuously varia- ble transmission (multitronic). Unlike conventional automatics, the gear ratios are not shifted in fixed steps but continuously variable. This gives smoother transmission and makes for better fuel economy.

The gearbox selects the gear ratio and shifts up or down automatically ac- cording to the gear change programmes stored in the control unit page 184.

If desired, you can also select the gears manually (tiptronic mode) page 185.

Please note that in vehicles with a multitronic gearbox, torque is transmit- ted via a multi-plate clutch, and not via a torque converter as on convention- al automatics. This means that the vehicle will not creep as much as con- ventional automatics when the engine is idling if you stop temporarily with the selector lever in position D, S or R.

Vehicles with tiptronic gearbox

The vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled 7-speed automatic gearbox. The gearbox changes up and down automatically.

If desired, you can also select the gears manually (tiptronic mode) page 185.

181Driving

Driving instructions

The gears are changed automatically.

Fig. 147 Detailed view of the centre console: Se- lector lever with lock but- ton

Starting the vehicle

Press and hold the brake pedal.

Press and hold the interlock button (the button on the selector lever handle), move the selector lever to the required position, for instance D, and release the interlock button.

Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a slight movement can be felt).

Release the brake and press the accelerator .

Stopping briefly

Apply the foot brake to hold the vehicle when stationary (for in- stance at traffic lights).

To prevent the vehicle from rolling away, apply the parking brake before moving off on steep gradients .

Parking

Press and hold the brake pedal .

Apply the parking brake.

Press and hold the interlock button, move the selector lever to P and release the interlock button.

The engine can only be started when the selector lever is at P or N.

On level ground it is sufficient to move the selector lever to position P. On slopes, first engage the parking brake and then put the selection lever into the P position. This avoids overloading the locking mechanism and it will be easier to move the selector lever from position P.

Vehicles with multitronic gearbox: Your vehicle is equipped with the hill hold assist function which makes it easier to start off on a slope. The sys- tem is activated when you press and hold the brake pedal for a few sec- onds. When you release the brake pedal the braking force will be main- tained for a short moment in order to prevent the vehicle rolling back when you drive away.

WARNING

While you are selecting a gear and the vehicle is stopped with the en- gine running, do not accelerate. Failure to do so could result in an acci- dent.

Please note that some power will still be transmitted when you stop temporarily with the selector lever in position D, S or R. Therefore, when stopping you will need to press the brake with the force required to hold the vehicle still. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving, as this could cause an accident.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

182 Driving

Selector lever positions

This section covers all the selector lever positions.

Fig. 148 Display: Selec- tor lever positions

The current selector lever position is shown on the instrument panel dis- play.

P - parking lock

This locks the driving wheels mechanically. The parking brake should only be used when the vehicle is already stopped .

The interlock button (the button on the selector lever handle) must be pressed in and the brake pedal must be depressed before moving the selec- tor lever either in or out of position P. This is only possible when the ignition is on.

R - Reverse gear

When reverse gear is engaged the gearbox automatically selects the lowest gear ratio.

The reverse gear may be engaged only when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is idling .

To move the selector lever to position R, press in the interlock button and at the same time press the brake pedal. Depending on the model, one or two reverse lights will come on in selector lever position R (when ignition is switched on).

N - Neutral (idling)

In this position the gearbox is in neutral .

D - Drive (forward)

In this position, the gearbox selects the optimal transmission ratio depend- ing on the engine load, speed and the dynamic gear regulation programme (DRP).

Press the brake pedal when moving the selector lever from N to D if the ve- hicle is stationary or at speeds below 5 km/h .

Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driving in mountains or towing a trailer or caravan) it can be advantageous to switch temporarily to tiptronic mode page 185, so that the gear ratios can be selected manually to suit the driving conditions.

S - Sport position

To drive in sports mode, select the position S. The engine power reserve is used to its maximum. When accelerating the gear shifts will be noticeable.

Press the brake pedal when moving the selector lever from N to S if the vehi- cle is stationary or at speeds below 5 km/h .

WARNING

Never move the selector lever to R or P when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

In selector position D or S the vehicle must always be held with the foot brake when the engine is running. This is because an automatic gearbox still transmits power even at idling speed, and the vehicle tends

183Driving

WARNING (Continued)

to creep. The throttle must on no account be opened inadvertently (for instance by hand from the engine compartment) when a gear is engaged with the vehicle stationary. The vehicle could otherwise start moving im- mediately (in some cases even if the parking brake is engaged) and pos- sibly cause an accident.

To avoid accidents, apply the parking brake and put the selector lever in position P before opening the bonnet and working on the vehicle with the engine running. Please always observe the important safety warn- ings page 227, Work in the engine compartment.

Note Applies to vehicles with tiptronic gearbox:

If the lever is moved accidentally to N when driving, release the accelera- tor and let the engine speed drop to idling before selecting D or S again.

For the sake of fuel economy (and the environment), the gearbox ratios on some models are designed so that maximum speed is only obtained when the gear lever is in position S.

Selector lever lock

The selector lever lock prevents gears from being engaged inadvertently, so that the vehicle is not set in motion unin- tentionally.

Fig. 149 Selector lever lock

The selector lever lock is released as follows:

Switch the ignition on.

Press the brake pedal and at the same time press in the inter- lock button.

Automatic selector lever lock

With the ignition turned on, the selector lever is locked in the positions P and N. To remove it from these positions, press on the brake. The following message appears in the instrument panel as a reminder for the driver when the selector lever is in position P or N:

WHEN STATIONARY APPLY FOOTBRAKE WHILE SELECTING GEAR

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

184 Driving

The selector lever lock only works if the vehicle is stationary or driving at speeds up to 5 km/h (3 mph). At higher speeds the selector lever lock in the N position is disengaged automatically.

The selector lever lock is not engaged if the selector lever is moved quickly through position N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This makes it possible, for instance, to rock the vehicle backwards and forwards if it is stuck in snow or mud. The selector lever lock engages automatically if the brake pedal is not depressed and the lever is in position N for more than about a second.

Interlock button

The interlock button on the selector lever handle prevents the driver from inadvertently engaging certain gears. Press the button in to disengage the selector lever lock. The selector lever positions in which the interlock button has to be pressed are shown in the illustration, highlighted in colour Fig. 149.

Safety interlock for ignition key

Once the ignition has been turned off, the key may be removed only if the gear selector is in position P. While the key is not in the ignition, the selec- tor lever is locked in position P.

Kick-down feature

This feature allows maximum acceleration.

Vehicles with multitronic gearbox

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down past the point of resist- ance at full throttle, the gearbox will select a lower gear ratio, depending on road speed and engine speed. While you keep the accelerator depressed the engine speed is automatically controlled to give your vehicle maximum acceleration.

Vehicles with tiptronic gearbox

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down past the point of resist- ance at full throttle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower gear, depending on road speed and engine speed. The upshift to the next higher gear is de- layed until the engine reaches maximum rpm.

WARNING

Please note that if the road surface is slippery or wet, the kick-down fea- ture could cause the driving wheels to spin, which could result in skid- ding.

Dynamic gear control programme (DCP)

The automatic gearbox is controlled electronically.

The vehicle is equipped with an electronically controlled gearbox. The gear ratios are selected automatically according to preset gearshift programmes.

When you drive at moderate speeds the gearbox will select the most eco- nomical shift programme. It will then change up early and delay the down- shifts to give better fuel economy.

If you drive at higher speeds with heavy acceleration, if you open the throt- tle quickly, or if you use the kick-down or the vehicle's maximum speed, the gearbox will automatically select the sport programme.

The gearbox is self-adapting, and continuously selects the most suitable shift programme. At the same time, the driver can also make the gearbox switch to the sport programme by pressing the accelerator quickly. This makes the gearbox shift down into a lower gear ratio, allowing a more rapid acceleration (for instance to pass another vehicle), without having to press the accelerator all the way down into the kick-down position. After the gear- box has shifted back up it returns to the original programme, depending on your style of driving.

185Driving

Vehicles with multitronic gearbox: the gearbox continuously adapts the gear ratios to gradients. If the brake pedal is pressed on a downhill gradient the gearbox automatically shifts to a lower gear ratio. This increases the en- gine braking effect.

Vehicles with tiptronic gearbox: in mountainous areas, the gearbox adapts the gears for uphill and downhill gradients. This helps to avoid constant gear changes on uphill gradients.

Manual gear selection (tiptronic mode)

With the manual shift programme (tiptronic) the driver can manually select pre-programmed gears.

Fig. 150 Centre console: Manual gear selection (tiptronic mode)

Fig. 151 Display: Man- ual gear selection (tip- tronic mode)

Switching over to the manual programme

Move the selector lever from the position D to the right-hand side. As soon as the selector lever has entered the tiptronic rail, the gear engaged is displayed on the screen.

Shifting up a gear

Briefly push the selector lever forwards (in the tiptronic gate) Fig. 150 + .

Shifting down a gear

Briefly pull the selector lever backwards (in the tiptronic gate) - .

With the tiptronic system, the driver can manually choose between eight (in vehicles with multitronic) or seven (in vehicles with tiptronic) different gear programmes. The manual programme can be selected either with the vehi- cle stationary or on the move.

When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the next gear shortly before the maximum engine speed is reached.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

186 Driving

If you select a gear which is lower than the gear shown on the instrument panel display Fig. 151, the gearbox will only shift down when there is no longer a risk of over-revving the engine.

When the vehicle slows down (for instance when braking), the gearbox au- tomatically shifts down into the next gear when the minimum engine speed is reached.

Changing down to a lower gear increases the engine braking effect on downhill gradients.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed right down past the point of resist- ance at full throttle, the gearbox will select a lower gear ratio, depending on road speed and engine speed.

Back-up programme

A backup programme is in place if a fault should occur in the control system.

The automatic gearbox switches to the back-up programme if a fault should occur in the control system. This is indicated by a gear pinion symbol which lights up on the instrument panel display.

It is still possible to move the selector lever to all positions. The manual shift programme (tiptronic) is not available when the back-up programme is active.

Vehicles with tiptronic gearbox: When the selector lever is in position D or S or in the manual shift programme, the gearbox will remain in 3rd gear if 1st, 2nd or 3rd gears were engaged when the fault occurred. The gearbox will remain in 5th gear if 4th, 5th or 6th gears were engaged. The gearbox will then engage 3rd gear when you drive away from a standstill or after the en- gine is restarted.

It will still be possible to use reverse gear in the normal way. However, the electronic lock for reverse gear will be switched off.

CAUTION Should the gearbox ever switch into the back-up programme, you should take the vehicle to a technical service or specialised workshop as soon as possible.

Steering wheel with paddle levers

The paddle levers on the steering wheel enable the driver to manually select pre-programmed ratios or gears.

Fig. 152 Steering wheel: tiptronic controls

Briefly pull the left-hand paddle lever to change down to a lower gear.

Briefly pull the right-hand paddle lever + to change up to a higher gear.

187Driving

The paddle levers are activated when the selector lever is in position D or S, or the position for the manual shift programme (tiptronic).

The manual shift programme can, of course, still be operated using the gear lever in the centre console.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

188 Intelligent technology

Practical Tips

Intelligent technology

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

General Observations

The Electronic Stability Control increases the vehicle's stabil- ity on the road.

Fig. 153 Centre console with ESC switch

The ESC is designed to increase the degree of control in situations where the vehicle approaches the limits of adhesion, especially when accelerating and cornering. It reduces the risk of skidding and improves stability in all road conditions. The system is active across the entire speed range.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS), the electronic differential lock (EDL) and the traction control system (ASR) are all integrated into the Electronic Stabil- ity Control.

How it works

The ESC control unit processes data from the three integrated systems. It al- so processes additional inputs provided by other high-precision sensors. These register the vehicle's rotation about the vertical axis (yaw rate), later- al acceleration, brake pressure and steering wheel angle.

The system uses the steering wheel angle and road speed to calculate the changes of direction desired by the driver, and constantly compares them with the actual behaviour of the vehicle. If the desired course is not being maintained (for instance, if the vehicle is starting to skid), then the ESC compensates automatically by braking the appropriate wheel.

The forces acting on the braked wheel bring the vehicle back to a stable condition. If the vehicle over swerves (tendency of the rear to leave the road), the brakes will act on the front wheel facing the outside of the bend. If the vehicle under swerves (tendency to leave the bend), the braking force is applied to the rear wheel facing the inside of the bend.

The ESC works in conjunction with the ABS page 189. If a malfunction should occur in the ABS, the ESC will also stop working.

Deactivating

The ESC is activated automatically when the engine is started and performs a self-test routine.

The ESC cannot be deactivated.

189Intelligent technology

WARNING

The ESC is not able to overcome the physical limits of adhesion. Even with ESC, you should always adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. Please bear this in mind, especially on wet or slippery road surfaces. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

ABS prevents the wheels from locking up under braking.

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) is an important part of the vehicle's active safety system. However, the ABS will not necessarily guarantee shorter stopping distances in all conditions. For instance, on loose gravel or fresh snow on top of an icy surface (conditions which anyway require extreme care and reduced speed), the stopping distance with ABS may even be slightly longer.

How the ABS works

The system runs an automatic self-check when the vehicle reaches a road speed of about 6 km/h. This may be accompanied by a noise from the ABS pump.

When one of the wheels is turning very slowly in relation to the road speed and is close to locking up, the system will reduce the brake pressure on that wheel. The driver is made aware of this adjustment process by a vibration of the brake pedal and an audible noise. This is a deliberate warning to the driver that one or more of the wheels is tending to lock up and the ABS con- trol function has intervened. In this situation it is important to keep the brake pedal fully depressed so the ABS can regulate the brake application, but do not pump the brake pedal.

WARNING

The grip provided by ABS is still subject to the physical limits of adhe- sion. Always bear this in mind, especially on wet or slippery roads. If you notice that the ABS is working (to counteract locked wheels under brak- ing), you should reduce speed immediately to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Note If a malfunction should occur in the ABS, this is indicated by a warning lamp page 68.

Brake assist system

The brake assist system helps the driver to achieve optimum braking effect.

The brake assist system helps to increase braking power and thus to ach- ieve a shorter stopping distance. If the driver presses the brake pedal very quickly, the brake assist system automatically boosts the braking force to the maximum level, up to the point where the anti-lock brake function (ABS) intervenes to stop the wheels from locking. You should then keep the brake pedal pressed until the vehicle has braked to the required speed. The brake assist system switches itself off as soon as you release the brake pedal.

The brake assist system will not be operative if there is a malfunction in the ABS or the ESC.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

190 Intelligent technology

WARNING

Please remember that the accident risk always increases if you drive too fast, especially in corners or on a slippery road, or if you follow too close behind the vehicle in front of you. An increased accident risk cannot be compensated even by the brake assist system. Risk of accident.

Electronic differential lock (EDL)

The electronic differential lock prevents the loss of traction caused if one wheel starts spinning.

General notes

The electronic differential lock (EDL) helps the vehicle to start moving, ac- celerate and climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may other- wise be difficult or even impossible.

How it works

The EDL works automatically, without the driver's involvement. With the aid of the ABS sensors, the system monitors the rotational speed of the drive wheels page 189. If a considerable difference in revs is detected (approx. 100 rpm) in the speed of the drive wheels, e.g. when only one part of the surface supporting the wheels is slippery, the system applies the brake to slow down the skidding wheel so that more of the power is directed to the other wheels. The systems works up to a speed of approx. 80 km/h. The system will make noise while it is working.

Starting the vehicle

If one wheel has less grip and starts spinning (for instance, if one of the drive wheels is on ice), keep pressing the accelerator gradually until the ve- hicle starts moving.

Overheating of the brakes

To prevent the brake disk of the braked wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out automatically if subjected to excessive loads. In this case, the vehi- cle will continue to run and will have the same running properties as those of another without EDL.

The EDL will switch on again automatically when the brake has cooled down.

WARNING

When accelerating on a uniformly slippery surface (for instance all four wheels on ice or snow), press the accelerator gradually and careful- ly. Despite EDL, the drive wheels may otherwise start to spin. This could impair the vehicle's stability. Risk of accident.

Even with EDL, you should always adjust your speed to suit the road and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra safety features tempt you into taking any risks when driving. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Note If the ABS warning lamp lights up, this can also mean there is a fault in the EDL. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

Traction control system (ASR)

The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from spinning when the vehicle is accelerating.

General notes

The traction control system (ASR) is one of the functions incorporated in the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

191Intelligent technology

The traction control system (ASR) helps the car to start moving, accelerate and climb a gradient in slippery conditions where this may otherwise be dif- ficult or even impossible.

How it works

The ASR works automatically, i.e. without the driver's involvement. With the aid of the ABS sensors , the ASR monitors the speed of the driven wheels page 189. If the wheels start to spin, the engine speed is reduced auto- matically to match the amount of grip available. The system is active across the entire speed range.

The ASR works in conjunction with the ABS. If a failure occurs in the ABS, the ASR will also stop working.

In general, the ASR should be left switched on at all times. It should only be switched off manually in particular circumstances where a certain amount of wheel slip may be desirable. Examples:

when driving with snow chains

when driving in deep snow or on loose surfaces

when rocking the vehicle backwards and forwards to free it.

The ASR should be switched on again afterwards as soon as possible.

Note To ensure that the ASR works properly, all four wheels must be fitted with identical tyres. The difference in size of the wheels may lead to an unde- sired reduction in engine power. Also see page 248.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

192 Intelligent technology

Brakes

General notes

New brake pads

New brake pads do not provide optimal performance during the first 200 km (250 miles); first they must be run in. However, the reduced braking ca- pacity may be compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little harder. Avoid overloading the brakes during run-in.

Wear

The rate of wear on the brake pads depends a great deal on how you drive and the conditions in which the vehicle is operated. Negative factors are, for instance, city traffic, frequent short trips or hard driving with abrupt starts and stops.

Wet roads or road salt

In certain conditions, such as in heavy rain, or after washing the vehicle or driving through water, the full braking effect can be delayed by moisture (or in winter by ice) on the discs and brake pads. In this case the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also be temporarily reduced if the vehi- cle is driven for some distance without using the brakes when there is a lot of salt on the road in winter. In this case, the layer of salt on the brake discs and pads has to wear off before braking.

Corrosion

There may be a tendency for corrosion to form on the discs and dirt to build up on the brake pads if the vehicle is used infrequently or the brakes are not used very often.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rust has formed on the disks, it is advisable to clean off the pads and disks by braking firmly a few times at a moderately high speed .

Faults in the brake system

If the brake pedal travel should ever increase suddenly, this may mean that one of the two brake circuits has failed. Drive immediately to the nearest specialised workshop and have the fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re- member that you will have to apply more pressure on the brake pedal and allow for longer stopping distances.

Low brake fluid level

Malfunctions can occur in the brake system if the brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluid level is monitored electronically.

WARNING

Apply the brakes heavily to clean the brake system only in a suitable traf- fic situation. Be sure not to inconvenience or endanger other road users. Risk of accident.

CAUTION Never let the brakes drag by leaving your foot on the pedal when it is not necessary to brake. This overheats the brakes, resulting in longer stop- ping distances and greater wear.

Before driving down a long, steep gradient, it is advisable to reduce speed and change to a lower gear (or move the gear lever to a lower gear position if your vehicle has an automatic gearbox). This makes use of en- gine braking and prolongs the useful life of the brakes. If you still have to use the brakes, it is better to brake firmly at intervals than to apply the brakes continuously.

Note If you wish to equip the vehicle with accessories such as a front spoiler or wheel covers, it is important that the flow of air to the front wheels is not obstructed, otherwise the brakes can overheat.

193Intelligent technology

Brake servo

The brake servo assists the driver when braking

The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. The brake servo works only when the engine is running.

WARNING

Ensure the vehicle does not move while in neutral, when the engine is stopped. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Note If the brake servo is not working, e.g. because the vehicle has to be towed or because it is broken, you will have to press the brake pedal considerably harder to make up for the lack of servo assistance.

Power steering

Power steering makes it easier to turn the steering wheel when the engine is running.

Power steering assists the driver by reducing the force needed to turn the steering wheel.

Power steering does not work if the engine is off. In this case the steering wheel requires much more force to turn.

If the steering is held at its turning limit when the vehicle is stationary, this will place an excessive load on the power steering system. Turning the steering wheel to its limit places a load on the system, which causes noise. It will also reduce the idling speed of the engine.

CAUTION When the engine is running, do not turn the steering wheel to its limit for more than 15 seconds. Otherwise, there is a risk of damaging the power steering.

Note If the power steering should fail at any time or the engine is switched off (for instance when being towed), the vehicle can still be steered. However, more effort will be required to turn the steering wheel.

If the system is leaking or malfunctioning, please take the vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

The power steering system requires a special hydraulic fluid. The fluid reservoir is located at the front of the engine compartment on the left page 297. The correct fluid level in the reservoir is important for the pow- er steering to function properly. The hydraulic fluid level is checked at the Inspection Service.

Servotronic*

The servotronic system electronically adjusts the power as- sisted steering.

In vehicles equipped with servotronic power steering the degree of power assistance page 193 is adjusted electronically according to road speed.

If a fault should occur in the servotronic system, the power steering will still operate. The degree of power assistance will, however, no longer adapt to different speeds. If the electronic regulating system is not working properly, this is most noticeable when turning the steering wheel at low speeds (for instance when parking), as more effort will be required than usual. The fault should be corrected by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

194 Driving and the environment

Driving and the environment

Running-in

Running in a new engine

The engine needs to be run in over the first 1,500 km (1000 miles).

Up to 1000 kilometres (600 miles)

Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the maximum speed.

Do not accelerate hard.

Avoid high engine revolutions.

Do not tow a trailer.

From 1000 to 1500 kilometres (600 to 900 miles)

Speeds can be gradually increased to the maximum road speed or maximum permissible engine speed (rpm).

During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is greater than later on, when all the moving parts have bedded in.

For the sake of the environment If the engine is run in gently, its life will be increased and its oil consump- tion reduced.

Braking capacity and braking distance

The braking capacity and braking distance are influenced by driving situations and road conditions.

The efficiency of the brakes depends directly on the brake pad wear. The rate of wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on the conditions under which the vehicle is operated and the way the vehicle is driven. If you often drive in town traffic, drive short distances or have a sporty driving style, we recommend that you have the thickness of your brake pads checked by a Technical Service more frequently than recommended in the Service Plan.

If you drive with wet brakes, for example, after crossing areas of water, in heavy rainfall or even after washing the vehicle, the effect of the brakes is lessened as the brake discs are wet or even frozen (in winter). In this case the brakes should be dried by pressing the brake pedal several times.

WARNING

Longer braking distances and faults in the brake system increase the risk of accidents.

New brake pads must be run in and do not have the correct friction during the first 200 km (120 miles). However, the reduced braking ca- pacity may be compensated by pressing on the brake pedal a little hard- er. This also applies when the brake pads have to be changed further on.

If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving on roads which have been salted, braking power may be lower than normal.

195Driving and the environment

WARNING (Continued)

On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively used, they will overheat. Before driving down a long steep slope, it is advisable to reduce speed and change down into a lower gear or range (depending on the type of transmission). This makes use of engine braking and relieves the brakes.

Never let the brakes drag by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will cause the brakes to overheat and the braking distance will increase. Apply and then release the brakes alternately.

Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking distance is increased considerably when the brake servo is not active.

If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is subjected to heavy use, va- pour bubbles can form in the brake system. This reduces the efficiency of the brakes.

Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. Before purchasing accessories please observe the relevant instructions page 222, Technical modifi- cations.

If a brake system circuit fails, the braking distance will be increased considerably. Contact a specialised workshop immediately and avoid un- necessary journeys.

Exhaust gas purification system

Catalytic converter*

To maintain the useful life of the catalytic converter

Use only unleaded petrol with petrol engines, as lead damages the catalytic converter.

Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.

For engine oil changes, do not replenish with too much engine oil page 231.

Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump leads if necessary page 286.

If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is moving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle inspected at the nearest specialised workshop. In general, the exhaust gas warning lamp will light up when any of the described symptoms occur page 66. If this happens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the en- vironment. The catalytic converter can also be damaged by overheating.

WARNING

The catalytic converter reaches very high temperatures! Risk of fire!

Never park where the catalytic converter could come into contact with dry grass or flammable materials under the vehicle.

Do not apply additional underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust sys- tem. These materials could catch fire when the vehicle is being driven.

CAUTION Never run the fuel tank completely dry because the irregularity of the fuel supply may cause ignition problems. This allows unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system, which could cause overheating and damage the catalytic converter.

For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is working perfectly, there may be a smell of sulphur from the exhaust gas under some conditions. This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel used. Quite often the problem can be solved by changing to another brand of fuel.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

196 Driving and the environment

Diesel engine particulate filter*

The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates soot produced by burning diesel.

The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates most of the soot from the ex- haust gas system. Under normal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. If the driving conditions do not allow the filter to clean itself (for example, multiple short trips) the filter will be obstructed by dust and pollen and the warning lamp for the diesel engine particulate filter will light up. This does not represent a fault, it is a warning that indicates that the filter has not been able to regenerate automatically and that you must carry out a cleaning cycle, as indicated in page 81.

WARNING

The diesel engine particulate filter may reach extremely high temper- atures; the vehicle should be parked so that the exhaust pipe does not come into contact with flammable materials underneath the vehicle. Oth- erwise there is a risk of fire.

CAUTION Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any cir- cumstances refuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage the engine and the fuel system. The addition of biodiesel to diesel by the diesel producer in accordance with standard EN 590 is authorised and will not cause damage to the engine or the fuel system.

Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur content may significantly reduce the useful life of the diesel particulate filter. Your Technical Service will be able to tell you which countries have diesel with a high sulphur content.

Economical and environmentally friendly driving

Economical and environmentally friendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollution and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres depends in large part on your driving style. By adopting an eco- nomical driving style and anticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. Some tips on how to help you reduce pollution while saving money are listed below.

Drive anticipating the traffic situation

A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. When you anticipate the situa- tion, you have to brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear engaged, for example, if you see a red light ahead. The braking effect achieved in this way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are reduced to zero (dis- connection due to inertia).

Change gear early to save energy

An effective way of saving fuel is to change up quickly through the gears. Running the engine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an unnecessary amount of fuel.

Manual gearbox: Change from first to second gear as quickly as possible. We recommend that, whenever possible, you change to a higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Follow the recommended gear indication that ap- pears on the instrument panel page 74.

Avoid driving at high speed

We advise you not to drive at the top speed permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption, exhaust emissions and noise levels all increase very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.

197Driving and the environment

Avoid idling

It is worthwhile switching off the engine when waiting in a traffic jam, at lev- el crossings or at traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is greater than the amount of fuel needed to restart the engine.

The engine takes a long time to warm up when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollutant emissions are also especially high during this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best to drive off immediately after starting the engine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Periodic maintenance

Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, before beginning a journey, you will not consume more than the required amount of fuel. A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi- mum reliability and an enhanced resale value.

A badly serviced engine can consume up to 10% more fuel than necessary.

Avoid short journeys

To reduce the consumption and emission of polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the exhaust gas filtration systems should reach the optimum operating temperature.

With the engine cold, fuel consumption is proportionally higher. The engine does not warm up and fuel consumption does not normalise until having driven approximately four kilometres (2.5 miles). This is why we recommend avoiding short trips whenever possible.

Maintain the correct tyre pressures

Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an adequate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pressure is just one bar too low, fuel consumption can increase by as much as 5%. Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-inflation also increases tyre wear and impairs handling.

The tyre pressures should always be checked when the tyres are cold.

Do not use winter tyres all year round as they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid unnecessary weight

Given that every kilo of extra weight will increase the fuel consumption, it is advisable to always check the luggage compartment to make sure that no unnecessary loads are being transported.

A roof rack is often left in place for the sake of convenience, even when it is no longer needed. At a speed of 100-120 km/h (60-75 mph) your vehicle will use about 12% more fuel as a result of the extra wind resistance caused by the roof rack even when it is not in use.

Save electricity

The engine activates the alternator, which produces electricity. With the need for electricity, fuel consumption is also increased. Because of this, al- ways turn off electrical components when you do not need them. Examples of components that use a lot of electricity are: the fan at high speeds, the rear window heating or the seat heaters*.

Note If you vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not recommended to switch this func- tion off.

It is recommended to close the windows when driving at more than 60 km/h (40 mph)

Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, as the pressure can make the plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can burn the clutch plate lining, causing a serious fault.

Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch, use the foot brake or hand brake, using the latter to start. The fuel consumption will be lower and you will prevent the clutch plate from being damaged.

On descents, use the engine brake, changing to the gear that is more suitable for the slope. The fuel consumption will be lower and the brakes will not suffer.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

198 Driving and the environment

Environmental friendliness

Environmental protection is a top priority in the design, choice of materials and manufacture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage recycling

Joints and connections designed for easy dismantling

Modular construction to facilitate dismantling

Increased use of single-grade materials

Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and ISO 1629

Choice of materials

Use of recycled materials.

Use of compatible plastics in the same part if its components are not easily separated.

Use of recycled materials and/or materials originating from renewable sources.

Reduction of volatile components, including odour, in plastic materials.

Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods

Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the protective wax for cavities.

Use of plastic film as protection during vehicle transport.

Use of solvent-free adhesives.

Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling systems.

Recycling and energy recovery of residues (RDF).

Improvement in the quality of waste water.

Use of systems for the recovery of residual heat (thermal recovery, en- thalpy wheels, etc.).

The use of water-soluble paints

Driving abroad

Observations

To drive abroad, the following must be taken into consideration:

For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter ensure that unleaded petrol is available for the journey. See the chapter Refuelling. Automobile organ- isations will have information about service station networks selling unlea- ded fuel.

In some countries, it is possible that your vehicle model is not sold, and therefore spare parts are not available or the Technical Services can only carry out limited repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will gladly provide information about the technical preparations that you vehicle requires and also about necessary maintenance and repair possibilities.

Adhesive strips for headlights

If you have to drive a right-hand drive vehicle in a left-hand drive country, or vice versa, the asymmetric dipped beam headlights will dazzle oncoming traffic.

To prevent dazzling, you must apply stickers to certain parts of the head- light lenses. Further information is available at your Technical Service.

199Driving and the environment

In vehicles with adaptive headlights, the rotation system must previously be disconnected. To do this, please go to a specialised workshop.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

200 Trailer towing

Trailer towing

Trailer towing

Technical requirements

The towing bracket must meet certain technical require- ments.

Your vehicle is intended mainly for transporting passengers and luggage. However, if suitably equipped, it can also be used to tow a trailer or cara- van.

If your vehicle has been factory-supplied with a towing bracket, all of the necessary technical and legal aspects for trailing towing have been taking into account during manufacturing.

Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole socket for the electrical connection be- tween the trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer has a 7-pole connector you can use an adapter cable. This can be purchased at a Technical Service.

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be done according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer page 208.

WARNING

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the installation should be carried out by a specialised workshop.

Particularly in high outdoor temperatures, it is not possible to drive up long steep gradients without a suitable cooling system. The engine would heat up.

Incorrect installation can result in a safety risk!

Notes on towing

There are a number of points which need to be checked be- fore towing a trailer or caravan.

Observe the maximum permitted trailer weights page 297.

Trailer weight

Never exceed the maximum permitted trailer weight.

If you do not load the trailer up to the maximum permitted trailer weight, you can then climb correspondingly steeper gradients.

The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and therefore the vehicle's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced air density. The maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer must be reduced by about 10% for every subsequent 1000 m (or part thereof). This figure refers to the combined weight of the (loaded) vehicle and (loaded) trailer.

The figures for the drawbar load that appear on the identification plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The correct figures for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures for the towing bracket, are given in the registration documents and on page 290. Also refer to page 297.

Distributing the load

Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as possible. Loads carried in the trailer must be secured to prevent them mov- ing.

201Trailer towing

Where possible, operate the trailer with the maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed the specified limit.

Tyre pressure

Check the tyre pressures on your vehicle, and adjust for full load condi- tions (refer to the sticker listing the tyre pressures on the door pillar). It may also be necessary to adjust the tyre pressures on the trailer according to the recommendations of the trailer manufacturer.

Exterior mirrors

Check whether you can see enough of the road behind the trailer with the standard mirrors. If this is not the case you should have additional mirrors fitted. The two exterior mirrors should be fitted on folding arms. Adjust the mirrors to give sufficient rear vision.

Headlights

Before starting a journey, check the headlight beam settings with the trailer hitched up. If necessary, alter the height of the headlight beams by means of the headlight range control. See page 119.

Power supply

When you remove the ignition key, the power supply to the trailer is inter- rupted.

Removable ball joint coupling

Vehicles with a factory-fitted towing bracket are equipped with a removable ball joint coupling. This is stored in the spare wheel well in the luggage compartment together with the necessary fitting instructions.

Note If you frequently tow, we recommend you also have the vehicle serviced be- tween services.

Notes on towing

Towing a trailer involves additional attention by the driver.

Weight distribution

The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable. However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra slow to allow for the unbalanced weight distribution.

Speed

The stability of the vehicle and trailer is reduced with increasing speed. Therefore, it is advisable not to drive at the maximum permissible speed in unfavourable road, weather or wind conditions. This especially applies when driving downhill.

You should always reduce speed immediately if the trailer shows the slight- est sign of swaying. Never try to stabilise the trailer by accelerating.

Anticipate hazards and brake in good time. If towing a trailer with an inertia brake, first brake gently and then harder. This will prevent brake tapping by the trailer wheels when they lock. Select a low gear in due course before go- ing down a steep downhill. This enables you to use the engine braking to slow down the vehicle.

Swaying and pitching can be reduced by stabiliser aids. We recommend having stabiliser aids installed when towing trailers with a high trailer weight. They can be purchased and installed at a Technical Service.

Reheating

When climbing long hills in hot weather with the engine running fast in low gear, you should keep an eye on the coolant temperature gauge page 60. Reduce speed immediately if the needle moves to the right end of the scale. If the temperature warning lamp in the instrument panel should start flashing, stop the vehicle and let the engine cool down by running it at idling speed for a few minutes.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

202 Trailer towing

Equipment and accessories

Before mounting equipment and accessories (e.g. bicycle rack) please observe the following notes.

Fig. 154 Load distribu- tion of equipment and ac- cessories

The equipment/accessories mounted must not protrude more than 700 mm from the ball joint 1 .

The total weight (mounted equipment plus the load) must not exceed 75 kg.

The maximum load depends on where the centre of gravity lies.

The maximum weight decreases as the distance between the centre of grav- ity and the ball joint 1 increases.

The following limits apply:

If the distance is 300 mm, the total weight (incl. the equipment mounted) A must not exceed 75 kg.

If the distance is 600 mm, the total weight (incl. the equipment mounted) B must not exceed 35 kg.

Only bicycle racks for a maximum of three bicycles may be used.

Equipment and accessories mounted on the towing bracket

SEAT recommends that you only mount equipment (e.g. bicycle rack) on the towing bracket which has been officially approved.. If you wish to attach other equipment please make sure that it has been approved by the manu- facturer for use on the towing bracket. If you mount unsuitable equipment, this can cause damage to the towing bracket. In an extreme case, damage to the towing bracket could cause it to break .

WARNING

If you wish to mount equipment which has not been approved by SEAT, please ensure that it is suitable for use on SEAT vehicles.

Use of unsuitable equipment can result in severe damage to the tow- ing bracket. The towing bracket could then break while pulling a trailer and cause an accident.

Never use tools of any kind when fitting and removing the ball joint. This would damage the locking device, no longer guaranteeing the cor- rect working order of the bracket. This could lead to an accident.

203Trailer towing

Removable towing bracket

Introduction

Special care is required when fitting and removing the tow- ing bracket.

Fig. 155 Luggage com- partment: Spare wheel with towing bracket

The removable ball joint attachment for the towing bracket is stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.

Vehicles with a spare wheel Fig. 155.

The ball joint can be fitted and removed by hand.

Accessories mounted on the towing bracket

Please note that the ball joint attachment can be damaged by using unsuit- able equipment that is mounted onto the towing bracket (e.g. bicycle rack). Due to the material construction, such damage to the towing bracket dra- matically increases safety risks and in extreme cases could lead to breakage of the towing bracket while towing .

Therefore, before buying such equipment, ensure that it is suitable for mounting onto the vehicle's towing bracket and that it is approved for this purpose. To prevent damage to the ball joint from unsuitable equipment, we recommend that equipment for the towing bracket be purchased through your SEAT Dealership. Also see page 222.

WARNING

Only mount equipment on the towing bracket of your vehicle if you are certain it will not damage the bracket. Use of unsuitable equipment can result in severe damage to the towing bracket. The towing bracket could then break while pulling a trailer and cause an accident.

Never use tools of any kind when fitting and removing the ball joint. This would damage the locking device, no longer guaranteeing the cor- rect working order of the bracket. This could lead to an accident.

Note Do not attempt to modify or repair the ball joint or other towing bracket components.

Should you have any difficulties when using the towing bracket, or sus- pect that it is not fitted properly, contact a specialised workshop.

Before setting off, always check that the ball joint is secured properly page 206.

Never disengage the ball joint with the caravan / trailer still hitched or with a bicycle rack or similar accessory still attached.

It is advisable to remove the ball joint when you are not towing a trailer. Make sure that the cover piece is properly fitted on the mounting fixture on the vehicle.

Remove the ball joint before washing the vehicle with pressurised steam equipment. Make sure the cover piece is fitted correctly onto the mounting fixture.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

204 Trailer towing

Fitting the ball joint (step 1)

Fig. 156 Rear bumper: Open the cover piece

Remove the cover piece 2 Fig. 156 on the mounting fixture 1 below the bumper as far as it will go. The cover piece is held

automatically in the open position.

Make sure the mounting fixture is clean. If not, clean it .

Cont page 204, Fitting the ball joint (step 2).

WARNING

It is important to keep the mounting fixture clean. Otherwise the ball joint may fail to engage safely and securely. This could lead to an acci- dent.

Fitting the ball joint (step 2)

Fig. 157 Removable tow- ing bracket: Ball joint

Fig. 158 Removable tow- ing bracket: Ball joint

Make sure the ball joint is clean and undamaged

Check the locking pin A , release pin B , shaft section C and knob D Fig. 157 on the ball joint to make sure they are clean and undamaged.

205Trailer towing

The spring mechanism inside the ball joint must be in the ready position

Check that the red marking A Fig. 158 on the knob is inside the black zone marked on the ball joint.

Check that the locking pin B is inside the holes in the shaft section of the ball joint.

Check that the knob protrudes visibly from the ball joint, so that there is a clear gap C between the knob and the ball joint.

The ball joint can only be installed if the internal spring mechanism is in the ready position.

Cont page 205, Fitting the ball joint (step 3).

Fitting the ball joint (step 3)

Fig. 159 Removable tow- ing bracket: Setting the spring mechanism to the "ready" position

Fig. 160 Removable tow- ing bracket: Inserting the ball joint

Setting the spring mechanism to the ready position (if required)

Insert the key 1 Fig. 159 in the lock on the knob and turn it towards the red marking.

Pull out the knob in direction A , hold and turn in direction B

until the locking pin 2 engages and the release pin 3 moves out visibly .

Inserting the ball joint

With the spring mechanism in the ready position, insert the ball joint into the mounting fixture and push it upwards Fig. 160 in the direction indicated (arrow) . It should lock into posi- tion automatically. You should now clearly hear it click into place.

Lock the ball joint by turning the key to the green marking.

Remove the key.

Cont page 206, Fitting the ball joint (step 4).

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

206 Trailer towing

WARNING

If it is not possible to set the spring mechanism to the ready position as described above, do not use the ball joint. Please contact a special- ised workshop.

To avoid injury, keep your hands away from the knob or cover piece when inserting the ball joint in the mounting fixture. Otherwise, you could be injured.

Fitting the ball joint (step 4)

Fig. 161 Removable tow- ing bracket: Safety check

Fig. 162 Rear bumper: Pulling down the power socket

Safety check

Check that the green marking A Fig. 161 on the knob is in- side the black zone marked on the ball joint.

Check that the knob is directly against the ball joint, so that there is no gap between the knob and the ball joint (arrow).

Check that the ball joint is locked and the key is removed so that the knob cannot be pulled out .

Check that the ball joint fits tightly in the mounting fixture (try moving it about to check).

Towing socket

To plug in the electrical connection for the trailer, pull down the socket below the bumper Fig. 162.

If the safety check is not satisfactory, the ball joint must be fitted again properly.

207Trailer towing

WARNING

To avoid accidents, the ball joint must meet all the safety requirements listed in the safety check. The towing bracket must not be used if any one of these requirements is not met. If this is the case, you should contact a specialised workshop.

Removing the ball joint

Fig. 163 Removable tow- ing bracket: Removing the ball joint

Fig. 164 Rear bumper: fitting the cover piece

Insert the key in the lock 1 Fig. 163 on the knob.

Unlock the ball joint by turning the key to the red marking.

Take hold of the ball joint and pull out the knob in direction A .

Keep hold of the knob and turn it as far as it will go in direction B .

Release the knob. The spring mechanism will remain in the ready position .

Pull the ball joint down out of the mounting fixture 1

Fig. 164. The cover piece will cover the mounting fixture auto- matically 2 .

Put away the ball joint attachment under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.

Move the socket back up to its original position.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

208 Trailer towing

WARNING

To avoid injury, keep your hands away from the locking pin and the release pin when releasing the locking mechanism.

Make sure that the cover piece is properly engaged on the mounting fixture on the vehicle. Otherwise the ball joint may fail to engage secure- ly if dirt accumulates in the mounting fixture.

Fitting a towing bracket*

It is possible to fit a towing bracket to the rear of the vehicle.

Fig. 165 Attachment points for towing bracket

If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the vehicle is purchased, this must be completed according to the instructions of the towing bracket manufacturer.

209Trailer towing

The attachment points for the towing bracket A are on the lower part of the vehicle.

The distance between the centre of the ball coupling and the ground should never be lower than the indicated value, even with a fully loaded vehicle and including the maximum drawbar load.

Elevation values for securing the towing bracket:

65 mm (minimum)

403

629 mm

1112 mm (vehicle with max. load)

from 350 to 420 mm (vehicle with max. load)

1000 mm

Fitting a towing bracket

Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort for the vehicle. Therefore, before fitting a towing bracket, please contact a Technical Service to check whether your cooling system needs modification.

The legal requirements in your country must be observed (e.g. the fitting of a separate control lamp).

Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear bumper, must be removed and reinstalled. The towing bracket securing bolts must be tightened using a torque wrench, and a power socket must be connected to the vehicle electri- cal system. This requires specialised knowledge and tools.

Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.

B

C

D

E

F

G

WARNING

The towing brackets should be fitted at a specialised workshop.

If the towing bracket is incorrectly installed, there is a serious danger of accident.

For your own safety, please observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the towing bracket.

CAUTION If the power socket is incorrectly installed, this could cause damage to the vehicle electrical system.

Note For the Sport finish, fitting a trailer bracket is not recommended due to the design of the bumpers.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

210 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

General notes

Regular washing and care help maintain the value of your vehicle.

Vehicle maintenance

Regular care and washing help to maintain the value of the vehicle. This may also be one of the requirements for acknowledging warranty claims in the event of bodywork corrosion or paint defects.

The best way to protect your vehicle against the harmful effects of the envi- ronment is through correct maintenance and frequent washing. The longer substances such as insect remains, bird droppings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial deposits, tar, soot or road salt and other aggressive materi- als remain on the vehicle, the more damage they do to the paintwork. High temperatures (for instance in strong sunlight) further intensify the corrosive effect.

After winter, a period when salt is put on the roads, it is important to have the underside of the vehicle washed thoroughly.

Products for vehicle maintenance

Car-care products are available in your Technical Services. Keep the product instructions until you have used them up.

WARNING

Car-care products can be toxic. Because of this, they must always be kept closed in their original container. Keep them out of the reach of chil- dren. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

Always read and observe the instructions and warnings on the pack- age before using car-care products. Improper use could cause health problems or damage the vehicle. The use of certain products may pro- duce noxious vapours; they should be used in well ventilated areas.

Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other volatile fluids. These are toxic and highly flammable. Risk of fire and ex- plosion.

Before washing your vehicle, or carrying out any maintenance, switch the engine off, apply the handbrake firmly and remove the key from the ignition.

CAUTION Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust if the surface of the vehicle is dry. Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could damage the paintwork or the windows of your vehicle. Soak dirt, mud or dust with plenty of water.

For the sake of the environment When purchasing products for your vehicle maintenance, select the ones which are not harmful to the environment.

The waste from car-care products should not be disposed of with ordina- ry household waste. Observe the disposal information on the package.

211Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Care of the vehicle exterior

Automatic car wash tunnel

The vehicle can normally be washed without problem in an automatic car wash.

The vehicle paintwork is so durable that the vehicle can normally be washed without problems in an automatic car wash tunnel. However, the paintwork wear depends to a large extent on the kind of the car wash tunnel, the brushes used, its water filtering and the type of cleaning and preservative products.

Before going through a vehicle wash, be sure to take the usual precautions such as closing the windows and sunroof.

If the vehicle has special accessories such as spoilers or a roof rack or two- way radio aerial, etc., it is advisable to consult the car wash tunnel operator.

After washing, the brakes could take some time to respond as the brake discs and pads could be wet, or even frozen in winter. Dry the brakes by braking several times.

WARNING

Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effectiveness. Risk of accident.

Washing by hand

Vehicle washing

First soften the dirt and rinse it off with water.

Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a soft sponge, a glove or a brush. Use very light pressure.

Rinse the sponge or glove often with clean water.

Special car shampoo should only be used for very stubborn dirt.

Leave the wheels, sill panels etc. until last, using a different sponge or glove.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water.

Dry the vehicle surface gently with a chamois leather.

In cold temperature, dry the rubber seals and their surfaces to prevent them from freezing. Apply silicone spray to the rubber seals.

After washing the vehicle

After washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes by braking several times page 194, Braking capacity and braking distance.

WARNING

Wash your vehicle with the ignition switched off.

Protect your hands and arms from cuts on sharp metal edges when cleaning the underbody, the inside of the wheel housings etc. Risk of in- jury.

Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective- ness. Risk of accident.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

212 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

CAUTION Never remove dirt, mud or dust if the vehicle surface is dry. Never use a dry cloth or sponge for cleaning purposes. This could scratch the paintwork or glass on your vehicle.

Washing the vehicle in low temperatures: when washing the vehicle with a hose, do not direct water into the lock cylinders or the gaps around the doors, rear lid, or sunroof. Risk of freezing.

For the sake of the environment To protect environment, the vehicle should be washed only in specially pro- vided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil-laden waste water entering the sewerage system. In some places, washing vehicles outside wash bays is prohibited.

Note Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.

Washing the vehicle with a high pressure cleaner

Be particularly careful when using a high pressure cleaner!

Always observe the instructions for the high-pressure cleaner, particularly those concerning the pressure and the spraying distance.

Increase the spraying distance for soft materials and painted bumpers.

Do not use a high pressure cleaner to remove ice or snow from windows page 213.

Never use concentrated jet nozzles (rotating jets) .

After washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes by braking several times page 194, Braking capacity and braking distance.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a concentrated jet (rotating nozzle). Even at large spraying distances and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.

Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective- ness. Risk of accident.

CAUTION Do not use water hotter than 60 C. This could damage the car.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, keep a sufficient distance from sensitive materials such as flexible hoses, plastic, soundproofing material, etc. This is also important for bumpers painted in the colour of the bodywork. The closer the nozzle is to the surface, the greater the wear on the material.

Vehicle paint maintenance

Regular waxing protects the paintwork.

You need to apply wax to your vehicle if water does not form small drops and run off the paintwork when it is clean.

Good quality hard wax products are available at your Technical Service.

Regular wax applications help to protect the paintwork from environmental contaminants page 210. It is also effective in protecting against minor scratches.

213Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Even if a wax solution is used regularly in the vehicle washing tunnel, it is advisable to protect the paint with a hard wax coating at least twice a year.

Polishing the paintwork

Polishing brings back gloss to the paintwork.

Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss can- not be brought back by applying wax. Polishing products can be purchased in your Technical Service.

The vehicle must be waxed after polishing if the polish used does not con- tain wax compounds to seal the paint page 212, Vehicle paint mainte- nance.

CAUTION To prevent damage to the paintwork:

Do not use polishes and hard wax on painted parts with a matt finish or on plastic parts.

Do not polish your vehicle in a sandy or dusty environment.

Caring for plastic parts

Solvents damage plastic parts.

If normal washing fails to clean plastic parts, clean them with approved sol- vent-free plastic cleaning and care products.

CAUTION The use of liquid air freshener directly over the air vents of the vehicle may damage the plastic parts if the liquid is accidentally spilled.

Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors

Cleaning windows

Moisten the windows with commercially available, alcohol based glass cleaner.

Dry the windows with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth.

Removing snow

Use a small brush to remove snow from the windows and mir- rors.

Removing ice

Use a de-icer spray.

Use a clean cloth or chamois leather to dry the windows. The chamois leath- ers used on painted surfaces are not suitable to clean windows because they are soiled with wax deposits which could smear the windows.

If possible, use a de-icing spray to remove ice. If you use an ice scraper, push it in one direction only without swinging it.

Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean rubber, oil, grease and silicone deposits off.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

214 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Wax deposits can be removed with a special cleaner available in your Tech- nical Services. Wax deposits on the windscreen could cause the wiper blades to judder. Adding a window cleaner that dissolves wax to the wind- screen washer fluid prevents wiper blades from juddering, but wax deposits are not removed.

CAUTION Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and mirrors. This could cause the glass to crack!

The heating element for the rear window is located on the inner side of the window. To prevent damage, do not put stickers over the heating ele- ments on the inside of the window.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades

Clean wiper blades improve visibility.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the windscreen wiper blades.

2. Use window cleaner to clean the windscreen wiper blades. Use a sponge or a cloth to remove stubborn dirt.

Rubber seals maintenance

If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so quickly.

1. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals.

2. Apply a specialist care product to the rubber seals.

The rubber strips on the doors, windows, bonnet and rear lid will remain pliable and last longer if they are treated with a suitable care product (for example silicone spray).

Caring for rubber seals will also prevent premature ageing and leaks. The doors will be easier to open. If rubber seals are well looked after, they will not freeze so quickly in winter.

Door lock cylinders

The door lock cylinders can freeze up in winter.

To de-ice the lock cylinders you should only use spray with lubricating and anti-corrosive properties.

Cleaning chrome parts

1. Clean chrome parts with a damp cloth.

2. Polish chrome parts with a soft, dry cloth.

If this does not provide satisfying results, use a specialist chrome cleaning product. Chrome cleaning products will remove stains from the surface.

CAUTION To prevent scratching chrome surfaces:

Never use an abrasive cleaning product on chrome.

Do not clean or polish chrome parts in a sandy or dusty environment.

215Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Steel wheel rims

Clean steel wheel rims regularly using a separate sponge.

Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust. Any damage to the paint on steel wheel rims should be repaired before starting to rust.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distan- ces and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.

Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective- ness. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes by braking several times page 194, Braking ca- pacity and braking distance.

Alloy wheel rims

Every two weeks

Wash salt and brake dust from alloy wheels.

Use an acid free detergent to clean the wheel rims.

Every three months

Apply a hard wax compound to the wheels.

Alloy wheels require regular attention to preserve their appearance. If road salt and brake dust are not often removed, the aluminium finish will be im- paired.

Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheel rims.

Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used for maintaining the rims. If the protective coating is damaged, e.g. by flying stones, the dam- aged area should be repaired immediately.

WARNING

Never wash tyres with a cylindrical jet. Even at large spraying distan- ces and short cleaning times, visible and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. This may cause an accident.

Water, ice and salt on the brake system can reduce braking effective- ness. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking. Dry the brakes by braking several times page 194, Braking ca- pacity and braking distance.

Underbody protection

The vehicle underbody is coated to protect it from chemical and mechanical damage.

The protective coating can be damaged when driving. We recommend you to check the protective coating under the body and on the running gear, and reinstated if necessary, before and after the winter season.

We recommend you to go to your Technical Service to carry out repair work and additional anti-corrosion work.

WARNING

Do not apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic converter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. The heat of the exhaust system or the engine could cause them to ignite. Risk of fire.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

216 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Cleaning the engine compartment

Take special care when cleaning the engine compartment.

Anti-corrosion treatment

The engine compartment and the surface of the power unit are given anti- corrosion treatment at the factory.

Good corrosion protection is particularly important in winter when the vehi- cle is frequently driven on salted roads. To prevent the salt corroding the ve- hicle, the entire engine compartment should be thoroughly cleaned before and after winter.

Your Technical Services have got the necessary workshop equipment to pro- vide the correct cleaning and preserving products. For this reason, we rec- ommend having this work performed by them.

The anti-corrosion protection is usually removed if the engine compartment is cleaned with grease removing solutions, or if you have the engine cleaned. On commissioning this work, ensure that all surfaces, seams, joints and components in the engine compartment are given anti-corrosion treatment.

WARNING

When working in the engine compartment, always observe the safety warnings page 227.

Before opening the bonnet, switch the engine off, apply the hand- brake firmly and always remove the key from the ignition.

Allow the engine to cool before you clean the engine compartment.

Do not clean the vehicle underbody, wheel arches or wheel trims without protecting your hands and arms. You may cut yourself on sharp- edged metal parts. Failure to comply could result in injury.

WARNING (Continued)

Moisture, ice and salt on the brake system may affect braking effec- tiveness. Risk of accident. Directly after washing, avoid sudden and sharp braking.

Never touch the radiator fan. It is temperature-controlled and could start automatically, even when the key is removed from the ignition!

For the sake of the environment Fuel, grease and oil deposits could be removed when the engine is washed. The polluted water must be cleaned in an oil separator. For this reason, en- gine washing should be carried out only by a specialised workshop or a pet- rol station.

Vehicle interior maintenance

Introduction

The dye used in many modern garments, for example dark jeans, is not al- ways sufficiently colour-fast. Seat upholstery (material and leather), espe- cially when light-coloured, may visibly discolour if the dye comes out of clothing (even when used correctly). This is not an upholstery defect but in- dicates that the dye in the item of clothing is not sufficiently colour-fast.

The longer stains or dirt remain on the vehicle surfaces, especially the fab- rics covering the padded upholstery, the more difficult it becomes to clean and maintain them. If stains and dirt are left for a long time, it may be that they are impossible to remove.

217Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

WARNING

Car-care products may be toxic and hazardous. Using unsuitable car-care products or, using them in the wrong way, may cause accidents, serious injury, burns or intoxication.

Keep your car-care products in their original containers.

Read the instructions.

Never keep car-care products in empty food containers, bottles or other similar containers. Other people may confuse them.

Keep all car-care products out of the reach of children.

Some products may give off harmful vapours during use. Therefore, they should be used outdoors in well-ventilated places.

Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail-varnish remover or any other volatile product for washing, maintenance or cleaning. These are toxic and highly flammable.

WARNING

Unsuitable maintenance and cleaning of vehicle components may impair proper operation of safety equipment and cause serious injury.

Maintain and clean vehicle components according to the manufactur- er's instructions.

Only use approved or recommended cleaning products.

CAUTION Cleaning products which contain solvents have a corrosive effect and may damage the material irreparably.

Stains and dirt containing aggressive substances or solvents attack the material and may damage it irreparably, even when they are cleaned quick- ly.

Dirt and stains should not be allowed to dry and should be cleaned as quickly as possible.

In the case of stubborn stains, take the vehicle to a specialised work- shop to avoid damage.

Treating your upholstery

Checklist

To treat and maintain your seat upholstery, keep the following in mind :

Before entering the vehicle, close any Velcro fasteners that might snag on the upholstery or trim fabric. Any open Velcro fasteners may damage the trim or upholstery fabrics.

To prevent damage, avoid direct contact between sharp decorative objects and the upholstery and trim fabrics. Decorative objects in- clude zips, rivets and rhinestones on clothing and belts.

From time to time, clean the dust that gathers in the perforations, folds and seams so that the surfaces of the seats are not damaged by its abrasive effect.

Make sure clothes are colour-fast to avoid them running and staining the upholstery. This is especially important if the upholstery is light in colour.

CAUTION If you ignore this checklist, which is important for maintaining your seat up- holstery, the fabric may be damaged or stained.

Consult the checklist and carry out the operations it describes.

Note SEAT recommends you take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to treat any stains on the upholstery caused by the discolouration of clothing.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

218 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

How to clean the upholstery, trim fabrics and Alcantara

Cleaning the fabric on heated seats and electrically adjustable seats or seats with airbag components

It is possible that there are important airbag components and electrical con- nections inside the driver seat, passenger seat and possibly the outer rear seats. If these seats and seat backrests are damaged, or are cleaned and are treated incorrectly, or if they get wet, the vehicle electric system may be destroyed and the airbag system damaged .

Electric and heated seats contain components and electrical connections that may be damaged if the seats are cleaned or incorrectly treated . Similarly, damage might be caused at other points in the vehicle's electric system.

For this reason, bear the following indications in mind for cleaning:

Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaning equipment or cold aerosols.

Do not use cream detergents or detergent-based solutions for delicate garments.

Prevent the fabric from getting wet at all times.

Only use cleaning products approved by SEAT.

If in doubt, take the vehicle to a professional cleaning company.

Cleaning the fabric on unheated seats, non-electrically adjustable seats and seats without airbag components

Before using any cleaning products, consult and keep in mind the in- structions of use, indications and warnings on the container.

Use a vacuum cleaner (with the brush attachment) on the trim and seat fabrics, the Alcantara upholstery of the seats and the carpet.

Do not use high-pressure or steam cleaning equipment or cold aerosols.

For general cleaning, use a soft sponge or an ordinary lint-free microfi- bre cloth .

Clean Alcantara surfaces with a slightly damp cotton or woollen cloth, or a standard lint-free microfibre cloth .

If the dirt on the trim and upholstery fabrics is only superficial, you can use a standard foam cleaner.

If the upholstery and trim are very dirty, before cleaning them we recom- mend you find out about the most suitable cleaning options from a profes- sional cleaning company. If necessary, the cleaning should be carried out by a specialised company.

Stain removal

When removing stains, it may be necessary to clean the whole surface and not just the stain itself. Especially if the surface has been dirtied through normal use. If you only clean the stained area, that part may then look light- er than the rest. If in doubt, take the vehicle to a professional cleaning com- pany.

WARNING

If there is a fault in the airbag system, it is likely that the airbag will not deploy correctly, not deploy at all, or do so unexpectedly, which could cause serious or fatal injuries.

Have the system checked immediately by a specialised workshop.

CAUTION If the upholstery on electrically operated seats or seats with airbag compo- nents gets soaked, the vehicle's electric system and certain other compo- nents may be damaged.

If the seat gets soaked, take the vehicle immediately to a specialised workshop to be dried and for the system components to be inspected.

Do not use steam cleaning equipment as the dirt becomes more encrus- ted and fixed in the material.

High-pressure cleaning equipment and cold aerosols may damage the upholstery.

219Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

CAUTION Brushes should only be used to clean the carpet and floor mats! Other fabrics may be damaged if cleaned with a brush.

If cream detergents or detergents for delicate garments are applied with a damp cloth or sponge, they may, for example, leave rings when dry be- cause of the surfactant components they contain. Generally, such rings are very difficult or almost impossible to remove.

CAUTION Do not let water soak into Alcantara under any circumstances.

Do not use leather cleaning products, solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or similar products on Alcantara.

Never use brushes for cleaning damp material as they could damage the surface.

Cleaning and maintenance of natural leather upholstery

Consult a professional cleaning workshop if you have any doubts on clean- ing and maintaining the leather equipment in your vehicle.

Maintenance and treatment

Nappa natural leather is delicate because it has no additional protective layer.

After cleaning, regularly apply a conditioner with sun-screen and im- pregnating action. These products nourish the leather, soften it and make it more breathable, as well as re-hydrating it. They also provide it with a pro- tective film.

Clean the leather every two or three months and remove stains as they appear.

Treat the leather regularly (about twice a year) with a suitable mainte- nance product.

Apply as few cleaning and maintenance products as possible, always using a dry, lint-free cotton or woollen cloth. Do not apply cleaning and maintenance products directly to the leather.

Remove recent ball-point pen and ink stains, lipstick, shoe cream and similar stains as soon as possible.

Maintain the colour of the leather. To do this, use a special cream espe- cially coloured for leather to achieve the same overall colour, if necessary.

Afterwards, go over it with a soft cloth.

Cleaning the vehicle

SEAT recommends using a slightly damp cotton or woollen cloth for general cleaning purposes.

Generally, the leather should never be soaked at any point, nor should wa- ter penetrate the seams.

Before cleaning the leather upholstery, bear in mind the following recom- mendations page 218, Cleaning the fabric on heated seats and electrical- ly adjustable seats or seats with airbag components.

CAUTION On no account use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or similar materials on leather.

If the stain remains on the leather for long, it will soak in and be impos- sible to remove.

In the event of spilt liquids, dry immediately with an absorbent cloth to prevent the liquid penetrating through the leather or seams.

If the vehicle is left standing in the sun for long periods, the leather should be protected against direct sunlight to prevent it from fading.

Note The leather will usually change colour slightly with use.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

220 Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

Cleaning synthetic leather upholstery

Before cleaning the synthetic leather upholstery, bear in mind the following recommendations page 218, Cleaning the fabric on heated seats and electrically adjustable seats or seats with airbag components

Only use water and neutral cleaning products to clean synthetic leather up- holstery.

CAUTION Do not use solvents, floor wax, shoe cream, stain removers or similar prod- ucts on synthetic leather. These will stiffen the material, causing it to crack prematurely.

Plastic parts and dash panel cleaning

Use a clean, damp cloth to clean plastic parts and the dash panel.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special sol- vent-free plastic cleaning product.

WARNING

Never clean the dash panel and the airbag module surface with cleaners containing solvents. Solvents cause the surface to become porous. If the airbag triggered, plastic parts could become detached and cause inju- ries.

CAUTION Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Wooden trim cleaning*

Clean the wooden trim with a water-moistened clean cloth.

If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a gentle soap solution.

CAUTION Cleaning products which contain solvents will damage the material.

Cleaning the radio and climate controls

To clean the radio and/or climate controls, use a soft damp cloth. For more resistant dirt, a neutral soap solution may be used.

Seat belt cleaning

A dirty belt may not work properly.

Check all seat belts regularly and keep them clean.

Seat belt cleaning

Pull the dirty seat belt right out and unroll it.

Clean dirty seat belts with a gentle soap solution.

Allow it to dry.

Do not roll the seat belt up until it is dry.

221Vehicle maintenance and cleaning

If large stains form on the belts, it will not retract correctly into the automat- ic belt retractor.

WARNING

Do not use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts, as this can im- pair the strength of the webbing. Ensure that seat belts do not come into contact with corrosive fluids.

Check the condition of the seat belts at regular intervals. If you notice that the belt webbing, fittings, retractor mechanism or buckle of any of the belts is damaged, the belt must be replaced by a specialised work- shop.

Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat belt yourself. The seat belts must not be removed or modified in any way.

CAUTION After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry completely before rolling them up. Otherwise, the belt retractors could become damaged.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

222 Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

Accessories and spare parts

Always consult a SEAT dealership before purchasing acces- sories and parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high standard of active and passive safe- ty.

Before purchasing accessories and parts, and before making technical changes to your vehicle, we recommend that you consult your Technical Service.

SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide you with the latest information about the use, legal requirements and recommendations from the manufac- turer regarding accessories and spare parts.

We recommend you use only SEAT Approved Accessories and SEAT Ap- proved Spare Parts. This way, SEAT can guarantee that the product in question is suitable, reliable and safe. SEAT Technical Services have the necessary experience and facilities to ensure that parts are correctly and professionally installed.

Despite a continuous observation of the market, SEAT is not able to assess the reliability, safety and suitability of parts that SEAT has not approved. For this reason, SEAT cannot assume responsibility for any non-genuine parts used, even if these parts have been approved by an official testing agency or are covered by an official approval certificate.

Any equipment subsequently installed which has a direct effect on the driv- er's control of the vehicle (e.g. cruise control system or electronically-con- trolled suspension) must be approved by SEAT and bear the e mark (the Eu- ropean Union's authorisation symbol).

If any additional electrical components are fitted which do not serve to con- trol the vehicle itself (e.g. refrigerator box, laptop or ventilator fan), these must bear the CE mark (European Union manufacturer conformity declara- tion).

WARNING

Accessories, for example telephone holders or cup holders, should never be fitted on the covers, or within the working range, of the airbags. Oth- erwise, there is a danger of injury if the airbag is triggered in an accident.

Technical modifications

Modifications must always be carried out according to our specifications.

Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the vehicle may cause malfunctions. Due to the way the electronic components are linked together in networks, other indirect systems may be affected by the faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of compo- nents, and also invalidate your vehicle registration documents.

SEAT Technical Services cannot be held liable for any damage caused by modifications and/or work incorrectly performed.

For this reason, we recommend having all work performed by a SEAT Techni- cal Service using SEAT Original Spare Parts.

223Accessories, replacement of parts and modifications

WARNING

Any type of work or modification performed incorrectly on your vehicle can lead to malfunctions and can cause accidents.

Mobile phones and two-way radios

First consult your Technical Service if you wish to use a mobile telephone or a two-way radio with a transmitting power output in excess of 10 watts. Here you will receive information concerning the technical possibilities for retrofitting this equipment.

Mobile telephones and two-way radios should be only fitted by a special- ised workshop, for example a SEAT dealership.

WARNING

Always concentrate primarily on driving. If you are distracted while driving you could have an accident.

Never attach the telephone mountings to the surfaces covering the airbag units or within the range of the airbags. There is a high danger of injury if the airbag is triggered.

Note Please observe the operating instructions of your mobile telephone/two- way radio.

Athermic windscreen*

Fig. 166 Location of the electronic toll collection system

Vehicles with an athermic windscreen have an area without athermic treat- ment above the rear view mirror Fig. 166. This area has been designed for the operating of electronic components of fitted devices (e.g. electronic toll collection system).

Note The customer should ensure that the electronic toll collection system is fit- ted in the correct area to make sure it works correctly.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

224 Checking and refilling levels

Checking and refilling levels

Refuelling

The tank flap is released manually. The tank holds approxi- mately 70 litres.

Fig. 167 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked and locked automati- cally by the central locking.

Opening the fuel tank cap

Press the right side of the flap to open it.

Unscrew the fuel tank cap anticlockwise.

Hook the cap onto the support fitted to the open tank flap Fig. 167.

Closing the fuel tank cap

Screw the tank cap clockwise into the filler opening until it you hear it click into position.

Close the fuel tank flap.

The tank flap is at the rear of the vehicle on the right.

If the automatic filler nozzle is operated correctly, it will switch itself off as soon as the fuel tank is full. Never attempt to fill beyond this point, as this will fill the expansion chamber. Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions are warm.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is given on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap. Here you will find further information on fuel.

225Checking and refilling levels

WARNING

Fuel is highly flammable and can cause serious burns and other inju- ries.

Never smoke or use an open flame when filling the fuel tank of the vehicle, or a spare fuel canister, with fuel. This is an explosion haz- ard.

Follow legal requirements for the use of spare fuel canisters.

For safety reasons we do not recommend carrying a spare fuel can- ister in the vehicle. The canister could be damaged in an accident and leak.

If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to carry a spare fuel canis- ter, please observe the following points:

Never fill the spare fuel canister inside the vehicle or on it. An elec- trostatic charge could build up during filling, causing the fuel fumes to ignite. This could cause an explosion. Always place the canister on the ground to fill it.

Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of the canister as far as possi- ble.

If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filling nozzle must be in contact with the canister during filling. This helps prevent an electrostatic charge building up.

Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the luggage compartment. Fuel vapours are explosive. Danger of death.

CAUTION Fuel spills should be removed from the paintwork immediately.

Never run the tank completely dry. An irregular fuel supply could cause misfiring. As a result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic converter and cause damage.

When filling the fuel tank after having run it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel engine the ignition must be switched on for at least 30 sec- onds without starting the engine. When you then start the engine it may

take longer than normal (up to one minute) for the engine to start firing. This is due to the fact that the fuel system has to purge itself of air before starting.

For the sake of the environment Do not try to put in more fuel after the automatic filler nozzle has switched off; this may cause the fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

Petrol

Petrol types

The recommended fuel types are listed on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap.

Only unleaded petrol conforming to standard DIN EN 228 may be used for vehicles with catalytic converters (EN = European Standard).

Fuel types are differentiated by the octane rating, e.g: 91, 95, 98 RON (RON = Research Octane Number, unit for determining the knock resistance of petrol). You may use petrol with a higher octane number than the one rec- ommended for your engine. However, this has no advantage in terms of fuel consumption and engine power.

The correct fuel type for your vehicle is given in the technical table for the engine, in the Technical Data section.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

226 Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION Petrol with standard EN 228 may be mixed with small quantities of etha- nol. However, bioethanol fuels available at commercial establishments with reference E50 or E85, which contain a high percentage of ethanol, may not be used, as they will damage the fuel system.

Even one tankful of leaded fuel would permanently impair the efficiency of the catalytic converter.

High engine speed and full throttle can damage the engine when using petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct grade for the engine.

For the sake of the environment Just one full tank of leaded fuel would seriously impair the efficiency of the catalytic converter.

Petrol additives

Petrol additives improve the quality of the petrol.

The quality of the petrol influences the performance, power and life of the engine. For this reason, you should use good quality petrol containing addi- tives. These additives will help to prevent corrosion, keep the fuel system clean and prevent deposits from building up in the engine.

If good quality petrol with additives is not available or engine problems oc- cur, the required additives must be added during refuelling.

Diesel

Diesel*

Diesel fuel must conform to DIN EN 590 (EN = European Standard). It must have a cetane number (CN) of at least 51. The cetane number indi- cates the ignition quality of the diesel fuel.

Notes on refuelling page 224.

Biodiesel*

CAUTION Your vehicle is not designed to use biodiesel fuel. Never, under any cir- cumstances refuel with biodiesel. The use of biodiesel fuel could damage the engine and the fuel system. The addition of biodiesel to diesel fuel by the diesel manufacturer in accordance with standard EN 590 or DIN 51628 is authorised and will not cause damage to the engine or the fuel system.

The diesel engine has been designed to be used exclusively with diesel fuel conforming to standard EN 590. Never refuel or use petrol, kerosene, fuel oil or any other type of fuel. If you accidentally fill up the vehicle with the wrong type of fuel, do not start the engine. Seek assistance from speci- alised personnel. The composition of these fuels may severely damage the fuel system and the engine.

227Checking and refilling levels

Winter driving

Diesel can thicken in winter.

Winter-grade diesel

When using summer-grade diesel fuel, difficulties may be experienced at sub-zero temperatures because the fuel thickens due to wax separation. For this reason, winter-grade diesel fuel is available in some countries during the cold months. It can be used at temperatures as low as -22 C.

In countries with different climatic conditions the diesel fuel generally sold has different temperature characteristics. Check with the Technical Services or filling stations in the country concerned regarding the type of diesel fuels available.

Filter pre-heater

Your vehicle is fitted with a fuel filter glow plug system, making it well equipped for operation in winter. This ensures that the fuel system remains operational to approx. -24 C, provided you use winter-grade diesel that is safe to -15 C.

However, if the fuel has waxed to such an extent that the engine will not start at temperatures of under -24 C, simply place the vehicle in a warm place for a while.

CAUTION Do not mix fuel additives (thinners or similar products) with diesel fuel.

Bonnet

Work in the engine compartment

Extra caution is necessary when working on components in the engine compartment.

Always be aware of the danger of injury and scalding as well as the risk of accident or even fire when working in the engine compartment (e.g. when checking and refilling fluids). Always observe the warnings listed below and follow all general safety precautions. The engine compartment of the vehicle is a potentially hazardous area

WARNING

Switch the ignition off.

Remove the ignition key.

Apply the handbrake firmly.

If your vehicle is equipped with a manual gearbox, place the gear lev- er in neutral. If you are driving an automatic vehicle, place the selector lever in position P.

Wait for the engine to cool down.

Children should not be allowed to approach the engine compartment.

Never spill liquids used for vehicle operation on the engine compart- ment, as these may catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in coolant).

Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system, especial- ly when working on the battery.

Never touch the radiator fan while the engine is hot, as the fan could start up suddenly.

Never open the expansion tank when the engine is hot. The cooling system is under pressure.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

228 Checking and refilling levels

WARNING (Continued)

Protect face, hands and arms from any hot steam or hot coolant fluid released by covering the cap with a large, thick rag when opening the ex- pansion tank.

If any tests have to be performed with the engine running, there is an added safety risk from the rotating parts (e.g. drive belts, alternator, ra- diator fan, etc.) and from the high-voltage ignition system.

Observe the following additional warnings if work on the fuel system or the electrical system is necessary:

Always disconnect the battery from the on-board network.

Do not smoke.

Never work near open flames.

Always keep an approved fire extinguisher immediately available.

CAUTION When topping up fluids, make sure the correct fluid is put into the correct filler opening. This can otherwise cause serious malfunctions or engine damage.

For the sake of the environment Inspect the ground underneath your vehicle regularly so that any leaks are detected at an early stage. If you find spots of oil or other fluids, have your vehicle inspected at the workshop.

When the external temperature and level of humidity are high or when the engine stops, it is possible for water to drop from the air conditioning system evaporator potentially forming a small puddle on the ground. This is normal and does not indicate a leak.

Note On right-hand drive vehicles some of the reservoirs mentioned below are lo- cated on the other side of the engine compartment.

Releasing the bonnet

The bonnet is released from inside the vehicle.

Fig. 168 Detail of foot- well area on driver side: lever for unlocking the bonnet

To release the bonnet, pull the lever under the dash panel Fig. 168 in the direction indicated (arrow).

The bonnet springs out of its lock.

229Checking and refilling levels

Opening the bonnet

Fig. 169 Release catch under the bonnet

Before opening the bonnet make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are not lifted away from the glass. Otherwise the paint may be damaged.

Lift the bonnet slightly .

Press the release catch under the bonnet upwards Fig. 169. This will release the arrester hook under the bonnet.

Open the bonnet.

The bonnet is held in position by a gas-filled strut.

WARNING

Never open the bonnet if you see steam or drips of coolant being re- leased from the engine compartment. Failure to comply could result in burns. Wait until no steam or coolant can be seen before opening the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet

To close the bonnet, push it down until it overcomes the spring pressure.

Let the bonnet engage in the locking part. Do not force it .

WARNING

For safety reasons the bonnet must always be completely closed when the vehicle is moving. Therefore, after closing the bonnet, always check that the locking element is properly engaged. This is the case if the bonnet is flush with the adjacent body panels.

Should you notice that the bonnet is not safely secured when the ve- hicle is moving, stop the vehicle immediately and close the bonnet. Fail- ure to do so could result in an accident.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-grade oil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essential for the correct operation of the engine and its long useful life, when topping up or changing oil, use on- ly those oils that comply with VW standards.

The specifications (VW standards) set out in the following page should ap- pear on the container of the service oil; when the container displays the specific standards for petrol and diesel engines together, it means that the oil can be used for both types of engines.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

230 Checking and refilling levels

We recommend that the oil change, indicated in the Maintenance Pro- gramme, be performed by a Technical Service or a specialised workshop.

The correct oil specifications for your engine are listed in the page 230, Oil properties.

Service intervals

Service intervals can be flexible (LongLife service) or fixed (dependent on time/distance travelled).

If the PR code that appears on the back of the Maintenance Programme booklet is PR QI6, this means that your vehicle has the LongLife service pro- grammed. If it lists the codes QI1, QI2, QI3, QI4 or QI7, the interval service is dependent on time/distance travelled.

Flexible service intervals (LongLife service intervals*)

Special oils and processes have been developed which, depending on the characteristics and individual driving profiles, enable the extension of the oil change service (LongLife service intervals).

Because this oil is essential for extending the service intervals, it must only be used observing the following indications:

Avoid mixing it with oil for fixed service intervals.

Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low page 231 and LongLife oil is not available, it is permitted to top up (once) with oil for fixed service intervals (up to a maximum of 0.5 litres).

Fixed service intervals*

If your vehicle does not have the LongLife service interval or it has been disabled (by request), you may use oils for fixed service intervals, which al- so appear in page 230, Oil properties. In this case, your vehicle must be serviced after a fixed interval of 1 year/15 000 km (10 000 miles)(whatever comes first) Booklet Maintenance Programme.

In exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low page 231 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can put in a small quantity of oil conforming to the specification ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 (petrol engines) or ACEA B3 or ACEA B4 (diesel engines) (up to 0.5 l).

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*

All Exeo vehicles with a diesel engine have a diesel particulate filter and must only be filled with VW 507 00 engine oil, which has a low level of soot formation. Using other types of oil will cause a higher soot concentration and reduce the life of the DPF. Therefore:

Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.

Only in exceptional circumstances, if the engine oil level is too low page 231 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil (once) conforming to the VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00, VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 specification. (up to 0.5 l).

Oil properties

Engine type Specification

Petrol VW 502 00/VW 504 00

Diesel. Engines with particu- late filter (DPF)a)

VW 507 00

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may damage the engine.

Oils for LongLife service intervals*

Engine type Specification

Petrol VW 504 00

Diesel VW 507 00

231Checking and refilling levels

Engine oil additives

No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration caused by these additives is not covered by the warranty.

Note Before a long trip, we recommend finding an engine oil that conforms to the corresponding VW specifications and recommend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the correct engine oil will always be available for a top-up if nee- ded.

Checking the oil level

Fig. 170 Markings on oil dipstick

Checking oil level

Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the operating tempera- ture is reached and then stop.

Wait two minutes.

Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it in as far as it will go.

Then pull it out once more and check the oil level Fig. 170. If the oil level is too low, add more engine oil page 232.

Oil level in area a

Do not add oil in Topping up the engine oil on page 232.

Oil level in area b

You can add oil, but keep the level in this zone.

Oil level in area c

Oil must be added. Afterwards, the oil level should be in the lined area B .

Depending on how you drive and the conditions in which the vehicle is used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil consumption is likely to be higher for the first 5000 km. Therefore, the engine oil level must be checked at regular intervals, preferably when filling the tank and before a journey.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

232 Checking and refilling levels

Topping up the engine oil

Fig. 171 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap

Unscrew cap from oil filler opening Fig. 234.

Carefully put in the specified grade of oil page 230, adding 0.5 litres at a time.

After two minutes, check the oil level once again page 231.

Where necessary, add more engine oil.

Replace the oil filler cap carefully and push the dipstick all the way in.

WARNING

When refilling with oil, make sure no oil falls onto hot engine parts. Failure to comply could result in fire.

Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into contact with engine oil.

CAUTION The oil level must never be above area a . This could damage the cata- lytic converter or the engine. Contact a specialised workshop to drain the engine oil if necessary.

No additives should be used with engine oil. Any damage caused by the use of such additives would not be covered by the factory warranty.

For the sake of the environment Oil must not be disposed of in the drain or on the ground.

Always observe legal requirements when disposing of empty oil canis- ters.

Cooling system

Engine coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially trea- ted mixture of water and, at least, 40 % of the additive G 13 (TLVW 774 J). The engine coolant additive is recognisable by its purple colour. This mix- ture of water and additive gives the necessary frost protection down to -25 C (-13 F) and protects the light alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and considerably raises the boil- ing point of the coolant.

To protect the engine cooling system, the percentage of additive must al- ways be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze protection is not required.

If greater frost protection is required in very cold climates, the proportion of additive can be increased. However, the percentage of additive should not exceed 60 %, as this would reduce the frost protection and, in turn, de- crease the cooling capacity.

233Checking and refilling levels

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and, at least, 40 % of the G 13 or G 12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive (both are purple) to obtain an optimum anticorrosion protection . The mixture of G 13 with G 12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G 12 (red) or G 11 (green-blue) engine coolants will significantly reduce the anticorrosion protection and should, therefore be avoided .

WARNING

If there is not enough anti-freeze in the coolant system, the engine may fail leading to serious damage. Please make sure that the percentage of additive is correct with respect to the lowest expected ambient tem- perature in the zone in which the vehicle is to be used. When the out- side temperature is very low, the coolant could freeze and the vehicle would be immobilised. In this case, the heating would not work either and inadequately dressed passengers could die of cold.

CAUTION The original additives should never be mixed with coolants which are not approved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk of causing severe damage to the engine and the engine cooling system.

If the fluid in the expansion tank is not purple but is, for example, brown, this indicates that the G 13 additive has been mixed with an inade- quate coolant. The coolant must be changed as soon as possible if this is the case! This could result in serious faults and engine damage.

For the sake of the environment Coolants and additives can contaminate the environment. If any fluids are spilled, they should be collected and correctly disposed of, with respect to the environment.

Checking the coolant level

The coolant level can be checked visually.

Fig. 172 Engine com- partment: Coolant fluid deposit

Switch the ignition off.

Check the coolant level on coolant fluid expansion tank Fig. 172. When the engine is cold, it should be between the min and max marks. When the engine is hot, it may be slightly above the max mark.

Its location is shown in the corresponding general overview of the engine compartment.

The coolant level should be checked with the engine switched off.

The coolant level is monitored by a warning lamp on the instrument panel display page 79. However, we recommend that it should be checked oc- casionally.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

234 Checking and refilling levels

Coolant fluid loss

Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a leak in the cooling system. In this case the cooling system should be inspected by a specialised work- shop without delay. It is not sufficient merely to top up the coolant fluid.

If there are no leaks in the system, a loss of coolant fluid can only occur if the coolant boils and is forced out of the system as a result of overheating.

CAUTION Radiator sealants must not be added to the coolant fluid. Such additives could seriously impair the function of the cooling system.

Topping up the coolant fluid

Be careful when topping up with coolant fluid.

Switch the ignition off.

Wait for the engine to cool down.

Cover the cap on the expansion tank Fig. 172 with a cloth, and carefully unscrew the cap anticlockwise .

Add coolant fluid.

Screw on the cap tightly.

Make sure that the coolant fluid meets the required specifications page 232. Do not use a different type of antifreeze if G12++ antifreeze is not available. In this case, use only water and bring the antifreeze concen- tration back up to the correct level as soon as possible.

Always top up with new coolant fluid.

Do not fill above the max mark. Excess coolant fluid is forced out of the system through the valve in the filler cap when the engine gets hot.

If a lot of coolant fluid has been lost, wait for the engine to cool down before putting in cold coolant. Failure to do so could result in serious engine dam- age.

WARNING

The cooling system is under pressure. Do not unscrew the cap on the expansion tank when the engine is hot. Failure to comply could result in burns.

The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be a health hazard. Therefore, the antifreeze should be stored in the original container in a safe place out of reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

For the sake of the environment Drained off coolant should not be used again. Drain off the used coolant in- to a suitable container and dispose of it in the proper manner (observe envi- ronmental regulations).

Radiator fan

The radiator fan can start running spontaneously.

The auxiliary fan can continue to run for as long as 10 minutes after stop- ping the engine, even after the ignition is switched off. It may also start run- ning suddenly after some while if

Stored heat raises the coolant temperature, or

The hot engine compartment is additionally heated up by the sun.

235Checking and refilling levels

WARNING

When working in the engine compartment be aware that the radiator fan may start running suddenly, leading to the risk of injury.

Washer fluid and windscreen wiper blades

Windscreen washer system

Plain water is not sufficient for the windscreen washer sys- tem.

Fig. 173 In the engine compartment: Cap of windscreen washer fluid reservoir

The container for the windscreen washer contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen and the headlight washer system*. The container is located in the engine compartment (front left). The filler cap is marked with the symbol Fig. 173.

The capacity of the container is listed in page 297.

Plain water on its own is not enough to clean the glass properly. It is there- fore advisable to add a suitable washer fluid additive (with wax solvent) to the water. A washer fluid with freeze-resistant additive should be used in winter.

CAUTION Never put radiator antifreeze or other additives into the windscreen washer fluid.

Never use washer fluid which contains paint thinners or solvents as it can damage the paintwork.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

236 Checking and refilling levels

Changing windscreen wiper blades

If the windscreen wiper blades are in perfect condition, you will benefit from an improved visibility. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced immediately.

Fig. 174 Removing the wiper blade

Fig. 175 Fitting the wip- er blade

Removing the wiper blade

Lift the wiper arm away from the windscreen.

Slide the retainer catch on the wiper blade in the direction indi- cated Fig. 174 A . Hold onto the wiper blade at the same time.

Pull the wiper blade B out of its mounting on the wiper arm.

Fitting the wiper blade

Slide back the retainer catch on the new wiper blade. The mounting on the wiper blade should now be visible.

Fit the new wiper blade into the mounting on the wiper arm Fig. 175 C .

Slide the retainer catch on the wiper blade in direction D so that it clicks into place on the wiper arm.

Fold the wiper arm back down onto the glass.

If the windscreen wipers smear, they should be replaced if they are dam- aged, or cleaned if they are soiled.

If this does not produce the desired results, the setting angle of the wind- screen wiper arms might be incorrect. They should be checked by a special- ised workshop and corrected if necessary.

237Checking and refilling levels

WARNING

Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows!

The ignition must not be switched on while the front wiper arms are in a raised position. The wipers would return to their park position and damage the paintwork on the bonnet.

To prevent smearing on the windscreen, the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly using a window cleaner solution. If the wiper blades are very dirty (e.g. insects etc.), they should be cleaned using a sponge or cloth. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

For safety reasons, the wiper blades should be changed once or twice a year.

CAUTION Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers could scratch the windscreen.

Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the windows. This could damage the windscreen wiper blades.

Never move the windscreen wiper or windscreen wiper arm manually. This could cause damage.

Do not pull the windscreen wipers forward unless they are in the service position. Otherwise the bonnet could be damaged.

Brake fluid

Checking the brake fluid level

The brake fluid level can be checked visually.

Fig. 176 Engine com- partment: markings on brake fluid reservoir

The brake fluid level must be between the Min and Max Fig. 176 markings.

The fluid level may drop slightly after a period of time due to the automatic compensation for brake pad wear. This is quite normal.

However, if the level goes down noticeably in a short time, or drops below the Min mark, there may be a leak in the brake system. If the fluid level in the reservoir is too low, this will be indicated by the brake warning lamp page 71 and page 78. If this should happen, take the vehicle to a spe- cialised workshop immediately and have the brake system inspected.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

238 Checking and refilling levels

Topping up and changing the brake fluid

It is best to have the brake fluid changed by a professional.

Brake fluid absorbs moisture. Therefore, in the course of time it will absorb water from the air. If the water content in the brake fluid is too high, the brake system could corrode. In addition, the boiling point of the brake fluid will be considerably reduced. This could adversely affect the braking ability in certain circumstances.

For this reason the brake fluid must be changed periodically.

Your vehicle's Service Plan will tell you when the brake fluid has to be re- newed.

We recommend you have the brake fluid changed as part of a regular In- spection Service at a Technical Service. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary special tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for disposing of the old fluid.

Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid. Only use brake fluid that ex- pressly meets VW 501 14 standards.

You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid in a SEAT dealership or SEAT Official Service. If none is available, use only high quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.

Using any other kind of brake fluid or one that is not of a high quality may affect operation of the brake system and reduce its effectiveness. Never use a brake fluid if the container does not state that it complies with VW 501 14, DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4.

WARNING

Brake fluid must always be kept closed in its original container. Keep out of the reach of children. Failure to comply could result in poisoning.

If the brake fluid is left in the system for too long and the brakes are subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles may form in the brake system. This would seriously affect the efficiency of the brakes and the safety of the vehicle, leading to the risk of accident.

CAUTION Please note that brake fluid will attack the paintwork on contact.

For the sake of the environment The brake pads and brake fluid must be collected and disposed of accord- ing the applicable regulations. The SEAT Technical Service network has the necessary equipment and qualified personnel for collecting and disposing of this waste material.

Vehicle battery

General notes

All work on batteries requires specialist knowledge.

The battery is virtually maintenance-free and is checked in the Inspection Services.

We recommend replacing the battery after 5 years.

239Checking and refilling levels

Disconnecting the battery

If the battery is disconnected, some of the vehicle's functions will become inoperative (e.g. electric windows). These functions will require resetting af- ter the battery is reconnected. For this reason, the battery should only be disconnected from the vehicle's electrical system when absolutely necessa- ry.

Long periods of non-use

The battery will gradually lose its charge because certain electrical equip- ment continues to draw current even when the ignition is off. If you park the vehicle for long periods of time in winter you should take the battery out of the vehicle and store it in a place protected from frost. This way it will not freeze and become damaged. At warm outside temperatures it is sufficient to disconnect the negative terminal of the battery. Even when the battery is not connected you should charge it from time to time.

Winter operation

The battery is drained more in cold weather, which means that the starting power is reduced. For this reason, have the battery checked and charged if necessary before the start of winter.

Replacing the battery

A replacement battery must have the same capacity, voltage and current rat- ing. It must also have the same dimensions as the original, factory-fitted battery and have sealed caps. The SEAT batteries which have been specially developed fulfil the maintenance, performance and safety specifications for your vehicle.

We recommend you use maintenance-free batteries.

WARNING

All work on batteries requires specialist knowledge. If work is re- quired on the battery, this should be performed by a Technical Service or specialised workshop. Danger of caustic burns and explosion!

The battery must not be opened. Never try to change the battery's liq- uid level. Explosive gas is released from the battery that could cause an explosion.

CAUTION The battery holder and clamps must always be correctly secured.

Before starting any work on the battery, always observe the warnings listed under .

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances including sulphuric acid and lead. Therefore, they must be disposed of in line with environmental regulations and must not be disposed of with ordinary household waste. Make sure dis- connected batteries cannot tip over. Sulphuric acid could be spilt!

Important safety warnings for handling a vehicle battery

The battery is located at the back of the engine compartment page 297.

Wear eye protection

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protective gloves and eye protection!

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited!

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

240 Checking and refilling levels

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the bat- tery is under charge.

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

WARNING

Always be aware of the danger of injury and chemical burns as well as the risk of accident or fire when working on the battery and the electrical system:

Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, skin and clothing from acid and particles containing lead.

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear protective gloves and eye protection. Do not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid through the vents. Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately for several minutes with clear water. Then seek medical care immediately. Neutralise any acid splashes on the skin or clothing with a soapy solution, and rinse off with plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immedi- ately.

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are prohibited. When han- dling cables and electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks and electro- static charge. Never short the battery terminals. High-energy sparks can cause injury.

A highly explosive mixture of gases is released when the battery is under charge. The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.

Keep children away from acid and batteries.

Before working on the electrical system, you must switch off the en- gine, the ignition and all consumers. The negative cable on the battery must be disconnected. When a light bulb is changed, you need only switch off the light.

WARNING (Continued)

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you disconnect the battery! The alarm will otherwise be triggered.

When disconnecting the battery from the vehicle on-board network, disconnect first the negative cable and then the positive cable.

Switch off all electrical consumers before reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first the positive cable and then the negative cable. Never re- verse the polarity of the connections. This could cause an electrical fire.

Never charge a frozen battery, or one which has thawed. This could result in explosions and chemical burns. Always replace a battery which has frozen. A flat battery can freeze at temperatures around 0 C.

Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.

Never use a defective battery. This could cause an explosion. Replace a damaged battery immediately.

CAUTION Never disconnect the battery if the ignition is switched on or if the en- gine is running. This could damage the electrical system or electronic com- ponents.

Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as the intense ultraviolet radiation can damage the battery housing.

If the vehicle is left standing in cold conditions for a long period, protect the battery from freezing. If it freezes it will be damaged.

Charging the battery

A fully-charged battery is important for reliable starting.

Note the warnings in Important safety warnings for han- dling a vehicle battery on page 240 and .

241Checking and refilling levels

Switch off the ignition and all electrical equipment.

Only if fast-charging: both battery cables must be disconnected (first the negative cable, then the positive cable).

Connect the charger cables to the battery terminals, noting the colour code (red = positive; black or brown = negative).

Now connect the battery charger to the power socket and switch on.

After charging the battery: switch off the battery charger and disconnect the power socket cable.

Finally disconnect the charger cables from the battery.

If necessary, reconnect both battery cables to the battery (first the positive cable, then the negative cable).

When charging with a low current (for instance with a small battery charger) the battery does not normally have to be disconnected. However, both bat- tery cables must be disconnected before fast-charging the battery with a high current. However, always follow the instructions given by the manufac- turer of the battery charger.

The fast-charging procedure for a battery is dangerous in Important safety warnings for handling a vehicle battery on page 240, as it requires a special charger and the corresponding level of knowledge. We therefore rec- ommend that this work should only be performed by a specialised work- shop.

A flat battery can freeze at temperatures of around 0 C. The battery must be defrosted before charging . It is advisable to replace the battery if it has frozen, because the ice can crack the battery casing and allow the battery acid to escape.

The battery caps should not be opened while the battery is being charged.

WARNING

Never charge a frozen battery. Failure to comply could result in an explo- sion.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

242 Wheels and tyres

Wheels and tyres

Wheels

General notes

Avoiding damage

If you have to drive over a kerb or similar obstacle, drive very slowly and at a right angle.

Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

Inspect the tyres regularly for damage (cuts, cracks or blisters, etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded in the treads.

Storing tyres

When you remove the tyres, mark them in order to maintain the same direction of rotation when they are installed again.

When removed, the wheels and/or tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark location.

Store tyres in a vertical position if they are not fitted on wheel rims.

New tyres

New tyres have to be run in.

The tread depth of new tyres may vary, according to the type and make of tyre and the tread pattern.

Concealed damage

Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily visible. If you notice unusual vibrations or the vehicle pulling to one side, this may indicate that one of the tyres is damaged. The tyres should be checked immediately by a Techni- cal Service.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of rotation on tyres with directional tread. Always observe the direction of rotation indicated when fitting the wheel. This guarantees optimum grip and helps to avoid aqua- planing, excessive noise and wear.

WARNING

New tyres do not have maximum grip during the first 500 km (300 miles). Drive particularly carefully to avoid possible accidents.

Never drive with damaged tyres. This may cause an accident.

If you notice unusual vibrations or if the vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the vehicle immediately and check the tyres for dam- age.

Checking tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure from the sticker. The values refer to Summer tyres. For Winter tyres, you must add 0.2 bar to the values given on the sticker.

243Wheels and tyres

2. The tyre pressures should only be checked when the tyres are cold. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be re- duced.

3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are carrying.

Tyre pressure

The correct tyre pressure is especially important at high speeds. The pres- sure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting a journey.

The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap. The tyre pressure values given are for cold tyres. Do not re- duce the slightly raised pressures of warm tyres .

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds.

A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too low, causing an accident!

At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. In this way it becomes too hot, and this can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always observe the recommended tyre pressures.

If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prema- turely and the vehicle will not handle well. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.

Tyre pressure monitoring*

The tyre pressure monitoring system constantly checks the pressure of the tyres.

The system warns the driver in the event of a loss of pressure by means of symbols and messages in the instrument panel display.

Note that tyre pressure also depends on tyre temperature. Tyre pressure in- creases about 0.1 bar for each 10 C in tyre temperature increase. The tyre heats up while the vehicle is being driven and the tyre pressure will rise ac- cordingly. For this reason, you should only adjust the tyre pressures when they are cold (i.e. approximately at ambient temperature).

To ensure that the tyre pressure monitoring system works reliably, you should check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre pressures at regular intervals and store the correct pressures (reference values) in the system.

A tyre pressure information label is attached to the inside of the fuel tank flap.

WARNING

Never adjust tyre pressure when the tyres are hot. This may damage or even burst the tyres. Risk of accident!

An insufficiently inflated tyre flexes a lot more at high speeds and causes significant heating of the tyre. Under these conditions, the tyre bead may be released or the tyre may burst. Risk of accident!

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres lead to increased fuel consumption and tyre wear.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

244 Wheels and tyres

Significant tyre pressure loss

The tyre symbol is displayed and indicates that the tyre pressure of at least one tyre is insufficient.

Stop the vehicle.

Switch the ignition off.

Check the tyre(s).

Change the wheel if necessary.

Tyre pressure monitoring (RKA+)*

The tyre pressure monitor display on the instrument panel indicates if the pressure is too low.

Fig. 177 Detailed view of the centre console: But- ton for the tyre pressure monitoring system

The tyre pressure monitoring system makes use of the ABS sensors to com- pare the rolling circumference and the frequency characteristics of the wheels. If the rolling circumference or frequency characteristic changes on one or more wheels, the tyre pressure warning lamp will light up. The fault will also be indicated by a warning buzzer. The position of the affected tyre will also be shown (if only one tyre is affected) on the centre display of the instrument panel.

The rolling circumference and frequency characteristics can change if:

the tyre pressure is too low.

the tyre has suffered structural damage.

the wheels or the inflation pressures have been changed without initial- ising the system (see Adjusting the tyre pressure settings).

there is a greater load on the wheels of one axle (e.g. if you are carrying more passengers or luggage).

the road surface under the left wheels is different to the road surface un- der the right wheels for a long period.

when driving with snow chains.

Adjusting the tyre pressure settings (initialising the tyre pressure monitoring system)

After any incident regarding the wheels of your vehicle, e.g. after modifying the tyre pressure page 246 or after changing or swapping wheels page 246 you should - with the vehicle at a standstill and the engine run- ning - press Fig. 177. The yellow warning lamp will light up. Hold the button down for 2 seconds until the warning lamp goes out and an acoustic warning is given. You can now release the button.

If the wheels are subjected to extreme stress (e.g. heavy load), the tyre pressure must be increased to the recommended value for the maximum load (see the adhesive label on the inside of the fuel tank flap) and then initialise the system.

245Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure warning lamp on

When you switch on the ignition, the tyre pressure warning lamp will light up for about 2 seconds. There is a fault in the system if the indicator stays on permanently after switching on the ignition. The instrument panel also display TMPS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System). Please contact the nearest specialised workshop as soon as possible.

The tyre pressure warning lamp lights up if the tyre pressure on one or more wheels is significantly lower than the tyre pressure setting which was confirmed by the driver .

WARNING

If the tyre pressure warning lamp lights up you must slow down immediately and avoid any severe braking or steering manoeuvres. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and check the tyres and their pressure.

The driver is responsible for maintaining correct tyre pressures. Therefore, the tyre pressure must be regularly checked.

Under certain conditions (e.g. driving at high speeds, on ice and snow or on poor road surfaces) the tyre pressure warning lamp may not light up immediately or not at all.

Please ask your Technical Service or specialised workshop whether run-flat tyres can be used on your vehicle. Fitting this type of tyre in an undue manner could lead to your driving licence being taken away from you. Furthermore, it may led to damage to the vehicle or, under certain circumstances, may cause accidents.

If you change normal tyres for run-flat tyres or vice versa, the control unit must be reprogrammed by the Technical Service or a specialised workshop.

Note If you did not press the button for the tyre pressure monitoring system to confirm a new tyre pressure setting after making changes to the tyre pres- sures or changing one or more wheels, the warning lamp may light up although the tyre pressures are correct. In this case, stop the vehicle as soon as possible and, after examining the tyres, press the button for the tyre pressure monitoring system.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

246 Wheels and tyres

Tyre useful life

The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving style and fitting.

Fig. 178 Tyre tread wear indicators

Fig. 179 Diagram for changing wheels

Wear indicators

The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators Fig. 178, running across the tread. Depending on the make, there will be 6 to 8 of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Markings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters TWI or other symbols) indicate the positions of the tread wear indicators. The minimum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indicators). Worn tyres must be replaced. Different figures may apply in export countries .

Tyre pressure

Under-inflation or over-inflation will reduce the life of the tyres considerably and also impair the vehicle's handling. The inflation pressures are listed on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank flap.

Correct inflation pressures are very important, especially at high speeds. The pressure should therefore be checked at least once a month and before starting any long journey.

Tyre pressure monitoring (RKA+)*

Monitoring of the tyre pressures is based on the tyre pressures you have stored. The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function as intended if you store tyre pressure settings for a normal load, but then drive with the vehicle fully laden. The tyre pressure must be adapted to the actual load and stored accordingly in the tyre pressure monitoring system page 244.

Driving style

Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear.

Changing wheels around

If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisa- ble to change them around as shown Fig. 179. The useful life of all the tyres will then be about the same time.

247Wheels and tyres

Wheel balance

The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. However, various factors encoun- tered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which re- sults in steering vibration.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, as they otherwise cause exces- sive wear on steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must also be reba- lanced when a new tyre is fitted.

Incorrect wheel alignment

Incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel alignment checked by a Technical Service.

WARNING

There is a serious danger of accidents if a tyre bursts during driving!

The tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread wear indica- tors are worn page 246. Failure to do so could result in an accident. Worn tyres do not grip well at high speeds on wet roads. There is also a greater risk of aquaplaning.

At continuously high speeds, a tyre with insufficient pressure flexes more. This causes it to overheat. This can cause tread separation and tyre blow-out. Risk of accident. Always observe the recommended tyre pres- sures.

If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the running gear checked by a Technical Service.

Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and brake fluid away from tyres.

Damaged wheels and tyres must be replaced immediately!

For the sake of the environment Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption.

Run-flat tyres*

Run-flat tyres allow you to continue driving even with a punctured tyre, in the majority of cases.

In vehicles that are factory-fitted with run-flat tyres1) the loss of tyre pressure is indicated on the instrument panel.

Driving with run-flat tyres (emergency running)

Leave the ESC/ASR on (Electronic Stability Control), or switch it on page 69.

Continue driving carefully and slowly (80 km/h (50 mph) maxi- mum).

Avoid sudden manoeuvres and sharp turns.

Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.

Pay attention if the ESC/ASR activates often, if smoke comes from the tyres or there is a smell of rubber, the vehicle vibrates or there are clattering noises. If any of these occur, stop the ve- hicle.

The run-flat tyres have a tag on the side of the tyre, with the description: DSST, Eufonia, RFT, ROF, RSC, SSR or ZP.

The sides of this type of tyre are reinforced. When the tyres lose air they are supported on the sides (emergency driving).

The loss of pressure in the tyre is shown on the instrument panel. You can then drive a maximum of 80 km (50 miles) and if the circumstances are fa- vourable (for example, low load), even more.

1) Depending upon version and country.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

248 Wheels and tyres

The damaged tyre should be changed as soon as possible. The rim should be checked in a specialised workshop to detect possible damage and re- place it if necessary. We recommend you contact Technical Service. If more than one tyre is being used under emergency conditions, this reduces the distance which can be travelled.

Starting driving in emergency conditions

When loss in tyre pressure is displayed on the instrument panel, this means that at least one tyre is being driven in emergency conditions .

End of emergency operation

Do not drive on if:

smoke is coming from one of the tyres,

there is a smell of rubber,

the vehicle vibrates,

there is a rattling noise.

When is it no longer possible to continue driving even using run-flat tyres?

If the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) does not function.

If the tyre pressure monitoring system* does not work.

If one of the tyres has been severely damaged in an accident, etc. If a tyre has been badly damaged there is a risk that parts of the tread can be thrown off and cause damage to the fuel lines, brake pipes or fuel filler.

It is also advisable to stop driving if severe vibrations occur, or if the wheel starts overheating and gives off smoke.

WARNING

When driving in emergency conditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is considerably impaired.

The maximum permitted speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) is subject to road and weather conditions. Please observe legal requirements when doing so.

Avoid sharp turns and rapid manoeuvres, and brake earlier than usu- al.

Avoid driving over obstacles (for example kerbs) or potholes.

If one or more tyres are being driven in emergency conditions, the driving quality of the vehicle is impaired and there is a risk of accident.

Note The run-flat tyres do not deflate on losing pressure because they are supported on the reinforced sides. Therefore defects in the tyre cannot be detected with a visual inspection.

Snow chains must not be used on front tyres used in emergency condi- tions.

New tyres and wheels

New tyres and wheels have to be run in.

The tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. The tyres and rims approved by SEAT are specially matched to the characteris- tics of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe handling .

Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (i.e. both front tyres or both rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre designations makes it easier to choose the correct tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designations marked on the sidewall, for example:

249Wheels and tyres

195/65 R15 91T

This contains the following information:

Tyre width in mm

Height/width ratio in %

Tyre construction: Radial

Rim diameter in inches

Load rating code

Speed rating

The tyres could also have the following information:

A direction of rotation symbol

Reinforced denotes heavy-duty tyres.

The manufacturing date is also indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the inner side of the wheel).

DOT... 1103... means, for example, that the tyre was produced in the 11th week of 2003.

We recommend that work on tyres and wheels be carried out by a Technical Service. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary spe- cial tools and spare parts as well as the proper facilities for disposing of the old tyres.

Any Technical Service has full information on the technical requirements when installing or changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims.

195

65

R

15

91

T

WARNING

We recommend that you use only wheels and tyres which have been approved by SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could impair vehicle handling. Risk of accident.

Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than 6 years old. If you have no alternative, you should drive slowly and with extra care at all times.

Never use old tyres or those with an unknown history of use.

If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must ensure that the flow of air to the brakes is not restricted. This could cause the brake system to over- heat.

All four wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern.

For the sake of the environment Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country con- cerned.

Note For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from other vehicles. This can also apply to wheels of the same model. The use of wheels or tyres which have not been approved by SEAT for use with your model may invalidate the vehicle's type approval for use on public roads.

If the spare tyre is not the same as the tyres that are mounted on the vehicle (e.g. winter tyres) you should only use the spare tyre for a short peri- od of time and drive with extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as soon as possible.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

250 Wheels and tyres

Wheel bolts

Wheel bolts must be tightened to the correct torque.

The design of wheel bolts is matched to the rims. If different wheel rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and correctly shaped bolt heads must be used. This ensures that wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system functions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not use wheel bolts from a different vehicle, even if it is the same model page 222.

After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench. The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING

If the wheel bolts are not tightened correctly, the wheel could become loose while driving. Risk of accident.

The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil to them.

Use only wheel bolts which belong to the wheel.

If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loos- en whilst the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening tor- que is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.

CAUTION The prescribed tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

Winter tyres

Winter tyres will improve the vehicles handling on snow and ice.

In winter conditions winter tyres will considerably improve the vehicle's han- dling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow.

Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure 0.2 bar higher than the pres- sures specified for summer tyres (see sticker on fuel tank flap).

Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels.

Information on permitted winter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's reg- istration documentation. Use only radial winter tyres. All tyre sizes listed in the vehicle documentation also apply to winter tyres.

Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm.

The speed rating code page 248, New tyres and wheels determines the following speed limits for winter tyres:

max. 160 km/h (100 mph)

max. 180 km/h (110 mph)

max. 190 km/h (118 mph)

max. 210 km/h (130 mph)

In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These stickers are available from your Technical Service. The legal requirements of each country must be followed.

Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice.

Q

S

T

H

251Wheels and tyres

If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel page 248, New tyres and wheels.

WARNING

The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Other- wise, this could lead to tyre damage and risk of accident.

For the sake of the environment Fit your summer tyres again as soon as possible. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly and reduce fuel consumption.

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels, and only to certain tyre sizes page 296.

205/55 R16 15 mm chains

225/45 R17 9 mm chains

225/40 R18 7 mm chains

Remove wheel hub covers and trim rings before fitting snow chains. For safety reasons cover caps, available in any Technical Service, must then be fitted over the wheel bolts.

WARNING

Observe the fitting instructions provided by the snow chain manufactur- er.

CAUTION Remove the snow chains to drive on roads without snow. Otherwise they will impair handling, damage the tyres and wear out very quickly.

Note In some countries, the speed limit for using snow chains is 50 km/h (30 mph). The legal requirements of the country should be followed.

We recommend that you ask your Technical Service for information about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

252 If and when

If and when

Tools, tyre repair kit and spare wheel

Tools

The tools and jack are stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.

Fig. 180 Toolbox and jack

The tools A and jack B Fig. 180 are stored under the floor pan- el in the luggage compartment.

Lift the floor panel using the plastic handle.

Hook the handle C onto the luggage compartment weather strip.

Release the toolbox by pulling up the handle on the box.

Take out the tools or jack.

Replace the floor panel before closing the rear lid.

The tool kit includes:

A hook for removing wheel covers* or hub caps

Box spanner for wheel bolts

Towline anchorage

An adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts*

Before replacing the jack in the storage bin, wind down the arm of the jack as far as it will go.

Some of the tools listed are only provided in certain models or are optional extras.

WARNING

The factory-supplied jack is only designed for changing wheels on this model. On no account attempt to use it for lifting heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of injury.

Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

If work is to be carried out underneath the vehicle, this must be se- cured by suitable stands. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury.

253If and when

Tyre mobility system

The tyre mobility system is stored under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.

Fig. 181 Tyre Mobility System under floor panel in luggage compartment

Take hold of the handle and fold back the floor panel in the lug- gage compartment.

Take out the tyre mobility system.

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tyre Mobility System in case of a puncture.

The tyre mobility system consists of a container with sealing compound and a compressor to generate the required tyre pressure.

Instructions for using the sealant compound and the compressor are inclu- ded with the sealant can.

Spare steel rim wheel

The spare steel rim wheel is carried in the wheel well under the floor panel in the luggage compartment. It is only inten- ded for temporary use over short distances.

Fig. 182 Spare steel rim wheel

Taking out the spare wheel

Turn the plastic knob Fig. 182 anticlockwise.

Take out the spare wheel.

Securing the defective wheel in the spare wheel well

Place wheel in spare wheel well in the luggage compartment.

Secure the wheel by turning plastic knob clockwise.

Replace the floor panel before closing the rear lid.

Your vehicle can be factory-equipped with a spare steel wheel. The spare wheel does not usually meet the same performance standards as the

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

254 If and when

wheels fitted on the vehicle because of the wheel/tyre dimensions, rubber composition, tread pattern, etc. Therefore, note the following restrictions:

The spare steel wheel is designed only for your vehicle model. Do not attempt to mount the wheel on any vehicle but your own.

Your vehicle will have different driving characteristics when the spare steel rim wheel is mounted .

The spare wheel is only intended for temporary use after having a flat tyre. Replace the spare wheel with a normal wheel that has the proper tyre dimensions as soon as possible.

If the size of the spare steel rim wheel is different to that of the other wheels, it is unlikely that snow chains suitable for the other wheels will fit it.

WARNING

After mounting the spare steel rim wheel, the tyre pressure must be checked and corrected as soon as possible. The tyre pressure must corre- spond to the vehicle load (consult the table containing the inflation pres- sures). Otherwise there is danger of causing an accident. Use the highest tyre pressure as indicated in the table.

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h, as higher speeds can cause an acci- dent.

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering, as this could cause an accident.

Changing a wheel

Preparation work

What you must do before changing a wheel.

If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away from the flow of traffic as possible. Choose a location that is as level as possible.

All occupants should leave the vehicle. They should wait in a safe place (e.g. behind the roadside crash barrier).

Apply the handbrake firmly.

Engage first gear.

When towing a trailer: Unhitch the trailer from your vehicle.

Take the tools and the spare wheel page 252 out of the lug- gage compartment.

WARNING

If you have a puncture in heavy traffic, switch on the hazard warning lights and place the warning triangle in a visible location. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.

CAUTION If you have to change the tyre on a gradient, block the wheel opposite the wheel being changed by placing a stone or similar object under it to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.

255If and when

Note Please observe legal requirements when doing so.

Changing a wheel

Change the wheel as described below.

Remove the wheel cover.

Loosen the wheel bolts page 256.

Raise the vehicle with the jack page 257.

Take off the wheel with the flat tyre and then put on the spare wheel page 258.

Lower the vehicle.

Tighten the wheel bolts firmly in diagonal sequence with the box spanner page 256.

Replace the cover.

After changing a wheel

After changing the wheel, there are still tasks to complete.

Place the wheel with the defective tyre in the spare wheel well and secure it.

Put the tools and jack back in the luggage compartment.

The inflation pressure of the newly fitted spare tyre must be checked as soon as possible.

Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench. It must be 120 Nm (always when cold)

Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible.

Note If you notice that the wheel bolts are rusty and difficult to turn when changing a wheel, they must be replaced before having the tightening tor- que checked.

For safety reasons, drive at moderate speeds until the wheel bolt tight- ening torque has been checked.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

256 If and when

Loosening and tightening the wheel bolts

The wheel bolts must be loosened before raising the vehicle.

Fig. 183 Changing a wheel: Loosen the wheel bolts

Loosening

Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt1).

Grip the box spanner as close to the end as possible and turn the wheel bolts about one turn anticlockwise Fig. 183 (ar- row).

Tightening

Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the wheel bolt1).

Grip the box spanner as close to the end as possible and tight- en the bolt firmly by turning clockwise.

WARNING

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

Note If the wheel bolt does not come loose, it may be possible to release it by pushing down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and take care not to slip.

1) An adapter is required to unscrew or tighten the anti-theft wheel bolts* page 258.

257If and when

Raising the vehicle

In order to remove the wheel, the vehicle must be raised with a jack.

Fig. 184 Changing a wheel: Jack position points

Fig. 185 Changing a wheel: Jack

Position the vehicle jack under the door sill at the jacking point closest to the wheel being changed Fig. 184 -arrows-.

Wind up the jack under the jacking point until the claw of the jack is directly below the vertical rib under the door sill.

Align the jack so that the arm of the jack fits on the rib under the door sill Fig. 185 A and the movable base plate of the jack B is flat on the ground.

Raise the vehicle until the defective wheel is just clear of the ground.

Recesses at the front and rear of the door sills mark the jacking points Fig. 184 -arrows-. There is only one jacking point for each wheel. Do not fit the jack anywhere else.

The distance from the jacking points to the wheel arches is approximately 15 cm at the front and 25 cm at the rear.

An unstable surface under the jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. Therefore, the jack must be fitted on solid ground offering good sup- port. Use a large, stable base if necessary. On a hard, slippery surface (such as tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the jack from slipping.

WARNING

Take all precautions so that the base of the jack does not slip. Failure to do so could result in an accident.

The vehicle can be damaged if the jack is not applied at the correct jacking points. There is also a risk of injury since the jack can slip off suddenly if it is not properly engaged.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

258 If and when

Removing and fitting the wheel

For removal and fitting the wheel, the following tasks must be completed.

After loosening the wheel bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack, change the wheel as described below:

Removing a wheel

Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box spanner and place them on a clean surface.

Fitting a wheel

Screw on the wheel bolts in position and tighten them loosely with a box spanner.

The wheel bolts should be clean and easily screwed. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfaces. These sur- faces must be clean before fitting the wheel.

If tyres with a specific direction of rotation are fitted, note the direction of rotation.

Anti-theft wheel bolts*

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel bolts.

Fig. 186 Anti-theft wheel bolt

Insert the adapter onto the wheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go Fig. 186.

Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over the adapter.

Loosen or tighten the wheel bolt as appropriate.

Code

The code number of the anti-theft wheel bolt is stamped onto the front part of the adaptor.

The code number should be noted and kept in a safe place, as it is only by using the code number that a duplicate adaptor can be obtained from the SEAT Official Services.

259If and when

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern must be fitted so that they rotate in the correct direction.

A directional tread pattern can be identified by arrows on the sidewall that point in the direction of rotation. Always note the direction of rotation indi- cated when fitting the wheel. This is important so that these tyres can give maximum grip and avoid excessive noise, tread wear and aquaplaning.

If, in an emergency, you have to fit the spare wheel so it rotates in the wrong direction, you must drive extremely carefully. The tyre will not give optimum performance. This is particularly important when driving on wet roads.

To benefit from the advantages of tyres with this type of tread pattern, the defective tyre should be replaced as soon as possible so that all tyres again rotate in the correct direction.

Tyre repair* (Tyre-Mobility-System)

General information and safety notes

Repaired tyres are only suitable for temporary use over a short period.

Fig. 187 The Tyre Mobi- lity System is not suita- ble for repairing this type of damage to tyres.

Your vehicle is equipped with a tyre repair kit: the Tyre Mobility System.

In the event of a puncture you will find the TMS, which consists of a sealing compound and a compressor, located under the floor panel in the luggage compartment.

The Tyre Mobility System will reliably seal tyres damaged by foreign bodies, provided that the cuts or punctures are no larger than approx. 4 mm.

It is not necessary to remove the foreign body from the tyre.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

260 If and when

The sealing compound must not be used in the following cases:

If the cuts and punctures on the tyre are longer than 4 mm Fig. 187 1

If the wheel rim has been damaged 2

If you have been driving with very low pressure or a completely flat tyre 3

How to use the TMS (tyre mobility system) is described in the section Re- pairing a tyre page 261 and in the instructions supplied with the tyre sealant can.

The TMS (tire mobility system) can be used at outside temperatures down to -20 C.

WARNING

After repairing a tyre please note the following points:

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).

Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering.

Vehicle handling could be impaired.

Tyres which have been sealed using the Tyre Mobility System are only suitable for temporary use over a short period.

After using the tyre sealant the tyre pressure monitoring system* may malfunction. Therefore, please drive carefully to the next available speci- alised workshop.

The Tyre Mobility System must NOT be used:

If the cuts and punctures on the tyre are longer or wider than 4 mm.

if the wheel rim has been damaged.

If you have been driving with very low pressure or a completely flat tyre.

Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possible with the sealing product.

WARNING (Continued)

Do not allow the sealing product to come into contact with your eyes, skin or clothing.

If you do come into contact with the sealing product immediately rinse the eyes or skin affected with clean water.

Change clothing immediately if it becomes soiled with the sealing product.

Make sure you do not breathe in the fumes!

If any of the sealing product is accidentally ingested, immediately rinse the mouth thoroughly and drink lots of water.

Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical assistance if needed.

If any allergic reactions should occur get medical help immediately.

Keep the sealing product away from children.

For the sake of the environment If you have to dispose of a sealant can, go to a specialised waste service or to a SEAT Technical Service, where the product can be recycled in an appro- priate waste container.

Note If sealing product should leak out, leave it to dry. This way you can pull it off like a piece of foil.

Observe the expiry date stated on the sealing compound can. Have the sealing compound exchanged by a specialised workshop.

261If and when

Repairing a tyre

Fig. 188 Repairing a tyre

Preparations

If you have a flat tyre or puncture, park the vehicle as far away from the flow of traffic as possible.

Apply the handbrake firmly to prevent the vehicle from moving accidentally on slopes.

Engage first gear.

Check whether a repair is possible using the Tyre Mobility Sys- tem page 259.

Ensure that all passengers leave the vehicle and move away from the danger area .

Take the tyre sealant can and the compressor out of the lug- gage compartment.

Stick the max. 80 km/h adhesive, which is included with the tyre sealant can, onto the instrument panel where the driver will see it.

Filling the tyre

Shake the tyre sealant can well.

Screw the enclosed filling hose onto the sealant can as far as it will go. This will automatically pierce the foil sealing the can.

Take the valve cap off the tyre valve and use the enclosed valve insert tool to unscrew the valve insert Fig. 188.

Place the valve insert onto a clean surface.

Remove the sealing plug from the filling hose and insert the hose into the tyre valve.

Hold the tyre sealant can upside down and fill the complete contents of the can into the tyre.

Then disconnect the hose and screw the valve insert firmly back into the tyre valve.

Inflating the tyre

Screw the compressor filling hose onto the tyre valve and plug the connector into the cigarette lighter.

Pump the tyre up to 2.0 to 2.5 bar and monitor the pressure shown on the pressure gauge.

If the tyre pressure remains lower than the value specified above drive the vehicle approx. 10 metres forwards or back- wards, so that the sealant can spread evenly in the tyre. If the

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

262 If and when

pressure is still lower than the specification the tyre is too badly damaged and cannot be repaired using the tyre sealant.

Final check

After about 10 minutes, stop to check the tyre pressure.

If tyre pressure is less than 1.3 bar, the tyre is too badly dam- aged. Do not drive on! You should obtain professional assis- tance.

WARNING

If you have a puncture in heavy traffic, switch on the hazard warning lights and place the warning triangle in a visible location. This is for your own safety and also warns other road users.

Make sure your passengers wait in a safe place (for instance behind the roadside crash barrier).

Please observe the manufacturer's safety notes on the compressor and the instructions supplied with the tyre sealant can.

If it is not possible to build up a tyre pressure of 2.0 bar within 6 mi- nutes this means that the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive on!

Seek professional assistance if the repair of a tyre puncture is not possible with the sealing product.

If tyre pressure is less than 1.3 bar after driving about 10 minutes, the tyre is too badly damaged. Do not drive on! Obtain technical assis- tance.

CAUTION Take special care if you have to repair a tyre on a slope.

Note Do not use the compressor for longer than 6 minutes. Otherwise, it might overheat. When the compressor has cooled down, you can use it again.

If tyre sealant should leak out, leave it to dry and then pull it off like foil.

After carrying out a tyre repair remember to buy a new tyre sealant can at a specialised workshop. This will ensure that the Tyre Mobility System is op- erative again.

Please observe legal requirements when doing so.

263If and when

Fuses

Introduction

Due to the constant update of vehicles, fuse assignments depending on equipment and the use of the same fuse for various electrical components, at the time of printing this manual it is not possible to provide an up-to-date summary of the electrical components fuse positions. For detailed informa- tion about the fuse positions, please consult a Technical Service.

In general, a fuse can be assigned to various electrical components. Like- wise, an electrical component can be protected by several fuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of the problem has been solved. If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have the electrical system checked by a specialised workshop as soon as possible.

Additional information and warnings:

Working in the engine compartment page 227

WARNING

The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical shocks, causing burns and even death!

Never touch the electrical wiring of the ignition system.

Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system.

WARNING

Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit with- out fuses can cause a fire and serious injury.

Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.

Never repair a fuse.

Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, staple or similar.

CAUTION To avoid damage to the vehicles electric system, before replacing a fuse turn off the ignition, the lights and all electrical elements and remove the keys from the ignition.

If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to another part of the electrical system.

Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humidity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to the electrical sys- tem.

Note One single consumer could have more than one fuse.

Several consumers could run over one single fuse.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

264 If and when

Vehicle fuses

Fig. 189 Fuse box cover on the left side of the dash panel.

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same amperage (same colour and markings) and size.

Identifying fuses situated below the driver-side dash panel by colours

Colour Amp rating

purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7,5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40

Opening and closing the fuse box located on the left side of the dash panel

Opening: Remove the fuse box cover using a screwdriver Fig. 189.

Closing: fit the fuse cover back on.

CAUTION Always carefully remove the fuse box covers and refit them correctly to avoid problems with your vehicle.

Protect the fuse boxes when open to avoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt and humidity inside fuse boxes can cause damage to the electrical sys- tem.

Note In the vehicle, there are more fuses than those indicated in this chapter. These should only be changed by a specialised workshop.

Replacing a blown fuse

Fig. 190 Image of a blown fuse

265If and when

Preparation

Switch off the ignition, lights and all electrical equipment.

Open the corresponding fuse box page 264.

Identifying a blown fuse

A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured Fig. 190.

Point a lamp at the fuse. This will make it easier to see if the fuse is blown.

To replace a fuse

Remove the fuse.

Replace the blown fuse by one with an identical amperage rating (same colour and markings) and identical size .

Replace the cover again or close the fuse box lid.

CAUTION If you replace a fuse with higher-rating fuse, you could cause damage to an- other part of the electrical system.

Bulbs

General information

You can change the following bulbs for exterior lights yourself:

Main headlights: all bulbs (except xenon headlights)

Tail lights: all bulbs

Side turn signal bulb

The following bulbs can only be changed by a specialised workshop:

Main headlights: Xenon* bulb page 272

Front fog lights: Bulb

As a rule, you require a certain degree of practical skill to change defective bulbs. This applies in particular to those bulbs which are only accessible from the engine compartment.

If in doubt, we recommend that you have defective bulbs changed by a spe- cialised workshop or qualified mechanic.

If you do decide to change bulbs in the engine compartment yourself, be aware of the safety risks involved page 227 in Types of bulbs on page 266.

The name of many of the lamps fitted by SEAT ends in "LL". This means Long Life. These lamps are used for functions with a long service time (dipped beam, side lights, daylight driving, etc.). This does not apply to lamps with a shorter service time (turn signals, etc.). A lamp with the same name ex- cept for the last two letters, "LL or SLL, is compatible, but will have a service life of approximately half of the LongLife lamps.

When replacing lamp bulbs, the same type of bulb as originally fitted should always be used where possible.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

266 If and when

Changing bulbs. Halogen headlights

Types of bulbs

You must only replace a bulb with a bulb of the same type. The name can be found on the base of the bulb holder.

Bulb Type

Dipped beam headlights (halogen) 12 V/55 W (H7 LL)

Main beam headlights 12 V/55 W (H1)

Turn signal 12 V/21 W (PY21W)

Side lights 12 V/5 W (W5W LL)

WARNING

Take particular care when working on components in the engine com- partment if the engine is warm. Risk of burns.

Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury.

The high voltage element of gas discharge bulbs* (xenon light) must be handled correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.

When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp parts in the headlight housing.

CAUTION Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. Other- wise, a short circuit could occur.

Switch off the lights or parking lights before you change a bulb.

For the sake of the environment Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the prop- er manner.

Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on the lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.

Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the inter- est of your own safety, but also in that of all other road users.

Before changing a bulb, make sure you have the correct new bulb.

Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel instead. Otherwise, the fingerprints left on the glass will va- porise as a result of the heat generated by the bulb, they will be deposited on the reflector and will impair its surface.

267If and when

Removing the air duct

The air duct has to be removed to gain access to the bulbs for the right-side headlight.

Fig. 191 Air duct on right side of vehicle

Unscrew bolts A Fig. 191.

Detach air duct from guide B and take it out.

Fitting the air duct

Once the bulb(s) for the right-side headlight have been changed, the air duct must be re-installed.

Fig. 192 Air duct on right side of vehicle

Place the air duct in the correct position.

First turn the two screws A in lightly, then tighten both screws.

Push the air duct into guide B .

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

268 If and when

Halogen headlight bulbs

Fig. 193 Halogen bulbs

Main beam headlights

Side lights

Dipped beam headlights

Side lights

Turn signal

A

B

C

D

E

Changing the turn signal bulb

The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both sides of the vehicle.

Fig. 194 Turn signal bulb

Switch off the ignition and the lights.

Raise the bonnet.

Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise, pulling it by the grip Fig. 194 and removing the bulb holder and the bulb.

Replace the blown bulb in the bulb holder (press and turn anti- clockwise to remove) with a new bulb (press and turn clockwise to insert).

Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.

Check whether the new bulb is working.

269If and when

Note Although it is not necessary, previously remove the rigid cover Fig. 197 for easier turn signal bulb changes.

Changing the main headlight bulb

The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both sides of the vehicle.

Fig. 195 Main beam headlights

Fig. 196 Main beam headlights

Switch off the ignition and the lights.

Raise the bonnet.

Pull up on the rubber cover A Fig. 195 to remove it.

Remove connector Fig. 196 1 from the bulb.

Press the spring Fig. 196 2 inwards and to the right.

Remove the bulb. pulling it from the connection terminal and fitting fit the replacement so that it sits correctly in the cut-out on the reflector. To ensure correct lighting, the filament must be vertical. When changing the bulb, you can check the position of the bulb through the headlight glass.

Installation is in reverse order, ensuring that the rubber cover is well fitted to the housing.

Check whether the new bulb is working.

Have the headlight settings checked as soon as possible.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

270 If and when

Changing the dipped beam headlight bulb

The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both sides of the vehicle.

Fig. 197 Dipped beam headlights

Fig. 198 Dipped beam headlights

Switch off the ignition and the lights.

Raise the bonnet.

Move the brace Fig. 197 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove the rigid cover, separating the brace side and then re- moving the two tabs from the other end of the cover.

Pull the connector Fig. 198 2 from the bulb.

Unclip the retainer spring Fig. 198 3 pressing inwards to the right.

Remove the bulb and fit the new one in the headlight casing with the tab upwards, starting to position it from below.

Clip on the spring, raising it and pressing it slightly while turn- ing it anticlockwise. To ensure correct lighting, the filament must be vertical. When changing the bulb, you can check the position of the bulb through the headlight glass.

Connect the connector to the bulb.

Fit the cover, first inserting the side tabs and then closing the cover and the brace. Make sure that the gasket sits well on the casing cover during the operation.

Check whether the new bulb is working.

Have the headlight settings checked as soon as possible.

271If and when

Changing the side light bulb (outside of vehicle)

The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both sides of the vehicle.

Fig. 199 Side light bulb (outside of vehicle)

Fig. 200 Side light bulb (outside of vehicle)

Switch off the ignition and the lights.

Raise the bonnet.

Move the brace Fig. 199 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove the rigid cover, separating the brace side and then re- moving the two tabs from the other end of the cover.

Gently press on the bulb holder tabs Fig. 200 and pull the cover upwards (it can also be removed by pulling on the bulb holder wires).

Separate the bulb from the bulb holder by pulling both pieces anticlockwise.

Fit the new bulb by pressing on the bulb holder.

Insert the bulb into the socket and press on the bulb holder. Fit the cover, first inserting the side tabs and then closing the cov- er and the brace. Make sure that the gasket sits well on the cas- ing cover during the operation.

Check whether the new bulb is working.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

272 If and when

Changing the side light bulb (inside of vehicle)

The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both sides of the vehicle.

Fig. 201 Side light bulb (inside of vehicle)

Fig. 202 Side lights. Bulb holder grip in verti- cal position

Switch off the ignition and the lights.

Raise the bonnet.

Move the brace Fig. 201 1 in the direction of the arrow and remove the rigid cover, separating the brace side and then re- moving the two tabs from the other end of the cover.

Remove the bulb and the bulb holder by pulling on the bulb holder wiring.

Separate the bulb from the bulb holder by pulling both pieces anticlockwise.

Fit the new bulb by pressing on the bulb holder.

Insert the bulb into the socket so that the side of the bulb hold- er grip is vertical Fig. 202 and press on it.

Fit the cover, first inserting the side tabs and then closing the cover and the brace. Make sure that the gasket sits well on the casing cover during the operation.

Check whether the new bulb is working.

Changing bulbs. Bi-Xenon AFS headlights

Types of bulbs

Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of practical skill

You can change the following bulb for the exterior lights yourself:

Bulb for headlights: Indicator light 12V/21W (PY21W)

The following bulbs should only be changed by a specialised workshop:

273If and when

Main headlight lamps: Xenon lights.

Sources of the DRL (daylight) light unit and position.

WARNING

Take particular care when working on components in the engine com- partment if the engine is warm. Risk of burns.

Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The glass can break when you touch the bulb, causing injury.

The high voltage element of gas discharge bulbs* (xenon light) must be handled correctly. Otherwise, there is a risk of death.

When changing bulbs, please take care not to injure yourself on sharp parts in the headlight housing.

CAUTION Remove the ignition key before working on the electric system. Other- wise, a short circuit could occur.

Switch off the lights or parking lights before you change a bulb.

For the sake of the environment Please ask your specialist retailer how to dispose of used bulbs in the prop- er manner.

Note Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on the lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted.

Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the inter- est of your own safety, but also in that of all other road users.

Before changing a bulb, make sure you have the correct new bulb.

Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel instead. Otherwise, the fingerprints left on the glass will va- porise as a result of the heat generated by the bulb, they will be deposited on the reflector and will impair its surface.

Removing the air duct

The air duct has to be removed to gain access to the bulbs for the right-side headlight.

Fig. 203 Air duct on right side of vehicle

Unscrew bolts A Fig. 203.

Detach air duct from guide B and take it out.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

274 If and when

Fitting the air duct

Once the bulb(s) for the right-side headlight have been changed, the air duct must be re-installed.

Fig. 204 Air duct on right side of vehicle

Place the air duct in the correct position.

First turn the two screws A in lightly, then tighten both screws.

Push the air duct into guide B .

Bi-Xenon AFS headlight bulbs

Fig. 205 Bi-Xenon AFS headlight bulbs

Turn signal

Xenon headlight (dipped beam/main beam)

A

B

275If and when

Changing the turn signal bulb

The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both sides of the vehicle.

Fig. 206 Turn signal bulb

Fig. 207 Turn signal bulb

Switch off the ignition and the lights.

Raise the bonnet.

Pull the rubber cap Fig. 206 to remove it.

Remove the bulb holder by pulling on the grip and turning it an- ticlockwise Fig. 207.

Replace the blown bulb in the bulb holder (press and turn anti- clockwise to remove) with a new bulb (press and turn clockwise to insert).

Insert the bulb holder into the socket with the tab facing up- wards and the grip horizontal. Press it against the socket and turn clockwise. When changing the bulb, you can check the po- sition of the bulb through the headlight glass.

Fit the rubber cap and tighten, making sure it fit properly into the headlight casing.

Check whether the new bulb is working.

Changing the xenon bulb

The procedure for changing the bulb is the same on both sides of the vehi- cle.

WARNING

This type of bulb should be changed at a specialised workshop.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

276 If and when

Changing tail light bulbs (on side panel)

Overview of tail lights

Fig. 208 Overview of tail lights

Tail lights on side panel

Brake light and side light

Side lights

Turn signal

Overview of tail lights. LED lamps

Fig. 209 Overview of tail lights

Tail lights on side panel

Brake light and side light

Side lights

Turn signal

Note It is only possible to change the turn signal light.

If the warning lamp for the side light and/or rear fog light (LED lights) lights up, the tail light assembly should be replaced.

The failure of the lamp is only shown when the LED function goes out completely. Sometimes, a LED will stop working, without displaying the warning as the function continues to operate.

277If and when

Removing tail light

To change the bulbs you must remove the tail light assem- bly. Removing the light requires a certain degree of practical skill.

Fig. 210 Luggage com- partment: Location of the bolt securing the tail light unit

Fig. 211 Remove rear light unit from side panel

A special retaining screw is used to secure and guide the tail light.

Check which of the bulbs is defective.

Open the rear lid.

Prise open the cover at the slot with the flat blade of a screw- driver Fig. 210 1 .

Use a screwdriver to loosen the screw 2 (arrow) located be- hind the cover.

Gradually ease the tail light out of the housing (Fig. 211 posi- tions 3 and 4 ) by pulling alternately in positions 1 and 2 .

Remove the bulb holder page 278.

CAUTION Take care when removing the rear light unit to make sure there is no dam- age to the paintwork or any of its components.

Note Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to place under the glass on the rear light unit, to avoid any scratches.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

278 If and when

Remove the bulb holder

When changing a bulb, you must first remove the bulb hold- er.

Fig. 212 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail light

There are three securing tabs on the inside of the tail light.

Release the retaining tabs Fig. 212 A .

Take out the bulb holder.

Change the defective bulb page 278 page 279.

WARNING

If a bulb is replaced in a tail light assembly with LED, do not pull too hard on the bulb holder. This may damage the wiring of the LED module.

Changing bulbs

All bulbs can be changed easily in the bulb holder.

Fig. 213 Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder Example: Left tail light in side panel.

The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fastener. The table below gives an overview of the bulb positions.

Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it to the left and remove it.

Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to the right as far as it will go.

Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb.

Check that the new bulb works properly.

Re-install the bulb holder page 279.

279If and when

Position of the bulbs

Pos. Fig. 213

Bulb function

A Brake light and side light P21W LL

B Side lights P21W LL

C Turn signal PY21W

Changing bulbs. LED lamps

All bulbs can be changed easily in the bulb holder.

Fig. 214 Position of the bulb on the bulb holder. Example: Left tail light in side panel.

The bulb is secured with a bayonet fastener. The table below gives an overview of the bulb positions.

Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it to the left and remove it.

Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to the right as far as it will go.

Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb.

Check that the new bulb works properly.

Re-install the bulb holder page 279.

Position of the bulbs

Pos. Fig. 214

Bulb function

A Turn signal PY21W

Note It is only possible to change the turn signal light.

If the brake light and/or side lights with LEDs have to be replaced, the tail light must be replaced.

Fitting the bulb holder

The bulb holder is easy to fit.

Position the bulb holder on the tail light and align it so that it is securely seated.

Press the bulb holder into the tail light until it engages.

Re-install the tail light unit page 280.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

280 If and when

Fitting the tail light unit

The tail light unit is easy to fit.

Fig. 215 Fitting the tail light unit

Fig. 216 Luggage com- partment: Location of the bolt securing the tail light unit

First place the tail light unit in Fig. 215 arrow 1 in the hous- ing.

Gently press the tail light unit against the housing, first in posi- tion 2 and then in position 3 , until that the clips engage firm- ly in the rubber mountings.

Apply gentle pressure to the upper part of the tail light unit and secure using the screwdriver, from the luggage compartment Fig. 216 1 .

Try to move the tail light sideways to ensure it is correctly fitted.

Replace the cover 2 in the interior trim.

Make sure that all bulbs for the tail lights are working.

CAUTION Take care when fitting the tail light unit to make sure there is no damage to the paintwork or any of its components.

281If and when

Changing tail light bulbs (on rear lid)

Overview of tail lights

Fig. 217 Overview of tail lights

Tail lights on the rear lid

Side lights

Rear fog light

Reverse light

Overview of tail lights. LED lamps

Fig. 218 Overview of tail lights

Tail lights on the rear lid

Side lights

Rear fog light

Reverse light

Note It is only possible to change the reverse light.

If the warning lamp for the side light and/or rear fog light (LED lights) lights up, the tail light assembly should be replaced.

The failure of the lamp is only shown when the LED function goes out completely. Sometimes, a LED will stop working, without displaying the warning as the function continues to operate.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

282 If and when

Remove the bulb holder

The rear lid must be open to change the bulbs.

Fig. 219 Remove the cover from the rear lid

Fig. 220 Remove the bulb holder

You can access the bulb holder for the inner tail lights via the in- side of the rear lid.

Check which of the bulbs is defective.

Insert a screwdriver into the opening in the cover from the top Fig. 219 and use it as a lever to detach the cover.

Press on the tabs A Fig. 220 in the direction of the arrows and remove the bulb holder by pulling in the direction of the ar- row B .

Change the bulbs page 282 page 283.

WARNING

If a bulb is replaced in a tail light assembly with LED, do not pull too hard on the bulb holder. This may damage the wiring of the LED module.

Changing bulbs

All bulbs can be changed easily in the bulb holder.

Fig. 221 Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder Example: Tail lights on the rear lid

283If and when

The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fastener. The table below gives an overview of the bulb positions.

Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it to the left and remove it.

Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to the right as far as it will go.

Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb.

Check that the new bulb works properly.

Re-install the bulb holder page 284.

Position of the bulbs

Pos. Fig. 221

Bulb function

A Reverse light P21W LL

B Side light and rear fog light

P21W LL

Changing bulbs. LED lamps

All bulbs can be changed easily in the bulb holder.

Fig. 222 Position of the bulb on the bulb holder. Example: Tail lights on the rear lid

The bulb is secured with a bayonet fastening. The table below gives an overview of the bulb positions.

Lightly press the defective bulb into the bulb holder, then turn it to the left and remove it.

Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb holder and turn it to the right as far as it will go.

Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb.

Check that the new bulb works properly.

Re-install the bulb holder page 284.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

284 If and when

Position of the bulbs

Pos. Fig. 222

Bulb function

A Reverse light P21W LL

Fitting the bulb holder

The bulb holder is easy to fit.

Check that the seal is seated correctly on the bulb holder.

Position the bulb holder on the tail light and align it so that it is securely seated.

Press the bulb holder into the tail light until it engages.

Fit the cover back in the interior trim so that it engages.

Make sure that all bulbs for the tail lights are working.

Side turn signals

Fig. 223 Side turn signal

Press the turn signal to the left or to the right to remove the bulb.

Remove the bulb holder from the turn signal.

Remove the failed glass bulb and replace with a new bulb.

Insert the bulb holder in the turn signal guide until it clicks into place.

First place the turn signal in the opening in the bodywork, fixing the tabs Fig. 223, arrow 1 .

Insert the bulb as shown by the arrow 2 Fig. 223.

285If and when

Luggage compartment lights

Fig. 224 Luggage com- partment light

Fig. 225 Luggage com- partment light

Remove the tulip-shaped fitting by pressing on its inside edge using the flat side of a screwdriver.

Remove the protective cover and remove the bulb from the housing Fig. 225.

Registration light

Fig. 226 Number plate light

Fig. 227 Number plate light

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

286 If and when

Unscrew the screws to remove the bulb Fig. 226.

Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction of the arrow and outwards Fig. 227.

Installation involves all of the above steps in reverse sequence.

Sun visor light

Fig. 228 Removing sun visor light

Fig. 229 Removing sun visor light

Remove the bulb carefully, using the flat part of a screwdriver Fig. 228.

Use a screwdriver to remove the protective cover.

Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction of the arrow and outwards Fig. 229.

Jump-starting

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wire cross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can be connected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine.

287If and when

Jump leads

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN 72553 (see cable manufactur- er's instructions). The wire cross section must be at least 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least 35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.

The discharged battery must be properly connected to the on-board net- work.

How to jump start: description

Fig. 230 Diagram of con- nections for vehicles without Start Stop sys- tem

Fig. 231 Diagram of con- nections for vehicles with Start Stop system

Jump lead terminal connections

1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles .

2. For vehicles without Start-Stop system:

Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive + termi- nal of the vehicle with the flat battery A Fig. 230.

Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive ter- minal + in the vehicle providing assistance B .

Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal of the vehicle providing assistance B Fig. 230.

Connect the other end of the black jump lead X to a solid met- al component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. However, connect it to a point as far as possible from the battery A .

3. For vehicles with Start-Stop system:

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

288 If and when

Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive + termi- nal of the vehicle with the flat battery A Fig. 231.

Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive ter- minal + in the vehicle providing assistance B .

Connect one end of the black jump lead X to a suitable ground terminal, a solid piece of metal in the engine block, or to the en- gine block Fig. 231.

Connect the other end of the black jump lead X to a solid met- al component bolted to the engine block or to the engine block itself of the vehicle with the flat battery. However, connect it to a point as far as possible from the battery A .

4. Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Starting

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the boosting battery and let it run at idling speed.

6. Start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery and wait two or three minutes until the engine is running.

Removing the jump leads

7. Before you remove the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam headlights (if they are switched on).

8. Turn on the heater blower and heated rear window in the vehi- cle with the flat battery. This helps minimise voltage peaks which are generated when the leads are disconnected.

9. When the engine is running, disconnect the leads in reverse or- der to the details given above.

Connect the battery clamps so they have good metal-to-metal contact with the battery terminals.

If the engine fails to start, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and try again after about half a minute.

WARNING

Please note the safety warnings referring to working in the engine compartment page 227.

The battery providing assistance must have the same voltage as the flat battery (12V) and approximately the same capacity (see imprint on battery). Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Never use jump leads when one of the batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! Even after the battery has thawed, battery acid could leak and cause chemical burns. If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.

Keep sparks, flames and lighted cigarettes away from batteries, dan- ger of explosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion.

Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads.

Do not connect the negative cable from the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emitted from the battery could be ignited by sparks. Danger of explosion.

Do not attach the negative cable from the other vehicle to parts of the fuel system or to the brake line.

The non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. The jump lead attached to the positive battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.

Position the leads in such a way that they cannot come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment.

Do not lean on the batteries. This could result in chemical burns.

289If and when

Note The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

290 If and when

Towing and tow-starting

Tow-starting

The use of jump leads is preferable to tow-starting.

We recommend that you do not tow-start your vehicle. Jump-start- ing is preferable page 286.

However, if your vehicle has to be tow-started:

Engage the 2nd or the 3rd gear.

Keep the clutch pressed down.

Switch the ignition on.

Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch.

As soon as the engine starts, press the clutch and move the gear lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing vehicle.

WARNING

The risk of accidents is high when tow-starting. The vehicle being towed can easily collide with the towing vehicle.

CAUTION When tow-starting, fuel could enter the catalytic converter and damage it.

General notes

Please observe the following points if you use a tow rope:

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle

Drive slowly at first until the tow rope is taut. Then accelerate gradually.

Begin and change gears cautiously. If you are driving an auto- matic vehicle, accelerate gently.

Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not working in the vehicle you are towing. Brake sooner than nor- mal and pressing the pedal gently.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle

Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all times when towing.

Tow rope or tow bar

It is easier and safer to tow a vehicle with a tow bar. You should only use a tow rope if you do not have a tow bar.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to reduce the loading on both vehicles. It is advisable to use a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or similarly elastic material.

Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the towline anchorages provided or a towing bracket.

Driving style

Towing requires some experience, especially when using a tow rope. Both drivers should be familiar with the technique required for towing. Inexper- ienced drivers should not attempt to tow.

291If and when

Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope. When towing on an unpaved road, there is always a risk of overloading and damaging the anchorage points.

The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the steering wheel from locking and also to allow the use of the turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and washers.

As the brake servo does not work if the engine is not running, you must ap- ply considerably more pressure to the brake pedal than you normally would.

As the power assisted steering does not work if the engine is not running, you will need more strength to steer than you normally would.

Towing vehicles with an automatic gearbox

Put the selector lever into position N.

Do not drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph).

Do not tow further than 50 km.

If a breakdown vehicle is used, the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels raised.

Note Observe legal requirements when towing or tow-starting.

Switch on the hazard warning lights of both vehicles. However, observe any regulations to the contrary.

For technical reasons, vehicles with an automatic gearbox must not be tow-started.

If damage to your vehicle means that there is no lubricant in the gear- box, you must raise the driven wheels while the vehicle is being towed.

If the vehicle has to be towed more than 50 km (30 miles), the front wheels should be raised during towing, and towing should be carried out by a qualified person.

The steering wheel is locked when the vehicle has no electrical power. The vehicle must then be towed with the front wheels raised. Towing should be carried out by a qualified person.

The towline anchorage should always be kept in the vehicle. Please refer to the notes page 290, Tow-starting.

Front towing eye

Fig. 232 Fitting the tow- line anchorage to front of the vehicle

Fitting the towline anchorage

Take the towline anchorage from the on-board tool set.

Remove the front cover by pressing down on the right hand side.

Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in the direction of the arrow Fig. 232.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

292 If and when

Rear towline anchorage

There is a towline anchorage at the rear on the right below the rear bumper.

293Description of specifications

Technical Specifications

Description of specifications

Important information

Important

The information in the vehicle documentation always takes precedence over the information in this Instruction Manual.

All technical specifications provided in this documentation are valid for the standard model in Spain. The vehicle data card included in the Mainte- nance Programme or the vehicle registration documentation shows which engine is installed in the vehicle.

The figures may be different depending whether additional equipment is fit- ted, for different models, for special vehicles and for other countries.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Specifications section

Abbrevia- tion

Meaning

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PS Pferdestrke (horsepower), formerly used to denote engine power.

rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

litres per 100 km

Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km (70 miles).

g/km Carbon dioxide emissions in grams per km (mile) travelled.

CO2 Carbon dioxide

CN Cetane number, indication of the diesel combustion power.

RON Research octane number, indication of the knock resistance of petrol.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

294 Description of specifications

Vehicle identification data

The most important information is given on the identifica- tion plate and the vehicle data sticker.

Fig. 233 Vehicle data sticker (luggage compart- ment)

Vehicles for certain export countries do not have an identification plate.

Identification plate

The identification plate is located on the left rib inside the engine compart- ment.

Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (chassis number) can be read from out- side the vehicle through a viewer in the windscreen. This is located on the left-hand side of the vehicle in the lower area of the windscreen. It is also located on the right hand side of the engine compartment.

Vehicle data

The data sticker is placed on the inside of the spare wheel well, in the lug- gage compartment and on the rear cover of the Maintenance Programme.

The following information is provided on the vehicle data sticker: Fig. 233

Vehicle identification number (chassis number)

Vehicle type, model, displacement, engine type, finish, engine power and gearbox type

Engine code, gearbox code, external paint code and internal equipment code

Optional extras and PR numbers

Consumption values (l/100 km) and CO2 emissions (g/km)

A Urban consumption and CO2 emissions

B Extra-urban consumption and CO2 emissions

C Combined consumption and CO2 emissions

Information on fuel consumption

Fuel consumption

The consumption and emission details shown on the vehicle data sticker differ from one vehicle to another.

The vehicle fuel consumption and CO2 emissions can be consulted on the vehicle data sticker in the spare wheel well, inside the luggage compart- ment and on the rear cover of the Maintenance Programme.

The fuel consumption and CO2 emission values refer to the weight category assigned to your vehicle according to the engine and gearbox combination, as well as the specific equipment fitted, and is only used to compare be- tween the different models.

1

2

3

4

5

295Description of specifications

The fuel consumption and CO2 emissions do not depend only on the per- formance of the vehicle, they can also differ from the established values de- pending on other factors such as driving style, road conditions, traffic con- ditions, environmental conditions, load and number of passengers.

Calculation of fuel consumption

The consumption values have been calculated based on measurements per- formed or supervised by certified CE laboratories according to the latest ver- sion of directives 715/2007/EC and 80/1268/CEE (for more information consult the European Union Publications Office at EUR-Lex: European Un- ion, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/en/index.htm) and are valid for the kerb weight indicated for the vehicle.

Note In practice, and considering all the factors mentioned here, consumption values can differ from those calculated in the current European regulations.

Weights

Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 kg to allow for the weight of the driver.

For special versions and optional equipment fittings or for the addition of accessories, the weight of the vehicle will increase .

WARNING

Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; this may affect vehicle handling and lead to an accident. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit road conditions and re- quirements.

Never exceed the gross axle weight rating or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the allowed axle load or the allowed total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to acci- dents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

296 Description of specifications

Towing a trailer

Trailer weights

Trailer weight

The trailer weights and drawbar loads approved are selected in intensive tri- als according to precisely defined criteria. The approved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100 km/h (60 mph). The figures may be differ- ent in other countries. All data in the official vehicle documentation takes precedence over these data at all times .

Drawbar loads

The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket must not exceed 75 kg.

In the interest of road safety, we recommend that you always tow approach- ing the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small.

If the maximum permissible drawbar load cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and light-weight single axle trailers or tandem axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1 metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer weight is legally required for the drawbar load.

WARNING

For safety reasons, do not exceed the 80 km/h (50 mph) limit. This is also valid in countries where higher speeds are permitted.

Never exceed the maximum trailer weights or the drawbar load. If the permissible axle load or the permissible total weight is exceeded, the driving characteristics of the vehicle may change, leading to accidents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.

Wheels

Tyre pressure, snow chains, wheel bolts

Tyre pressures

The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. The slightly raised pressures of warm tyres must not be reduced.

Snow chains

Snow chains may be fitted only to the front wheels.

Consult the section wheels of this manual.

Wheel bolts

After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench . The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents, particularly at high speeds.

If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loos- en while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening tor- que is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.

Note We recommend that you ask your Technical Service for information about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.

297Technical specifications

Technical specifications

Engine specifications

Checking fluid levels

From time to time, the levels of the different fluids in the ve- hicle must be checked. Never fill with incorrect fluids, other- wise serious damage to the engine may be caused.

Fig. 234 Diagram for the location of the various elements

Vehicle battery

Engine oil filler cap

Brake fluid reservoir

Engine oil level dipstick

1

2

3

4

Coolant expansion tank

Windscreen washer fluid container

Hydraulic fluid reservoir for power steering

The checking and refilling of service fluids are carried out on the compo- nents mentioned above. These operations are described in the page 227.

Overview

You will find further explanations, instructions and restrictions on the tech- nical specifications as of page 293.

Note The layout of parts may vary depending on the engine.

5

6

7

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

298 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.8 88 kW (120 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 88 (120) / 3650-6200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 230 / 1500-3650

No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4 / 1798

Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Super 91 RONb)

a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) Slight power loss.

Performance

Maximum speed in km/h 202

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,6

Weights

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1980

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1495

Gross front axle weight in kg 1075

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1030

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer weight

Trailer without brakes in kg 740

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% in kg 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% in kg 1300

299Technical specifications

Petrol engine 1.8 118 kW (160 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 118 (160) / 4500-6200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 250 / 1500-4500

No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4 / 1798

Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Super 91 RONb)

a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) Slight power loss.

Performance

Maximum speed in km/h 225

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,6

Weights

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1980

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1495

Gross front axle weight in kg 1075

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1030

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer weight

Trailer without brakes in kg 740

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% in kg 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% in kg 1300

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

300 Technical specifications

Petrol engine 2.0 147 kW (200 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 147 (200) / 5100

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 280 / 1800

No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4 / 1984

Fuel Super 98 RONa)/Super 95 RONb)

a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) Slight power loss.

Performance

Maximum speed in km/h 235

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7,3

Weights

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2015

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1530

Gross front axle weight in kg 1120

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1030

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer weight

Trailer without brakes in kg 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% in kg 1700

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% in kg 1500

301Technical specifications

Petrol engine 2.0 155 kW (211 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 155 (211) / 4600-6000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320 / 1500-4600

No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4 / 1984

Fuel Super 95 RONa)/Super 91 RONb)

a) Research Octane Number = Anti-detonation rating of the petrol. b) Slight power loss.

Performance

Maximum speed in km/h 244

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 7,1

Weights

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1990

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1505

Gross front axle weight in kg 1090

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1030

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer weight

Trailer without brakes in kg 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% in kg 1700

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% in kg 1500

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

302 Technical specifications

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 88 kW (120 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 88 (120) / 4000

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 290 / 1750-2500

No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4 / 1968

Fuel Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CNa)

a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Performance

Maximum speed in km/h 204

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 7,2

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 10,5

Weights

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1990

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1505

Gross front axle weight in kg 1100

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1015

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer weight

Trailer without brakes in kg 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% in kg 1500

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% in kg 1300

303Technical specifications

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 105 kW (143 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 105 (143) / 4200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 320 / 1750-2500

No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4 / 1968

Fuel Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CNa)

a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Performance

Manual Automatic

Maximum speed in km/h 215 208

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 6,3 6,3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 9,2 9,3

Weights

Manual Automatic

Gross vehicle weight in kg 1990 2030

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1505 1545

Gross front axle weight in kg 1100 1135

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1015 1030

Permitted roof load in kg 75 75

Trailer weight

Manual Automatic

Trailer without brakes in kg 750 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% in kg 1800 1900

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% in kg 1400 1700

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

304 Technical specifications

Diesel engine 2.0 TDI CR 125 kW (170 PS)

Engine specifications

Power output in kW (PS) rpm 125 (170) / 4200

Maximum torque in Nm at rpm 350 / 1750-2500

No. of cylinders/capacity in cm3 4 / 1968

Fuel Min, diesel acc. to DIN EN 590 51 CNa)

a) Cetane Number (cetane index) = Measure of the combustion power of the diesel

Performance

Maximum speed in km/h 229

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h in sec. 5,9

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h in sec. 8,4

Weights

Gross vehicle weight in kg 2015

Weight in running order (with driver) in kg 1530

Gross front axle weight in kg 1115

Gross rear axle weight in kg 1030

Permitted roof load in kg 75

Trailer weight

Trailer without brakes in kg 750

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 8% in kg 1800

Trailer with brakes, gradients up to 12% in kg 1600

305Technical specifications

Dimensions and capacities

Dimensions

Length, width 4661-4741a) mm/ 1772 mm

Height at kerb weight 1430 mm

Front and rear projection 976 mm/ 1043-1123a) mm

Wheelbase 2642 mm

Turning circle 11.2 m

Track widthb) Front Rear

1522 mm 1523 mm

Capacities

Fuel tank 70 litres. Reserve 10 litres.

Windscreen washer fluid container with headlight washer 4.8 l.

Tyre pressure

Summer-grade tyres:

The correct tyre pressure can be seen on the sticker on the inside of the tank flap.

Winter tyres:

The pressure of these tyres is the same as the summer tyre pressure plus 0.2 bar.

a) With towing eye. b) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.

Safety First Operating instructions Practical Tips Technical Specifications

Index

Numbers and Symbols 230 V socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

A Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Airbag Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Air conditioner 2C-Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Air outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Air purity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Air recirculation (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Blower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 ECON Mode (economy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Economical use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Key settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Solar-powered blower/sunroof . . . . . . . . . 163 Temperature selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Air duct Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 274 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 273

Air purity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Alternator Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Anti-lock brake system How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Aquaplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Armrest Storage compartment in front armrest . . . 141

Armrests Adjusting the front armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Ashtray Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

ASR Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 How the system works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Athermic windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Automatic gearbox Dynamic gear control programme . . . . . . . 184 Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 multitronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Paddle levers (tiptronic mode) . . . . . . . . . 186 Safety interlock for ignition key . . . . . . . . . 166 Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Steering wheel with paddle levers . . . . . . 186 tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 tiptronic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Automatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Auxiliary heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

B Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Long periods of non-use . . . . . . . . . . 238, 239 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 239 Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238, 239

Bicycle rack Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Biodiesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

307Index

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Brake light Failure control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Brake assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Worn brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Brake system Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Braking distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Bulb change general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

C Car care

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Central locking Manual locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Sunroof: opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . 113

Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Locking and unlocking the vehicle from in- side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Opening and closing the windows . . . . . . 111 Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Security central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Switch on the driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Cetane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Changing tail light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Changing the main headlight bulb Main headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Changing the main headlight bulbs Dipped beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Changing the tail lights Luggage compartment lights . . . . . . . . . . 285

Changing windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . 236

Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Checklist Seat upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Childproof lock Rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Child safety seat ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Child seat Categorisation in groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Groups 0 and 0+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 on the front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Cleaning alloy wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Cleaning chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Cleaning engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Cleaning steel wheel rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Cleaning windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Clock, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 In the door trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 In the front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Coolant Checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Coolant fluid Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Cooling system Coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Correct adjustment of front seat head re- straints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Correct adjustment of rear seat head restraints In-use and non-use positions . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Correct sitting position front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Incorrect sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

308 Index

Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Adjust the stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Deactivating temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Setting the speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Cruise speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

D Danger of fitting a child seat on the front pas-

senger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Dash panel cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Data entry control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Date display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Daytime driving lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Deactivating front passenger airbag Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Deactivating the airbag Front passenger front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Diesel engine Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Diesel engine particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

DIS Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Average speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Driving time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Instantaneous fuel consumption . . . . . . . . 86

Disposal Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Distance covered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 86

Door and rear lid warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Door lock cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Doors Childproof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Locking the doors manually if the central

locking fails to work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Driver see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . 10, 11, 12

Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Auto-check system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 CD, radio and telephone display . . . . . . . . . 73 Door and rear lid warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Handbrake warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Red symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Yellow symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

driver seat Assigning the key to the seat . . . . . . . . . . 139

Driver seat Activating stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 With memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Driving Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Economically / Environmentally friendly . 196

Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

DRP see Dynamic gear control programme . . . 184

Dynamic gear control programme . . . . . . . . . . 184

E Economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Possible malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Switches on the driver door . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Switch on front passenger's door . . . . . . . 110

Electronic differential lock How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

309Index

Emergencies Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Disconnecting the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 257 Sunroof emergency activation . . . . . . . . . . 114 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Tyre mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Engine Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Engine compartment Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Engine coolant G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Checking the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Engine oil pressure too low . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Oil sensor defective . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Engine speed governing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Environmental friendliness . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Roof racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Environmentally friendly driving . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Environmental tip Avoiding pollution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 see also Electronic Stability Control . . . . . 165

Exhaust gas purification system . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

F Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Front drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . 44

Fuel Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Fuel level low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Instantaneous fuel consumption . . . . . . . . 86 Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 294

Fuel tank opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Fuel: save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

G Gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Gear shift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

General overview of the engine compartment 297

Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

H Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Headlights Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Automatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Automatic headlight control photosensors . .116 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Head restraint Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Head restraints Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Removing and fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

310 Index

Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Heating element wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

High pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

How to jump start description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

I Identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Ignition key Safety interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Indicator lamps Glow plug system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Indicator lamps - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Instruments Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 119

Interior lights Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Interior mirror With manual anti-dazzle setting . . . . . . . . 130

Interior monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Intermittent wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

J Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 257

Jump-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

K Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Air conditioner settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Settings for the driver seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Kick-down feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

L Lamps

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Cruise speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 119

Lights Adaptive headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Automatic headlight control . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Coming home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Dipped beam headlights faulty . . . . . . . . . . 83 Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . 120 Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Leaving home function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Reverse lights faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Xenon lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Load compartment in the luggage compart- ment

see Loading the luggage compartment . . . 16

Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . 16

Locking the doors manually if the central lock- ing fails to work

Locking the doors manually if the central locking fails to work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Long periods of non-use Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Ski bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 see also Loading the luggage compartment . .16

Luggage rack see Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

M Main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 122

Maintenance Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Mirrors Activating stored settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Automatic exterior mirror adjustment . . . . 137 Heated exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

311Index

Storing settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Mobile phones and two-way radios . . . . . . . . 223

multitronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

N Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

O Observations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Octane number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Onboard computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Overview Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

P Paddle levers

tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Paintwork Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 multitronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Parking aid SEAT Parking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 SEAT Parking System plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Parking aid acoustic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Passenger see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . 10, 11, 12

Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Photosensor faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . . . . 19

Plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Plastic parts cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 149

Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 210

Q Quartz clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

R Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Radio display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Rain sensor faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Reading lights Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Rear drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Rear lid Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Rear side window sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Rear view mirrors Anti-dazzle interior mirror with automatic

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Anti-dazzle setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Interior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Rear window sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Registration light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Remote control key Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Locking and unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Locking and unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . 106 Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Remote control keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Re-synchronising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Removing and fitting the wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Repairs Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Replacement of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Reverse gear Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Attachment points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Rubber seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

312 Index

Run-flat tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Running in Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

S SAFE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Aspects to take into account . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Driving safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Safety instructions Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Safety notes Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Deactivating front passenger airbag . . . . . . 45 Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Seat adjustment Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Seat belt cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Seat belt control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Seat belt position Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Seat belt protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Incorrectly fastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Seat belt tensioner control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Seats Electric adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Electric backrest adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Manual adjustment of lumbar support . . . 134 Manual backrest angle adjustment . . . . . 134 Moving the seat forwards and backwards 133 Seat height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Seat upholstery Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 cleaning Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Cleaning and maintenance of natural leath-

er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 cleaning the trim fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 synthetic leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Servotronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Sitting position driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Sitting position, occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Ski bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Sliding/tilting sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Automatic close function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Emergency activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251, 296

Solar-powered blower/sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Solar sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Spare keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Spare wheel Steel rim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 83

Speed warning function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Start-Stop Activating and deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Steam jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Steering Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Manual steering wheel adjustment . . . . . 165

Steering wheel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

313Index

Stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Switches on the driver door Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Symbols Red symbols in central display . . . . . . . . . . 78 Yellow symbols on central display . . . . . . . 80

T Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

The danger of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . 20

The environment Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Warming up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . 296

tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

tiptronic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200, 290 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Notes on towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200, 201 Removable towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Towing bracket, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Towing eyes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Tow starting General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Traction control system How the system works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Traction control system (ASR) control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Turn signal lamps Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Trailer turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Tyre mobility system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Tyre Mobility System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 91, 242 Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Tyre pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Tyre repair kit Tyre Mobility System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Tyres and wheels Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Tyres tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Tyres useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Tyres with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . 242

U Underbody protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Upholstery Treating your upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

V Vehicle care

Treating your upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Vehicle identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Vehicle identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Vehicle maintenance electrically adjustable seats . . . . . . . . . . . 218 heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 natural leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 non-electrically adjustable seats . . . . . . . 218 seats with airbag components . . . . . . . . . 218 seats without airbag components . . . . . . 218 synthetic leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 trim fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 unheated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Vehicle modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Vehicle paintwork Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . 210

Vehicle washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

W Warning lamp

Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Warning lamps Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

314 Index

Engine management (EPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . 66 Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Red symbols in central display . . . . . . . . . . 78 Seat belt warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Yellow symbols on central display . . . . . . . 80

Warning lamps - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Washing by hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Washing with high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . 212

Wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Wearing suitable shoes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242, 296 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Why assume the correct sitting position? . . . . . 28

Why should head restraints be correctly adjus- ted? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Why wear seat belts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 19, 28

Windows Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Windscreen wiper blades Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Changing blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Winter Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Winter conditions Defrost function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Winter driving Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Winter operation Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Wiper and washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Wooden trim cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

315Index

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to under- stand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.

All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.

Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.

SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the Copyright Act.

All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.04.13

SEAT recommends Castrol

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

<

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Exeo Seat works, you can view and download the Seat Exeo 2013 Owner’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Seat Exeo as well as other Seat manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Seat Exeo. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Seat Exeo 2013 Owner’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Seat Exeo 2013 Owner’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Seat Exeo 2013 Owner’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Seat Exeo 2013 Owner’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Seat Exeo 2013 Owner’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.